Sony Dsc-f828 Service Manual 4q6c1j

DSC-F828 SERVICE MANUAL

LEVEL

1

US Model Canadian Model AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Korea Model Tourist Model Chinese Model Japanese Model

Ver 1.0 2003. 12 Revision History

Link SPECIFICATIONS

SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

ORNAMENTAL PARTS

• INSTRUCTION MANUAL is shown at the end of this document.

DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

DSC-F828

SPECIFICATIONS x Camera [System] Image device 11 mm (2/3 type) color CCD 4-color filter (RGBE) Total pixels number of camera Approx. 8 314 000 pixels Effective pixels number of camera Approx. 8 068 000 pixels Lens Carl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar T* 7.1× zoom lens f=7.1 to 51 mm (35 mm camera conversion: 28 to 200 mm) F2.0-2.8 Filter diameter: 58 mm (2 3/8 inches) Exposure control Automatic, Shutter speed priority, Aperture priority, Manual exposure, Scene selection (4 modes) White balance Automatic, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Incandescent, Flash, One-push File format (DCF compliant) Still images: Exif Ver. 2.2, JPEG compliant, RAW, TIFF, DPOF compatible Audio with still image: MPEG1 compliant (Monaural) Movies: MPEG1 compliant (Monaural) Recording medium “Memory Stick”, Microdrive, CompactFlash card (TypeI/TypeII) Flash Recommended distance (when ISO sensitivity is set to Auto) 0.5 to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to 14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W) 0.6 to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T) Viewfinder Electric viewfinder (color)

[Output connectors]

[LCD screen]

x AC-L15A/L15B AC Adaptor

LCD used 4.6 cm (1.8 type) TFT drive Total number of dots 134 400 (560×240) dots

Power requirements AC 100 − 240 V, 50/60 Hz Current consumption 0.35 − 0.18 A Power consumption 18 W Output voltage 8.4 V DC, 1.5 A Operating temperature range 0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F) Storage temperature range −20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F) Maximum dimensions Approx. 56 × 31 × 100 mm (2 1/4 × 1 1/4 × 4 inches) (W/H/D), excluding projecting parts Mass Approx. 190 g (6.7 oz) excluding power cord (mains lead)

[Finder] LCD used 1.1 cm (0.44 type) TFT drive Total number of dots 235 200 (980×240) dots

[Power, general] Used battery pack NP-FM50 Power requirements 7.2 V Power consumption (during shooting with LCD screen on) 2.2 W Operating temperature range 0° to + 40°C (32° to +104°F) (When using the Microdrive: +5° to +40°C (41° to +104°F)) Storage temperature range −20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F) Dimensions (lens: W-end) 134.4 × 91.1 × 157.2 mm (5 3/8 3 × 5/8 × 6 1/4 inches) (W/H/D, protruding portions not included) Mass Approx. 955 g (33.7 oz) (battery pack NP-FM50, “Memory Stick,” shoulder strap, lens cap, and so on included) Microphone Electret condenser microphone Speaker Dynamic speaker Exif Print Compatible PRINT Image Matching II Compatible PictBridge Compatible

A/V OUT (MONO) jack (Monaural) Minijack Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω , unbalanced, sync negative Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load) Output impedance 2.2 kΩ Accessory jack Mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm) USB jack mini-B USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0 HighSpeed compliant)

x NP-FM50 battery pack Used battery Lithium-ion battery Maximum voltage DC 8.4 V Nominal voltage DC 7.2 V Capacity 8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)

Accessories • • • • • • • • • • • •

AC Adaptor (1) Power cord (mains lead) (1) USB cable (1) Battery pack NP-FM50 (1) A/V connecting cable (1) Shoulder strap (1) Lens cap (1) Lens cap strap (1) Lens hood (1) CD-ROM (USB driver: SPVD-013) (1) CD-ROM (Image Data Converter) (1) Operating Instructions (1)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

—2—

DSC-F828

CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

CAUTION : Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY.

ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT À LA SÉCURITÉ! LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

SAFETY CHECK-OUT After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer. 1.

2. 3.

Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are "pinched" or high-wattage resistors. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

4.

Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. 6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C during repairing. • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the circuit board (within 3 times). • Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering or unsoldering.

—3—

DSC-F828

[Description on Self-diagnosis Display]

Self-diagnosis display • C: ss: ss The contents which can be handled by customer, are displayed. • E: ss: ss The contents which can be handled by engineer, are displayed.

Display Code

Countermeasure

Cause

Caution Display During Error

C:32:01

Turn off the main power then back on.

Trouble with hardware.

SYSTEM ERROR

C:13:01

Replace the memory stick. Format the memory stick with the DSC-F828.

• The type of memory stick that cannot be used by this machine, is inserted. • Data is damaged. • Unformatted memory stick is inserted.

MEDIA ERROR

E:91:01

Checking of flash unit or replacement of flash unit.

Abnormality when flash is being charged.

Flash LED Flash display Flashing at 3.2 Hz

Checking of lens drive circuit

When failed in the focus initialization.

E:61:00 *1 E61:10 *1 Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash unit. *1: The error display is given in two ways.

—4—

—

DSC-F828 MAIN PARTS Note:

• Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given. • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. • The parts numbers of such as a cabinet are also appeared in this section. Refer to the parts number mentioned below the name of parts to order.

1.

ORNAMENTAL PARTS

LCD window adhesive sheet 3-087-155-01 LCD window 3-086-480-01

Jack cover 3-087-153-01

—5—

DSC-F828

Checking supplied accessories. Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your digital still camera.

Power cord (Main lead) (1) (AEP, E model) 0 1-769-608-11 Power cord (Main lead) (1) (AUS model) 0 1-696-819-11 Power cord (Main lead) (1) (UK, HK model) 0 1-783-374-11 Power cord (Main lead) (1) (US, CND model) 0 1-790-107-22 Power cord (Main lead) (1) (JE, J model) 0 1-790-732-12 Power cord (Main lead) (1) (KR model) 0 1-776-985-11 Power cord (Main lead) (1) (CH model) 0 1-782-476-13

CD-ROM (SPVD-013 (I) USB Driver) (1) (US, CND, J model) 3-087-331-01 CD-ROM (SPVD-013 USB Driver) (1) (AEP, UK, E, HK, JE, KR, AUS, CH model) 3-087-330-01

AC adaptor (1) (AC-L15A) 0 1-477-533-51

A/V connecting cable (1) 1-824-111-11

NP-FM50 battery pack (1) (not supplied) USB cable (1) 1-827-038-11 Lens cap (1) X-3952-016-1

String assy cap X-3953-980-1

Lens hood (1) 3-086-481-01

2-pin conversion adaptor (1) (JE model) 1-569-007-12

2-pin conversion adaptor (1) (E model) 1-569-008-12

S-houlder strap (1) 3-071-638-11 Clamp filter (Ferrite core) (for AC-L15A) 1-543-798-21

CD-ROM (Image Data Converter) (1) 3-087-661-01

Other accessories 3-084-996-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE)(J) 3-084-996-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION(ENGLISH) (US,CND,AEP,UK,E,AUS,CH,JE,HK) 3-084-996-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH/GERMAN)(CND,AEP) 3-084-996-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (AEP,E,JE) 3-084-996-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/DUTCH)(AEP)

• Abbreviation CND : Canadian model AUS : Australian model CH : Chinese model HK : Hong Kong model KR : Korea model JE : Tourist model J : Japanese model

3-084-996-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONALCHINESE) (E,CH,JE,HK) 3-084-996-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (RUSSIAN/SWEDISH)(AEP) 3-084-996-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)(E) 3-084-996-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)(JE,KR) 3-084-997-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE)(J) 3-087-904-01 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW (JAPANESE)(J) 3-087-904-11 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW (ENGLISH/FRENCH/GERMAN/SPANISH/ITALIAN/DUTCH/ PORTUGUESE/TRADITIONAL CHINESE/ SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)(EXCEPT J)

—6—

Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Note : Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

DSC-F828

9-876-279-41

Sony EMCS Co.

—8—

2003L1600-1 ©2003.12 Published by DI CS Strategy Div.

3-084-996-11(1)

Getting started ________________________

Shooting still images __________________

Digital Still Camera

Viewing still images ___________________

Operating Instructions

Deleting still images ___________________

Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly, and retain it for future reference.

Before advanced operations _____________

Owner’s Record The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product. Model No. DSC-F828 Serial No.

Advanced still image shooting____________

Advanced still image viewing_____________

Still image editing ______________________

Still image printing ______________________ (PictBridge printer) Enjoying movies________________________

Enjoying images on your computer ______

Troubleshooting ________________________

DSC-F828

Additional information ___________________

Index______________________________ © 2003 Sony Corporation

WARNING To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture. CAUTION The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

For the Customers in the U.S.A.

This symbol is intended to alert the to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. If you have any questions about this product, you may call: Sony Customer Information Services Center 1-800-222-SONY (7669) The number below is for the FCC related matters only. Regulatory Information

Declaration of Conformity Trade Name: SONY Model No.: DSC-F828 Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc. Address: 680 Kinderkamack Road, Oradell, NJ 07649 U.S.A. Telephone No.: 201-930-6972

This symbol is intended to alert the to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

2

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: —Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. —Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. —Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. —Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. The supplied interface cable must be used with the equipment in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.

For the Customers in the U.S.A. and Canada RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES Lithium-Ion batteries are recyclable. You can help preserve our environment by returning your used rechargeable batteries to the collection and recycling location nearest you.

If the plug supplied with this equipment has a detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never use the plug without the fuse cover. If you should lose the fuse cover, please your nearest Sony service station.

For the Customers in Europe This product has been tested and found compliant with the limits sets out in the EMC Directive for using connection cables shorter than 3 meters (9.8 feet).

Notice If static electricity or electromagnetism causes data transfer to discontinue midway (fail), restart the application or disconnect and connect the USB cable again. Certain countries or regions may regulate disposal of the battery used to power this product. Please consult with your local authority.

For more information regarding recycling of rechargeable batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-8837, or visit http://www.rbrc.org/ Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking Lithium-Ion batteries.

CAUTION

Attention

TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

The electromagnetic fields at the specific frequencies may influence the picture and sound of this digital camera.

Notice for the customers in the United Kingdom A moulded plug complying with BS 1363 is fitted to this equipment for your safety and convenience. Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to be replaced, a fuse of the same rating as the supplied one and approved by ASTA or BSI to BS 1362, (i.e., marked with or mark) must be used.

3

Before using your camera Trial recording

Do not shake or strike the camera

Before you record one-time events, you may want to make a trial recording to make sure that the camera is working correctly.

In addition to malfunctions and inability to record images, this may render the recording medium unusable or image data breakdown, damage or loss may occur.

No compensation for contents of the recording Contents of the recording cannot be compensated for if recording or playback is not possible due to a malfunction of your camera or recording medium, etc.

Back up recommendation To avoid the potential risk of data loss, always copy (back up) data to a disk.

Notes on image data compatibility • This camera conforms with the Design rule for Camera File system universal standard established by the JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association). • Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed.

Precaution on copyright Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the provision of the copyright laws.

4

LCD screen, LCD finder (only models with an LCD finder) and lens • The LCD screen and the LCD finder are manufactured using extremely highprecision technology so over 99.99% of the pixels are operational for effective use. However, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (white, red, blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the LCD finder. These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the recording in any way. • Be careful when placing the camera near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD screen, the finder or the lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause malfunctions. • Do not press the LCD screen hardly. The screen may be uneven and that may cause a malfunction. • Images may be trailed on the LCD screen in a cold location. This is not a malfunction.

The zoom lens This camera is equipped with zoom lens. Be careful not to bump the lens, and be careful not to apply force to it.

Remove dirt from the surface of the flash If the dirt changes color or sticks to the surface of the flash due to the heat of the flash, sufficient light may not be emitted.

Do not get the camera wet When taking pictures outdoors in the rain or under similar conditions, be careful not to get the camera wet. If water gets inside of the camera, it may cause the camera to malfunction, sometimes beyond repair. If moisture condensation occurs, see page 143 and follow the instructions on how to remove it before using the camera.

Do not expose the camera to sand or dust Using the camera in sandy or dusty locations may cause a malfunction.

Do not aim the camera at the sun or other bright light This may cause irrecoverable damage to your eyes or the malfunction of your camera.

Note on locations where you can use the camera Do not use the camera near a location that generates strong radio waves or emits radiation. The camera may not be able to record or play back properly.

The pictures used in this manual

Trademarks

The photographs used as examples of pictures in this manual are reproduced images, and are not actual images shot using this camera.

• “Memory Stick,” , and “MagicGate Memory Stick” are trademarks of Sony Corporation. • “Memory Stick Duo” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation. • “Memory Stick PRO” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation. • “MagicGate” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation. • “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. • Microsoft and Windows are ed trademarks of the U.S. Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. • Macintosh, Mac OS and QuickTime are trademarks or ed trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. • Pentium is a trademark or a ed trademark of Intel Corporation. • CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation. • Microdrive is a ed trademark of Hitachi Global Storage Technologies in the United States and/or other countries. • In addition, system and product names used in this manual are, in general, trademarks or ed trademarks of their respective developers or manufacturers. However, the ™ or ® marks are not used in all cases in this manual.

About the Carl Zeiss lens This camera is equipped with a Carl Zeiss lens which is capable of reproducing fine images. The lens for this camera uses the MTF# measurement system for cameras developed tly by Carl Zeiss, in , and Sony Corporation, and offers the same quality as other Carl Zeiss lenses. The lens for your camera is also T*-coated to suppress unwanted reflection and faithfully reproduce colors. #

MTF is an abbreviation of Modulation Transfer Function, a numeric value indicating the amount of light from a specific part of the subject gathered at the corresponding position in the image.

5

Table of contents Before using your camera ......................... 4 Identifying the parts .................................. 9

Getting started Charging the battery pack ....................... 14 Using the AC Adaptor ............................ 17 Using your camera abroad ...................... 17 Turning your camera on/off .................... 18 How to use the multi-selector ................. 18 Setting the date and time......................... 19

Shooting still images

6

Inserting and removing a recording medium ........................................................ 21 Switching the recording medium........ 21 Inserting and removing a “Memory Stick” .............................................. 22 Inserting and removing a Microdrive/ CF card ........................................... 23 Setting the still image size ...................... 24 Image size and quality ............................ 25 Basic still image shooting – Using auto mode.......................... 27 Checking the last image shot – Quick Review .............................. 29 Shooting images with the finder ......... 29 Indicators on the screen during shooting ........................................................ 30 Using the zoom feature....................... 30

Changing the lens orientation............. 32 Shooting close-ups – Macro............... 33 Using the self-timer............................ 34 Using the flash.................................... 34 Inserting the date and time on a still image.............................................. 36 Shooting according to scene conditions – Scene Selection ........................... 37

Viewing still images Viewing images on the screen of your camera ............................................ 39 Viewing images on a TV screen............. 41

Deleting still images Deleting images ...................................... 43 Formatting a recording medium ............. 45

Before advanced operations How to setup and operate your camera ........................................................ 47 Changing menu settings ..................... 47 Changing items in the SET UP screen ........................................................ 48 How to use the command dial ............ 48 Deciding the still image quality.............. 49 Creating or selecting a folder ................. 50 Creating a new folder ......................... 50

Selecting the recording folder.............51

Advanced still image shooting Manual features to photo-shooting situations .....................................52 Exposure (shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity) Shooting with Program auto ...................54 Program Shift......................................54 Shooting with shutter speed priority mode ........................................................55 Shooting with aperture priority mode .....56 Shooting with manual exposure mode ....57 Selecting the metering mode...................58 Adjusting the exposure – EV adjustment .............................59 Displaying a histogram .......................60 Shooting with the exposure fixed – AE LOCK ....................................62 Shooting three images with the exposure shifted – Exposure Bracket.............63 Selecting the ISO sensitivity – ISO.........64 Focus Choosing an auto focus method ..............65 Choosing a focus range finder frame – AF range finder............................65

Choosing a focus operation – AF Mode......................................66 Focusing manually ..................................67 Flash Selecting a flash mode ............................68 Adjusting the flash level – Flash Level...70 Using an external flash............................71 Using the Sony Flash ..........................72 Using a commercially available external flash ................................................72 Color Adjusting color tones – White Balance...73 Selecting color reproduction – Color ......74 Burst Shooting images in succession................75 Shooting in Multi Burst mode – Multi Burst...................................76 Others Shooting in the dark ................................77 NightShot ............................................77 NightFraming......................................78 Shooting with special effects – Picture Effect ...............................79 Shooting still images in RAW mode – RAW ............................................79 Shooting still images in TIFF mode – TIFF .............................................80 Shooting still images for e-mail – E-Mail ..........................................81

Shooting still images with audio files – Voice ........................................... 81

Advanced still image viewing Selecting the folder and playing back images – Folder .............................. 83 Enlarging a portion of a still image ........ 84 Enlarging an image – Playback zoom ............................ 84 Recording an enlarged image – Trimming..................................... 85 Playing back successive images – Slide show ................................... 85 Rotating still images – Rotate................. 86 Playing back images shot in Multi Burst mode ............................................... 87 Playing back continuously.................. 87 Playing back frame by frame ............. 87

Still image editing Protecting images – Protect .................... 89 Changing image size – Resize ................ 90 Choosing images to print – Print (DPOF) mark ...................... 91

Still image printing (PictBridge printer) Connecting to a PictBridge printer..........93 Preparing the camera...........................93 Connecting the camera to the printer ........................................................93 Printing images........................................94 Printing index-images .............................96

Enjoying movies Shooting movies ....................................100 Viewing movies on the screen ..............101 Deleting movies.....................................102 Editing movies.......................................103 Cutting movies ..................................104 Deleting unnecessary portions of movies ......................................................104

Enjoying images on your computer Copying images to your computer – For Windows s ....................105 Installing the USB driver ..................106 Installing “Image Transfer” ..............107 Installing “ImageMixer” ...................108 Connecting the camera to your computer ......................................................109

7

Copying images using “Image Transfer” ...................................................... 110 Changing “Image Transfer” settings ...................................................... 111 Copying images without using “Image Transfer” .......................... 111 Viewing the images on your computer ...................................................... 113 Image file storage destinations and file names............................................ 114 Viewing an image previously copied to a computer ....................................... 116 Copying images to your computer – For Macintosh s .................. 117

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting .................................... 119 Warnings and messages ........................ 130 Self-diagnosis display – If a code starting with an alphabet letter appears ..... 133

Additional information

8

The number of images that can be saved/ shooting time ................................ 134 Menu items ........................................... 137 SET UP items........................................ 140 Precautions............................................ 143 The “Memory Stick”............................. 144 The Microdrive ..................................... 145

On “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack ........ 146 Specifications ....................................... 147 Display window.................................... 149 The LCD/finder screen ......................... 150 Quick reference chart ........................... 155

Index Index ..................................................... 158

S NIGHTSHOT/NIGHTFRAMING button (77) T FOCUS (AUTO/MANUAL) switch (67)

Identifying the parts See the pages in parentheses for details of operation.

1 2 3 4 5

q; qa qs qd qf qg qh qj qk ql w;

6 7 8 9

A Display window B WB (White balance) button (73) C (Display window backlight) button D (Exposure) button (57, 59) E Shutter button (27) F Hologram AF emitter (35, 140) G Self-timer lamp (34) H Zoom ring (30) I Manual focus ring (67)

• Pressing the (Display window backlight) button turns on the backlight in the display window for about seven seconds.

J K L M N O P Q

Flash emitter (34) Infrared ray emitter (77) Speaker Advanced accessory shoe (71) OPEN (FLASH) switch (69) (Metering mode) button (58) (Flash) button (68) /BRK (Burst/Bracket) button (63, 75, 76) R (Macro) button (33)

9

K

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H

MENU button (47, 137) (Flash) lamp (68) Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) (18) Jack cover (14, 17) A/V OUT (MONO) jack (41) (USB) jack (109) DC IN jack (14, 17) /CF (“Memory Stick”/CF card) switch (21) I Access lamp (22)

10

q; qa qs qd qf

qg J Mode dial (27) :To shoot still images in auto adjustment mode P: To shoot still images in program auto mode S: To shoot in shutter speed priority mode A: To shoot in aperture priority mode M: To shoot in manual exposure mode SCN: To shoot in Scene Selection mode

L M N O

SET UP: To set the SET UP items :To shoot movies :To view or edit images AE LOCK/ (Delete) button (43, 62) Command dial (48) OPEN (CF) lever (23) CF card cover (23) CF card eject lever (24)

7 1 8 2 3 4 5 6 A B C D E F G H I J

9 q;

LCD screen Finder (29) Finder adjustment lever (29) FINDER/LCD switch (29) (Screen status) button (30) / (Self-timer/Index) button (34, 40) POWER lamp (18) POWER switch (18) (Digital zoom/Playback zoom) button (30, 84) 7 (Quick review) button (29)

11

5

1 2

6 3

7

4

8 9

Attaching the lens cap and the shoulder strap

Lens cap

Shoulder strap

12

A B C D E F

Hook for shoulder strap Tripod receptacle Microphone Lens ACC (Accessory) jack Battery/“Memory Stick” cover (14) G RESET button (119) H Battery eject lever (15) I Hook for shoulder strap • Use the ACC (accessory) jack to connect an external flash or the remote control tripod. • Use a tripod with a screw length of less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inch). You will be unable to firmly secure the camera to tripods having longer screws, and may damage the camera.

Attaching the lens hood

Storing the lens hood

When you shoot in bright lighting conditions, such as outdoors, we recommend that you use the lens hood to reduce the image quality deterioration caused by unnecessary light.

The lens hood can be attached in the reverse direction to store it with the camera when it is not in use.

1 Position the lens hood as shown below, by aligning the mark on the lens hood and the x mark on the lens, and attach the hood to the lens.

2 Turn the lens hood clockwise until it clicks.

• You can attach the lens cap with the lens hood attached.

1 Position the lens hood as shown below, by aligning the mark on the lens hood and the x mark on the lens, and attach the hood to the lens.

2 Turn the lens hood clockwise until it clicks.

13

Getting started

Charging the battery pack Battery eject lever

3 1

DC plug b mark

2

1 2 , Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cover. Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow. • Be sure to turn off your camera when charging the battery pack (page 18). • Your camera operates with the “InfoLITHIUM” NP-FM50 battery pack (M Series) (supplied). You can use only M Series battery pack (page 146).

2 , Install the battery pack, then close the battery/“Memory Stick” cover. Insert the battery pack with the b mark facing toward the battery compartment as illustrated. Make sure the battery pack is firmly inserted all the way, then close the cover. • The battery pack is easily inserted by pushing the battery eject lever at the front of the battery compartment to the front side.

14

Jack cover

3

AC Adaptor

, Open the jack cover and connect the AC Adaptor (supplied) to the DC IN jack of your camera. Open the cover in the arrow direction as illustrated above. Connect the plug with the v mark facing up. • Do not short the DC plug of the AC Adaptor with a metallic object, as this may cause a malfunction. • Clean the DC plug of the AC Adaptor with a dry cotton bud. Do not use the dirty plug. Use of the dirty plug may not properly charge the battery pack.

Power cord (mains lead)

1

4

– [LCD Backlight] or [EVF Backlight] is set to [Normal] – Using a “Memory Stick” – Not using the NightShot or NightFraming function. • After charging the battery pack, disconnect the AC Adaptor from the DC IN jack of your camera and the wall outlet (wall socket).

Battery remaining indicators The battery remaining indicators on the screen or on the display window show the remaining shooting or viewing time. 80min

To remove the battery pack LCD screen/Finder

, Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC Adaptor and then to a wall outlet (wall socket).

Battery eject lever

During charging, the battery mark in the display window flashes, and after charging is completed, “Full” appears. The available shooting time is indicated

Display window

• The battery remaining time on the screen or on the display window may not be correct under certain circumstances or conditions. • When you switch the FINDER/LCD switch or /CF switch, it takes about one minute for the correct battery remaining time to appear.

Charging time Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cover. Slide the battery eject lever in the direction of the arrow, and remove the battery pack. • Be careful not to drop the battery pack when removing it.

• The available shooting time on the display window is calculated as if the camera were used under the following conditions: – The mode dial is set to

Getting started

2 To a wall outlet (wall socket)

Approximate time to charge a completely discharged battery pack using the AC Adaptor at a temperature of 25°C (77°F). Battery pack

Charging time (min.)

NP-FM50 (supplied)

Approx. 150

15

Number of images and battery life that can be recorded/ viewed The tables show the approximate number of images and the battery life that can be recorded/ viewed when you shoot images in normal mode with a fully charged battery pack at a temperature of 25°C (77°F). The numbers of images that can be recorded or viewed take into changing the optional “Memory Stick” or Microdrive as necessary. Note that the actual numbers may be less than indicated depending on the conditions of use.

Shooting still images Under the average conditions1) NP-FM50 (supplied) Recording No. of Battery life medium images (min.) “Memory Stick” Approx. 370 Approx. 185 Microdrive Approx. 350 Approx. 175 1) Shooting

in the following situations: – (P. Quality) is set to [Fine] – [AF Mode] is set to [Monitor] – Shooting one time every 30 seconds – The zoom is switched alternately between the W and T ends – The flash strobes once every two times – The power turns on and off once every ten times

16

Viewing still images2) Recording medium “Memory Stick” Microdrive

NP-FM50 (supplied) No. of Battery life images (min.) Approx. 9400 Approx. 470 Approx. 5800 Approx. 290

2) Viewing

single images in order at about three second intervals

Shooting movies3) NP-FM50 (supplied) “Memory Stick” Microdrive Continuous Approx. 200 shooting 3)

Approx. 160

Shooting continuously at [160] image size

• The number of images and the battery life that can be recorded/viewed are decreased under the following conditions: – The surrounding temperature is low – The flash is used – The camera has been turned on and off many times – The zoom is used frequently – The NightShot or NightFraming function is activated – [LCD Backlight] or [EVF Backlight] is set to [Bright] in the SET UP settings – The battery power is low. The battery capacity decreases as you use it more and more and as time es (page 147).

• The battery life and the number of images recordable or viewable does not depend on the image size setting. • The number of images is almost the same whether you use the finder or the LCD screen for shooting/viewing images. • When using a CF card, the battery life and the number of images recordable or viewable may differ.

Using the AC Adaptor

Using your camera abroad

Jack cover

Power cord (mains lead) DC plug 1

1

AC Adaptor

, Open the jack cover, then connect the AC Adaptor (supplied) to the DC IN jack of the camera. Open the jack cover in the arrow direction as illustrated above. Connect the plug with the v mark facing up. • Connect the AC Adaptor to an easily accessible wall outlet (wall socket) close by. If any trouble occurs while using the adaptor, immediately shut off the power by disconnecting the plug from the wall outlet (wall socket).

2 , Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC Adaptor and to a wall outlet (wall socket).

Power sources You can use your camera in any country or region with the supplied AC Adaptor within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Use a commercially available AC plug adaptor [a], if necessary, depending on the design of the wall outlet (wall socket) [b].

Getting started

2 To a wall outlet (wall socket)

AC-L15A/L15B

• Do not use an electrical transformer (travel converter), as this may cause a malfunction.

• When you have finished using the AC Adaptor, disconnect it from the DC IN jack of the camera and the wall outlet (wall socket). • The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (mains) as long as it is connected to the wall outlet (wall socket), even if the unit itself has been turned off.

17

Turning your camera on/off The Auto Power Off function

POWER switch POWER lamp

, Slide the POWER switch in the direction of the arrow. The POWER lamp lights in green and the power is on. When you turn on the camera for the first time, the Clock Set screen appears (page 19). To turn off the power Slide the POWER switch in the direction of the arrow again, the POWER lamp goes out, and the camera turns off.

18

If no tasks are performed for about three minutes when shooting, viewing images, or setting up the camera while using the battery pack, power is automatically shut off to preserve battery power. However, in the following circumstances, even if the battery pack is being used to power the camera, the Auto Power Off function will not work. • Movies are being played back • A slide show is being shown • A cable is connected to the (USB) jack or the A/V OUT (MONO) jack

How to use the multi-selector Camera 1 AF Mode: Monitor Digital Zoom: Precision Date/Time: Off Red Eye Reduction: Off Hologram AF: Auto Auto Review: Off SELECT

Setup 2 File Number: USB Connect: OK Video Out: Cancel Clock Set:

To change the current settings of the camera, bring up the menu or the SET UP screen (pages 47, 48), and use the multiselector to make the changes. When setting up the menu, move the multiselector to v/V/b/B to select the item or the setting and make the setting. When setting up the SET UP, move the multi-selector to v/V/b/B to select the item or the setting and press the center of the multi-selector to make the setting.

Setting the date and time Clock Set Y/M/D M/D/Y D/M/Y

Y/M/D M/D/Y D/M/Y 2003 / 1 / 1

POWER switch

1 , Set the mode dial to

12 : 00

• You can carry out this operation even when the mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN, or . • To set the time and the date again, set the mode dial to SET UP, select [Clock Set] in (Setup 2) (pages 48, 142), then proceed from Step 3.

12 : 00

OK

AM

Cancel

2 .

2003 / 1 / 1

OK

AM

Cancel

Getting started

Clock Set

Mode dial

3

, Slide the POWER switch in the direction of the arrow to turn on the power.

, Select the desired date format by moving the multi-selector to v/V, then press the center.

The POWER lamp lights in green and the Clock Set screen appears on the screen.

You can select from [Y/M/D] (year/month/ day), [M/D/Y], and [D/M/Y]. • If the rechargeable button battery, which provides the power for saving the time data, is ever fully discharged (page 144), the Clock Set screen will appear again. When this happens, reset the date and time by starting from Step 3 above.

19

Clock Set

Clock Set

Clock Set

Y/M/D M/D/Y D/M/Y 2003 / 1 / 1

12 : 00

Y/M/D M/D/Y D/M/Y 2004 / 1 / 1

OK

AM

10 : 00

2004 / 1 / 1

OK

AM

Cancel

4

10 : 30

OK

AM

Cancel

5

, Select the year, month, day, hour, or minute item you want to set by moving the multiselector to b/B.

, Set the desired numerical value by moving the multiselector to v/V, then press the center.

v is shown above and V is shown below the selected item.

After setting the current numerical value, set the next item. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until all of the items have been set. • If you select [D/M/Y] in Step 3, set the time on a 24- hour cycle. • 12:00 AM stands for midnight and 12:00 PM stands for noon.

20

Y/M/D M/D/Y D/M/Y

Cancel

6 , Move the multi-selector to B to select [OK], then press the center. The date and time are set and the clock will start to keep time. • To cancel the setting process, select [Cancel], then press the center.


Inserting and removing a recording medium

Switching the recording medium

“Memory Stick”

You can use a “Memory Stick,” Microdrive, or CompactFlash card (CF card) as a recording medium. Microdrive

Hitachi Global Storage Technologies, Inc. DSCM-11000 (1 GB) We have checked the compatibility of CF cards compliant with CompactFlash Type I and Type II, however, we cannot guarantee proper operation of all CF cards.

Microdrive/ CompactFlash • Copying between media cannot be done with this camera. • For more information about the “Memory Stick,” see page 144. • The Microdrive is a compact and lightweight hard disk drive that complies with CompactFlash Type II standards. For more information about the Microdrive, see page 145. • Before using a Microdrive/CF card, be sure to format it using this camera. Otherwise, satisfactory performance may not be obtained (page 45).


/CF switch

, Select the recording medium with the /CF switch. : When recording images onto a “Memory Stick” or playing back images from a “Memory Stick.” CF : When recording images onto a Microdrive/CF card or playing back images from a Microdrive/CF card.

21

Inserting and removing a “Memory Stick”

Terminal side

Label side

3 1 2

1 2 , Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cover. Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow.

2 , Insert the “Memory Stick.” Insert the “Memory Stick” all the way in until it clicks as shown in the illustration. • Whenever you insert a “Memory Stick,” push it as far as it can go. If you do not insert it correctly, a proper recording or playback may not be carried out.

22

3

Access lamp

, Close the battery/“Memory Stick” cover. To remove the “Memory Stick” Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cover, then push the “Memory Stick” to pop it out. • Whenever the access lamp is lit, the camera is recording or reading out an image. Never remove the “Memory Stick” or turn off the power at this time. The data may be corrupted.

Inserting and removing a Microdrive/CF card

2

Front (The v markprinted side)

, Open the CF card cover.

, Insert the Microdrive/CF card.

Slide the OPEN (CF) lever in the direction of the arrow.

Insert the Microdrive/CF card all the way in as shown in the illustration.

3


1

, Close the CF card cover. • Close the CF card cover properly, otherwise you cannot record or play back images using the Microdrive/CF card.

• Whenever you insert a Microdrive/CF card, push it as far as it can go. If you do not insert it correctly, a proper recording or playback may not be carried out.

23

Setting the still image size To remove the Microdrive/CF card Open the CF card cover, then push the CF card eject lever so that the Microdrive/CF card is ejected.

8M

8M

3:2 5M 3M 1M

8M

Image Size Mode

3:2 5M 3M 1M Image Size Mode

1 Access lamp

CF card eject lever

MENU

, Set the mode dial to and turn on the power, then press MENU. The menu appears.

• Note that the Microdrive may be heated right after using the camera. • Whenever the access lamp is lit, the camera is recording or reading out an image. Never remove the Microdrive/CF card or turn off the power at this time. The data may be corrupted or the Microdrive/CF card may become unusable.

24

• You can carry out this operation even when the mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN.

8M

8M 3:2

5M

5M

3M 1M Image Size Mode

2 , Select (Image Size) by moving the multi-selector to b/ B, then select the desired image size by moving the multi-selector to v/V. The image size is set. After the setting is completed, press MENU. The menu disappears from the screen. • For more information about the image size, see page 25. • This setting is maintained even when the power is turned off.

Image size and quality Image size 8M 1) (3264×2448) Larger 3:2 2) (3264×2176) 5M (2592×1944) 3M (2048×1536) 1M (1280×960) VGA (640×480) Smaller

Examples • For storing important images or printing A3 size or fine A4 size images. • For printing A4 size or fine A5 size images. • For printing postcard size images. • For shooting a lot of images, attaching images to e-mail, or posting images to your home page.

1) The

default setting is [8M]. This size can give the highest image quality using this camera. 2) This option records images in a horizontal to vertical proportion of 3:2 to match the size of the print paper used.


You can choose image size (number of pixels) and image quality (compression ratio) based on the kind of images you want to shoot. The larger you make the image size and the higher you make the image quality, the better your image, but also the larger the amount of data needed to preserve your image. This means you can save fewer images in your recording medium. Choose an image size and quality level appropriately for the kind of images you want to shoot.

The number of images that can be saved in a “Memory Stick”3) The number of images that can be saved in Fine (Standard)4) mode are shown below. (Units: number of images) Capacity 16MB

32MB

64MB

128MB

MSX-256

MSX-512

MSX-1G

8M

4 (7)

8 (15)

16 (30)

32 (60)

59 (109)

121 (223)

247 (456)

3:2

4 (7)

8 (15)

16 (30)

32 (60)

59 (109)

121 (223)

247 (456)

5M

6 (11)

12 (23)

25 (48)

51 (96)

92 (174)

188 (354)

384 (723)

3M

10 (18)

20 (37)

41 (74)

82 (149)

148 (264)

302 (537)

617 (1097)

1M

24 (46)

50 (93)

101 (187)

202 (376)

357 (649)

726 (1320) 1482 (2694)

VGA

97 (243) 196 (491) 394 (985) 790 (1975) 1428 (3571) 2904 (7261)

Image size

5928 (14821)

3) When

[Mode] (REC Mode) is set to [Normal] For the number of images that can be saved in other modes, see pages 134, 135. 4) For more information about the image quality (compression ratio) mode, see page 49.

25

The number of images that can be saved in a Microdrive3) The number of images that can be saved in Fine (Standard)4) mode are shown below. (Units: number of images) Capacity Image size

1G (DSCM-11000)

8M

273 (505)

3:2

273 (505)

5M

426 (801)

3M

684 (1217)

1M

1643 (2988)

VGA

6573 (16434)

3) When

[Mode] (REC Mode) is set to [Normal] For the number of images that can be saved in other modes, see page 136. 4) For more information about the image quality (compression ratio) mode, see page 49.

26

• When the images recorded using other Sony devices are played back, the image size indication may be different from the actual image size. • When the images are viewed on the screen of the camera, they all look the same size. • Number of shooting images can differ from these values according to shooting conditions. • When the remaining number of images recordable is more than 9999, “>9999” is indicated on the screen. And when it is more than 999, “999” is indicated on the display window. • You can resize the images later (Resize function, see page 90).

Basic still image shooting – Using auto mode 80 min

Mode dial

FINE

101

98

1

2 , and

The recording folder name is indicated on the screen for about five seconds. Remove the lens cap. • Select the recording medium using the / CF switch (page 21). • You can create a new folder in the recording medium and select the folder for storing images (page 50).

, Hold the camera steadily with both hands and position a subject in the center of the focus frame. • The minimum focal distance to a subject is 50 cm (19 3/4 inches) (W)/60 cm (23 5/8 inches) (T). To shoot subjects at distances closer than this, use the macro mode (page 33). • The frame indicated on the screen shows the focus adjustment range. (AF range finder, see page 65.)

3

250 F2.0

0 EV

AE/AF lock indicator Flashes in green t Remains on


MAF

, Set the mode dial to turn on the camera.

8M

, Press and hold the shutter button halfway down. The camera beeps. When the AE/AF lock indicator stops flashing and remains on, the camera is ready for shooting. (The screen may be frozen for a split second depending on the subject.) When the surroundings are dark, the flash automatically pops up and strobes. • If you release your finger from the shutter button, shooting will be canceled. • When the camera does not beep, the AF adjustment is not complete. You can continue to shoot, but the focus is not set properly (except in Continuous AF, page 66).

27

80 min

8M

101

97

Mode dial for still image shooting When shooting still images with your camera, you can choose from the following shooting methods.

MAF

4 , Press the shutter button fully down. The shutter clicks, the shooting is completed, and the still image is saved in the recording medium. • When you are shooting with the battery pack, if no tasks are performed for a while with the camera turned on, power is automatically shut off to preserve battery power (page 18).

(Auto adjustment mode) The focus, exposure and white balance are automatically adjusted to allow easy shooting. The image quality is set to [Fine] (page 49). P (Program auto shooting) Shooting adjustment is automatically carried out just as in the auto adjustment mode. However, you can intentionally adjust the focus, exposure, etc. In addition, you can set the desired functions using the menu (pages 47 and 137). S (Shutter speed priority) You can select the shutter speed (page 55). In addition, you can set the desired shooting functions using menus (pages 47 and 137). A (Aperture priority) You can select the aperture value (page 56). In addition, you can set the desired shooting functions using menus (pages 47 and 137).

28

M (Manual exposure) You can manually adjust the shutter speed and the aperture value (page 57). In addition, you can set the desired shooting functions using menus (pages 47 and 137). SCN (Scene Selection) You can select from the following modes to shoot according to the scene conditions (page 37). – – – –

(Twilight mode) (Twilight portrait mode) (Landscape mode) (Portrait mode)

In addition, you can set the desired shooting functions using menus (pages 47 and 137).

Checking the last image shot – Quick Review

About Auto Focus

• The subject is distant from the camera and dark • The contrast between the subject and its background is poor • The subject is seen through glass, such as a window • A fast-moving subject • The subject has a reflection, such as that from a mirror, or there is a luminous body and a lustrous subject • A flashing subject • A backlit subject.

There are two Auto Focus functions: “AF range finder frame” which sets the focus position according to the subject position and size, and “AF mode” which sets when the camera starts and stops focusing on. See page 65 for details.

80 min

8M

101

8/8

Review

FINDER/LCD

switch 101-0008

2004 1 1 10:30PM

Finder adjustment lever

, Press 7 (quick review). To return to shooting mode, press the shutter button lightly or press 7 (quick review) again. To delete the image displayed on the screen 1 Press


When you try to shoot a subject that is hard to focus on, the AE/AF lock indicator will change to flashing slowly and the AE lock beep does not sound (except in Continuous AF, page 66). The Auto Focus function may be difficult to use with in the following subjects. In such cases, release the shutter button, then try to recompose the shot and focus again.

Shooting images with the finder

With the FINDER/LCD switch, you can choose to shoot either using the finder or the LCD screen. When you use the finder, the image does not appear on the LCD screen. Adjust the finder adjustment lever until the image appears clearly within the finder, then shoot the image.

(delete).

2 Select [Delete] by moving the multiselector to v, then press the center. The image is deleted.

29

Indicators on the screen during shooting

Using the zoom feature Indicators on T (telephoto) 80min

8M

W (wide-angle)

101

98

80 min

8M

101

80 min

98

x5.0

8M

101

98

x1.1

MAF

r Histogram on (Image information is displayed during playback)

Each time you press (screen status), the display changes in the following order. • The status of the screen changes between indicators-on and indicators-off when playing back or shooting movies. • For a detailed description of the indicators, see page 150. • For a detailed description of the histogram, see page 60. • This setting is maintained even when the power is turned off.

80min

101

98

, Turn the zoom ring to choose the desired image size for shooting. You can zoom in up to 7.1× using the optical zoom.

MAF

r Indicators off

MAF

30

8M

Zoom ring

The minimum distance needed to focus on a subject When the zoom is set all the way to the W side: approximately 50 cm (19 3/4 inches) from the end of the lens When the zoom is set all the way to the T side: approximately 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) from the end of the lens • When not using the camera, retract the lens in by setting the lens to its W-end position to protect it.

Digital zoom

Precision digital zoom Enlarges the image two times larger than the optical zoom scaling now selected. The maximum zoom scaling is about 14× regardless of the selected image size. Since the precision digital zoom cuts part of the image and enlarges the rest, the image quality deteriorates. Set [Digital Zoom] to [Precision] in the SET UP settings (page 140). The default setting is [Precision].


Enlarges the image using digital processing. Pressing (digital zoom) activates the digital zoom. There are two modes in the digital zoom function. One is “Precision digital zoom” and the other is “Smart zoom.” Because each mode uses different methods and has different magnifying capacity, choose the mode according to your shooting.

• The digital zoom cannot be used when shooting in RAW mode (page 79). • AF range finder frame is not shown when using the digital zoom. The AF range finder frame indicator flashes and a centrally-located subject has priority when the camera is focusing.

The icon changes as follows according to the zoom mode. Optical zoom: Precision digital zoom: Smart zoom:

31

Changing the lens orientation Smart zoom You can zoom in the image with much less image quality deterioration. You can use the smart zoom as though it were the optical zoom. The zoom scaling becomes the number that multiplies the following smart zoom scaling by the optical zoom scaling now selected. Set [Digital Zoom] to [Smart] in the SET UP settings (page 140). The maximum zoom scale is as follows and it depends on the image size. The zoom scale displayed on the screen is an approximate value.

5M 3M 1M VGA

x8.9

x1.3

You can adjust the angle by turning the lens part upward up to 70 degrees and downward up to 30 degrees.

x11

x1.6 x2.6 x5.1 x5

x18 x36 x10

x15

• When the image size is set to [8M] or [3:2], the smart zoom does not work. • The digital zoom cannot be used when shooting in Multi Burst mode (page 76). When using the smart zoom, selecting (Multi Burst) using the /BRK button cancels the smart zoom. • When using the smart zoom, the image on the screen may look rough. However, this phenomenon has no effect on the recorded image.

To cancel the digital zoom Press (digital zoom) again. The zoom scaling returns to the number that was in effect using the optical zoom.

32

Lens part

Shooting close-ups

– Macro 80 min

8M

80 min

101

98

When the zoom is set all the way to the W side: Approx. 2 cm (13/16 inches) from the end of the lens When the zoom is set all the way to the T side: Approx. 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) from the end of the lens • We recommend that you use Flexible Spot AF (page 65).

2 , and

The (macro) indicator appears on the screen. • You can carry out this operation even when the mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN (other than (Twilight mode) or (Landscape mode)) or .


MAF

1 , Set the mode dial to press (macro).

101

97

MAF

For close-ups of subjects like flowers or insects, shoot using the macro feature. You can shoot subjects approaching up to 2 cm (13/16 inches) when the zoom is set to its Wend. However, the available focus distance depends on the zoom position. We recommend that you set the zoom to its Wend during shooting.

8M

, Center the subject in the frame, and press and hold the shutter button halfway down, then press the shutter button fully down. To return to normal shooting Press (macro) again. The indicator disappears from the screen. • When shooting in macro mode, the focus range is very narrow and you may not be able to focus on the whole of the subject. • When shooting in macro mode, the focus adjustment becomes slower to accurately focus on a close subject.

33

Using the self-timer

80 min

8M

Using the flash

80 min

101

98

8M

FINE

101

Flash emitter

98

Hologram AF emitter MAF

MAF

250 F2.0

0 EV

/

1 , Set the mode dial to , and press / (self-timer). The (self-timer) indicator appears on the screen. • You can carry out this operation even when the mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN or .

2 , Center the subject in the frame, and press and hold the shutter button halfway down, then press the shutter button fully down. The self-timer lamp (page 9) will flash, and you will hear a beeping sound. The image will be shot after approximately 10 seconds. To cancel the self-timer during the operation Press / (self-timer) again. The indicator dissapears from the screen. • If you stand in front of the camera and press the shutter button, the focus and the exposure may not be correctly set.

34

The flash automatically pops up and strobes when the surroundings are dark. Close the flash by hand after using it. • When [ISO] is set to [Auto] in the menu settings, the recommended shooting distance using the flash is approx. 0.5 m to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to 14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T). • Attaching the supplied lens hood blocks the flash light. • While the flash is being charged, the (flash) lamp flashes. After charging is completed, the lamp goes out. • You can also select the following flash modes: (Forced flash), (Slow synchro), and (No flash). For details on these modes, see page 68.

Recording images with the hologram AF

• •

• •

When not using this function, set [Hologram AF] to [Off] in the SET UP settings (page 140). • If hologram AF light does not reach the subject sufficiently or the subject has weak contrast, focus will not be achieved. (An approximate distance of 0.5 m to 5.0 m (19 3/4 inches to 16 feet 4 7/8 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 3.5 m (23 5/8 inches to 11 feet 5 7/8 inches) (T) is recommended.) • Focus is achieved as long as hologram AF light reaches the subject, even if the light is slightly off the center of the subject. • When adjusting the focus manually (page 67), the hologram AF does not function. • If the hologram AF emitter is dirty, the hologram AF light may be dimmed and focus

About Hologram AF “Hologram AF (Auto-Focus)” is an AF fill light system that applies laser holograms to enable you to shoot still images in dark places. The Hologram AF system uses gentler radiation than conventional highbrightness LEDs or lamps, thus satisfying Laser Class 1* specifications and maintaining higher safety for human eyes. No safety problems will be caused by looking directly into the hologram AF emitter at a close range. However, it is not recommended to do so, because you may experience such effects like several minutes of residual image and dazzling, that you encounter after looking into a flashlight.


The hologram AF is fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark surroundings. ON appears on the screen and the hologram AF emits red light when the shutter button is pressed halfway until the focus is locked.

may not be achieved. In this case, wipe the hologram AF emitter with a dry cloth. Do not block the hologram AF emitter during recording. The AF range finder frame is not displayed. AF range finder frame indicator flashes and the centrally-located subject has priority to focus on. When you attach the supplied lens hood to the camera, the hologram AF light is blocked. The hologram AF does not function when [SCN] (Scene) is set to (Twilight mode) or (Landscape mode).

* Hologram AF satisfies Class 1 (time base 30 000 seconds), specified in JIS (Japan), IEC (EU), and FDA (US) industry standards. Complying with these standards identifies the laser product as safe, under the condition that a human can look at the laser light either directly or focused through a lens for 30 000 seconds.

35

Inserting the date and time on a still image

Camera 1 Monitor AF Mode: Precision Digital Zoom: Off Date/Time: Red Eye Reduction: Off Hologram AF: Auto Auto Review: Off

Camera 1 Day&Time AF Mode: Date Digital Zoom: Date/Time: Off Red Eye Reduction: Hologram AF: Auto Review:

Camera 1 Monitor AF Mode: Precision Digital Zoom: Date Date/Time: Red Eye Reduction: Off Hologram AF: Auto Auto Review: Off

SELECT

PAGE SELECT

1 , Set the mode dial to SET UP. The SET UP screen appears. • The date and time cannot be inserted in Multi Burst mode. • When images are shot with the date and time inserted, the date and time cannot be removed later. • When shooting images with the date and time inserted, the actual date and time are not displayed on the screen, and is displayed on the screen instead. The actual date and time are indicated in red on the lower-right corner when the image is played back.

2

3

, Select (Camera 1) by moving the multi-selector to v, then move to B. Select [Date/Time] by moving the multi-selector to v/V, then move to B. 1

, Select the date and time setting by moving the multi-selector to v/V, then press the center. Day&Time: Inserts the date and the time of shooting into the image Date: Inserts the year, the month and the date of shooting into the image Off: Does not insert date/time data into the image After the setting has been completed, set the mode dial to to shoot your image. • You can shoot even when the mode dial is set to P, S, A, M or SCN. • When you chose [Date], the date will be inserted in the order set in “Setting the date and time” (page 19). • This setting is maintained even when the power is turned off.

36

Shooting according to scene conditions

Twilight mode

Twilight mode Under dark lighting conditions, you can shoot a distant night view. However, because the shutter speed is slower under these conditions, we recommend you use a tripod. • You cannot use the following functions in Twilight mode: – Macro mode shooting – Shooting with the flash – Exposure Bracket – Burst mode shooting – Multi Burst mode shooting

Twilight portrait mode

Landscape mode

Twilight portrait mode

Portrait mode

Portrait mode

Use this mode when shooting people in the foreground at night. This mode allows you to shoot images of people in the foreground with distinct outlines without losing the feeling that you are shooting at night. Because the shutter speed is slow, it is recommended that you use a tripod.


When shooting night scenes, shooting people at night, shooting landscapes, or shooting portraits, use the modes listed below to increase the quality of your images.

– Scene Selection

Backgrounds blur away, and the subject is sharpened.

• The flash is set to (Slow synchro). • You cannot shoot in Exposure Bracket, Burst, or Multi Burst mode.

Landscape mode Focuses on images far away, so is convenient for shooting landscapes at a distance. • You cannot shoot in macro mode. • The flash is set to (Forced flash) or flash).

(No

37

Scene SCN ISO

MENU

1 , Set the mode dial to SCN, then press MENU. The menu appears.

Scene SCN ISO

Mode PFX

2 , Select [SCN] (Scene) by moving the multi-selector to b.

Mode BRK

3 , Select the desired mode by moving the multi-selector to v/ V. The mode is set. When the setting is complete, press MENU so that the menu disappears from the screen. To cancel the Scene Selection Set the mode dial to a different mode. • When the shutter speed becomes slower than particular time, the NR slow shutter function (page 55) activates automatically. In such cases, shooting may take some time. • This setting is maintained even when the power is turned off.

38

Viewing still images

Viewing images on the screen of your camera

Viewing on the single-image screen 80 min

8M

101

80 min

8M

101

8/9

BACK/NEXT

BACK/NEXT

2004 1 1 10:30PM VOLUME

SINGLE DISPLAY


101-0008

101-0008

8/9

Index screen

Single screen

2004 1 1 10:30PM VOLUME

1

You can view images shot with the camera almost immediately on the screen. You can select the following two methods for viewing images.

, Set the mode dial to turn on the camera.

Single screen You can view one image at a time, occupying the entire screen.

The newest image in the selected recording folder (page 83) is displayed.

Index screen Nine images are displayed simultaneously in separate s on the screen. • You can easily view the next/previous image by turning the command dial. • For details on the movies, see page 101. • For a detailed description of the screen indicators, see page 153.

, and

• The image may be too rough for image processing right after it is displayed. • To select the recording medium, use the CF switch (page 21).

/

39

Viewing on the index screen

80 min

8M

101

101-0003 BACK/NEXT

3/9

2004 1 1 10:30PM VOLUME

SINGLE DISPLAY

/

2 , Select the desired still image by moving the multi-selector to b/B.

, Press

b : Displays the previous image. B : Displays the next image.

To display the next (previous) Index screen Move the multi-selector to v/V/b/B to move the yellow frame up/down/left/right.

/

(index).

The display switches to the Index screen.

To return to the single-image screen Press / (index) again, or press the center of the multi-selector.

40

Viewing images on a TV screen

80 min

8M

101

1

, Connect the supplied A/V connecting cable to the A/V OUT (MONO) jack of the camera and the audio/video input jacks of the TV. If your TV has stereo type input jacks, connect the audio plug (black) of the A/V connecting cable to the Lch audio input jack.

101-0002 BACK/NEXT

2

TV/Video switch

, Turn on the TV, and set the TV/ Video switch to “Video.” • The name and location of this switch may differ depending on your TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.

2004 1 1 10:30PM VOLUME

3 , Set the mode dial to turn on the camera.

, and


A/V connecting cable (supplied) A/V OUT (MONO) jack

2/9

Move the multi-selector to b/B to select the desired image. • When using the camera abroad, it may be necessary to switch the video output signal to match that of your TV system (page 142). • To select the recording medium, use the / CF switch (page 21).

• Turn off both the camera and the TV before connecting the camera and the TV with the A/V connecting cable.

41

Watching images on a TV screen If you want to view images on a TV, you need a TV having a video input jack and the A/V connecting cable (supplied). The color system of the TV must match as that of your digital still camera. Check the following list: NTSC system Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc. PAL system Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, , Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, United Kingdom, etc. PAL-M system Brazil PAL-N system Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay

42

SECAM system Bulgaria, , Guiana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, etc.

Deleting still images

Deleting images 80 min

101-0002 BACK/NEXT

8M

101

80 min

2/9

2004 1 1 10:30PM VOLUME

, Set the mode dial to , and turn on the camera. Select the image you want to delete by moving the multiselector to b/B. • To select the recording medium, use the / CF switch (page 21). • Note that the images once deleted cannot be recovered.

101

8M

101

Delete

Delete

Exit

Exit

BACK/NEXT

BACK/NEXT

2 , Press

80 min

2/9

2/9

3 (delete).

The image has not yet been deleted at this point. • You cannot delete protected images (page 89).

, Select [Delete] by moving the multi-selector to v , then press the center.


1

8M

“Access” appears on the screen and the image will be deleted. To delete other images continuously Select the image you want to delete by moving the multi-selector to b/B. Next, select [Delete] by moving the multi-selector to v , then press the center. To cancel the deletion Select [Exit] by moving the multi-selector to V, then press the center.

43

Deleting on the Index screen

Delete Exit

Select

Delete Exit

All In This Folder

1 , While an Index screen (page 40) is displayed, press (delete). • Note that the images once deleted cannot be recovered.

Select

All In This Folder

2 , Select [Select] by moving the multi-selector to b/B, then press the center.

• Select

TO NEXT

3 , Select the image you want to delete by moving the multiselector to v/V/b/B, then press the center. The (delete) mark is indicated on the selected image. The image has not yet been deleted at this point. Put the mark on all of the images you want to delete. • To cancel your selection, select images you want to cancel and press the center of the multiselector again. The mark disappears.

44

Formatting a recording medium

Delete

Exit

OK

, Press (delete). Select [OK] by moving the multi-selector to B, then press the center. “Access” appears on the screen and all of the images with marks will be deleted. To cancel the deletion Select [Exit] by moving the multi-selector to b, then press the center.

/CF switch

1 , Insert the recording medium you want to format into the camera. Select the recording


4

To delete all the images in the folder In Step 2, Select [All In This Folder] by moving the multi-selector to B, then press the center. Next, select [OK], then press the center. All of the unprotected images in the folder are deleted. To cancel the deletion, select [Cancel], then press the center.

medium with the /CF switch. Set the mode dial to SET UP, and turn on the camera. • The term “formatting” means preparing a recording medium to record images; this process is also called “initialization.” • The “Memory Stick” is already formatted, and can be used immediately. • Be sure to format the Microdrive/CF card using this camera. Otherwise, satisfactory performance may not be obtained. • When you format a recording medium, be aware that all of the data in the recording medium will be permanently erased. Protected images are also erased.

45

Memory Stick Tool Format: Create REC. Folder: Change REC. Folder:

Memory Stick Tool Format: Create REC. Folder: Change REC. Folder:

OK Cancel

Format

OK Cancel

All data will be erased Ready? OK Cancel

2 , When you format a “Memory Stick,” select (Memory Stick Tool) by moving the multi-selector to v/V. When you format a Microdrive/ CF card, select (CF Card Tool) by moving the multiselector to v/V. Select [Format] by moving the multi-selector to B, then move to B. • When formatting a recording medium, we recommend that you use the AC Adaptor to prevent the camera turning off.

46

3

4

, Select [OK] by moving the multi-selector to v , then press the center.

, Select [OK] by moving the multi-selector to v , then press the center.

To cancel the formatting

The “Formatting” message appears on the screen. When this message disappears, the format is complete.

Select [Cancel] by moving the multiselector to V, then press the center.

Before advanced operations

How to setup and operate your camera This section describes how to operate the menu and the SET UP screen. The multiselector is used for these operation. Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) MENU Mode dial

Changing menu settings

To turn off the menu display

a Press MENU.

Press MENU.

The menu appears. 8M

8M

3:2 5M 3M 1M Image Size Mode

Normal REC Mode Mode

c Select the desired setting by moving the multi-selector to v/ V.


b Select the setting item you want to change by moving the multi-selector to b/B. RAW TIFF Voice E-Mail

• For details on the mode dial, see page 28.

• You cannot select the dim items. • For details on the menu items, see page 137.

The frame of the selected setting is scaled up, and the setting is entered.

When the v mark is indicated above the item or the V mark is indicated below the item All of the available items are not displayed on the screen. Moving the multi-selector to v/V displays the hidden items.

47

Changing items in the SET UP screen

How to use the command dial

a Set the mode dial to SET UP.

There are two methods for operating the command dial. One is using only the command dial and the other is using the command dial in combination with other buttons. This section describes the method used when operating the commnad dial in combination with other buttons.

The SET UP screen appears. Camera 1 Monitor AF Mode: Precision Digital Zoom: Off Date/Time: Red Eye Reduction: Off Auto Hologram AF: Auto Review: Off

Command dial WB

Mode dial

SELECT

b Select the setting item you want to change by moving the multi-selector to v/V/b/B. The frame of the item you select turns yellow. Setup 2 File Number: USB Connect: OK Video Out: Cancel Clock Set:

This method is used for the following functions. • Manual exposure (page 57) • Metering mode (page 58) • Exposure adjustment (page 59) • Exposure Bracket (page 63) • Flash mode (page 68) • White balance (page 73) • Burst (page 75) • Multi Burst (page 76) • Nightshot/Nightframing (page 77)

/BRK NIGHTSHOT/NIGHTFRAMING

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M, SCN or . b Press and hold the button you want to operate and turn the command dial.

c Press the center of the multiselector to enter the setting.

To turn off the SET UP screen display Set the mode dial to any position other than SET UP.

48

• For details on the SET UP items, see page 140.

The value or setting that is indicated on the screen is entered.

c Release the button. The indicators disappears from the screen.

• The following functions can be set by simply turning the command dial. – Program shift (page 54) – Shutter speed priority mode (page 55) – Aperture priority mode (page 56) • You can view the next/previous image during playback.

b Press MENU.

Deciding the still image quality Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN

Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) MENU Mode dial

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M or SCN.

c Select (P. Quality) with b/B, then select the desired image quality with v/V.

Fine Standard P. Quality ISO

FINE

Mode BRK


You can select the still image quality from [Fine] or [Standard]. This camera is equipped with other methods to select the image quality. You can select these settings using the [Mode] (REC Mode) item in the menu. These items are as follows: [RAW] which records raw data (page 79), [TIFF] which records uncompressed data (page 80), and [E-Mail] which records data suitable for sending email (page 81).

The menu appears.

49

Creating or selecting a folder Mode dial: SET UP Your camera can create multiple folders within a recording medium. You can select the folder used to store images. When not creating a new folder, “101MSDCF” folder is selected as the recording folder. You can create folders up to “999MSDCF.” Multi-selector (v/V/b/B)

Creating a new folder a Set the mode dial to SET UP, and select the recording medium with the /CF switch. b Select (Memory Stick Tool) or (CF Card Tool) with v/V, [Create REC. Folder] with B/v/ V, and [OK] with B/v , then press the center. The following screen appears.

Mode dial 80 min Create REC. Folder Creating REC. folder 102MSDCF Ready? OK Cancel

c Select [OK] with v , then press the center. /CF switch • Up to 4000 images can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder is automatically created.

A new folder is created with a number one higher than the largest number in the recording medium, and the folder becomes the recording folder.

To cancel folder creation In Step 2 or 3, select [Cancel]. • Once you create a new folder, you cannot delete the new folder with the camera.

50

• Images are recorded in the newly created folder until a different folder is created or selected.

Selecting the recording folder

• The image is stored in the newly selected folder. You cannot move images to other folders using the camera.

a Set the mode dial to SET UP, and select the recording medium with the /CF switch.

The recording folder selection screen appears. Select REC. Folder 102 2/2 Folder Name:102MSDCF No. Of Files: 0 Created: 2004 1 1 1::05:34AM OK Cancel BACK/NEXT


b Select (Memory Stick Tool) or (CF Card Tool) with v/V, [Change REC. Folder] with B/ V, and [OK] with B/v , then press the center.

c Select the desired folder with b/B, and [OK] with v , then press the center.

To cancel changing the recording folder In Step 2 or 3, select [Cancel]. • You cannot select the “100MSDCF” folder as a recording folder.

51

Advanced still image shooting

Manual features to photo-shooting situations After you are familiar with your camera, let’s shoot an image in various situations with some settings changed. This section describes some representative manual shooting examples.

Q: To shoot a portrait with its background blurred?

Q: To shoot a portrait against light?

, Selecting a flash mode (page 68) Shooting a human subject in a bright place can create dim facial shadows. This occurs when the background is brighter than the person. In such cases, set the flash to (Forced flash). You can shoot both the person and the background clearly. • You can use the flash within the reach of the flash light.

, Shooting with aperture priority mode (page 56) When you want to enhance the person with the background blurred, adjust the aperture manually. The more the aperture is opened (the aperture value becomes smaller), the narrower the focus is. The background is blurred accordingly.

52

Q: To shoot a night scene?

, Shooting with shutter speed priority mode (page 55) Using the flash in the auto adjustment mode restricts the shutter speed and the flash light does not reach distant subjects. The image, therefore, is not captured clearly. In such cases, slow the shutter speed manually, set the flash to (No flash), and reduce the light using the EV adjustment. You can then shoot a clear night scene.

Q: To shoot a moving subject?

, Selecting the ISO sensitivity (page 64) When you cannot use the flash or set the shutter speed slower, increase the ISO rating. The higher rated ISO setting helps maximize the effect of the surrounding light to shoot.

, Shooting with shutter speed priority mode (page 55) When shooting a moving person or subject, set the shutter speed higher to freeze the motion or set the shutter speed slower to get the flow of motion of the subject. Adjust the shutter speed to express a moment that is beyond the speed of the naked eye.

Q: To shoot the beautiful afterglow of the sunset

, Adjusting color tones (page 73) If the image you shot is not expressed in your favorite colors, change the white balance mode. Setting the white balance mode to (Daylight) enhances the redness of the sunset.


Q: To shoot without flash?

53

Shooting with Program auto Mode dial: P In program auto mode, the camera automatically adjusts the shutter speed and the aperture according to the brightness of the subject just as in the auto adjustment mode (mode dial: ). In addition, the program auto mode can change the shooting settings in the menu, a feature which the auto adjustment mode does not have (page 137). Command dial Shutter button Mode dial

Program Shift You can change the aperture value and shutter speed combination while keeping the brightness fixed.

a Set the mode dial to P. b Select the aperture value and shutter speed combination with the command dial. 80 min

8M

FINE

MAF

101

98

P

250 F2.0

is indicated while the aperture value and shutter speed combination is shifted.

c Shoot the image.

To cancel Program Shift Turn the command dial to return the indication from to . • You cannot shift the aperture value and shutter speed combination when the shutter button is pressed halfway down. • When the brightness changes, the aperture value and shutter speed also change while maintaining the shift amount.

54

• You may not be able to change the aperture value and shutter speed combination depending on your shooting situations. • When the flash mode setting is changed, Program Shift is canceled. • Setting the mode dial to other than P or turning off the power cancels Program Shift.

a Set the mode dial to S.

Shooting with shutter speed priority mode

b Select a shutter speed with the command dial.

Mode dial: S

80 min

8M

FINE

101

98

S

You can adjust the shutter speed manually. If you shoot a moving subject at a higher shutter speed, it appears as if frozen on the image. At a lower shutter speed, the subject appears as if it flowing. Aperture value is automatically adjusted to attain correct exposure according to the brightness of the subject.

200 S

250 320 MAF

F2.0

0 EV

Shutter button Mode dial

• Shutter speeds of one second or longer are indicated with ["] after the value, such as 1". • If the proper exposure is not obtained after making the settings, the setting value indicators on the screen flashes when the shutter button is pressed halfway down. You can shoot in this condition, but we recommend that you adjust the flashing values again. • The flash is set to (Forced flash) or (No flash). • When the shutter speed is high, the amount of flash light may be insufficient even if you strobes the flash. • You can adjust the exposure value (page 59).

r Then the screen turns black. Capturing

r

Processing

Finally, when “Processing” disappears, the image has been recorded.

• To eliminate the effects of vibration, use of a tripod is recommended. • When a slow shutter speed is set, the processing may take some time. This is because the camera works to remove noise during the time set by the shutter speed setting.


Command dial

The NR slow shutter mode removes noise from recorded images, providing clear images. When using shutter speeds of 1/25 second or slower, the camera automatically works the NR slow shutter mode and “NR” is indicated next to the shutter speed indicator. Press the shutter button fully down. F2.8 NR2''

The shutter speed can be selected from 1/2000 to 30 seconds. If you select 1/25 second or slower shutter speeds, the NR slow shutter function is automatically activated. In such cases, “NR” is indicated at the left of shutter speed indicator.

c Shoot the image. High shutter speed Slow shutter speed

NR slow shutter

55

Shooting techniques When shooting a moving person, car, or spindrift, etc., using the high shutter speed, you can express moment that is beyond what the human eye can see.

Command dial

Shooting with aperture priority mode


Mode dial: A

When shooting a subject such as the flow of a river at a slower shutter speed, you can create an image that captures the subject’s flowing movement. In such cases, use of a tripod is recommended to prevent camera shake.

You can adjust the amount of light that es through the lens. If you open the aperture (a smaller F-number), the amount of light allowed into the lens increases and the in-focus range becomes narrower. Only the main subject is then in focus. When the aperture is closed (a larger F-number), the amount of light decreases and the in-focus range becomes wider. The whole image is sharpened. The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain correct exposure according to the brightness of the subject.

a Set the mode dial to A. b Select an aperture value with the command dial. 80 min

8M

FINE

101

98

A

2.0 F

2.2 2.5 MAF

• When you hand-hold the camera, adjust the shutter speed in a range where (Vibration warning indicator) is not indicated.

Open the aperture

Close the aperture

250

0 EV

The range of values that can be selected varies, depending on the zoom position. The aperture value can be selected from F2 to F8 (W)/ from F2.8 to F8 (T).

c Shoot the image.

56

• The shutter speed is automatically adjusted from 1/2000 to 8 seconds. When you set an aperture value of F8, the values start from 1/3200 second. • If the proper exposure is not obtained after making the settings, the setting value indicators on the screen flashes when the shutter button is pressed halfway down. You can shoot in this condition, but we recommend that you adjust the flashing values again. • The flash is set to (Forced flash), (Slow synchro) or (No flash). • You can adjust the exposure value (page 59).

Shooting techniques The depth of field is the in-focus range. Opening the aperture makes the depth of field shallower (the in-focus range becomes narrower) and closing the aperture makes the depth of field wider (the in-focus range becomes wider). Open the aperture The subject is clear and its background is blurred.

Close the aperture Both the subject and its background are focused on.

Adjust the aperture to suit your purpose, either to sharpen the specific area of image, or to focus on the entire image.

Mode dial: M You can manually adjust the shutter speed and aperture values. The difference between the set value and the appropriate exposure determined by the camera is displayed on the screen as the EV value (page 59). 0EV indicates the most suitable value set by the camera. The camera maintains the setting even when the power is turned off. Once you set a value you like, you can reproduce the same exposure by simply setting the mode dial to M.


M m

Shooting with manual exposure mode

57

Command dial

c Press and hold (exposure) and select an aperture value with the command dial.

Shutter button

80 min

8M

FINE

101

98

M

Mode dial 2.2 2.5 MAF

250

0 EV

d Shoot the image.

a Set the mode dial to M. b Select a shutter speed with the command dial. 80 min

8M

FINE

M

58

F2.0

)

The image is slipt up into multiple zones, each of which are evaluated individually. The camera calculates the best-fit exposure based on the subject’s position and background brightness. The default setting is multi-pattern metering.

Center-weighted metering (

0 EV

Metering is performed with priority given to the center of the image. The camera determines the exposure based on the brightness of a subject near the center.

250 320 MAF

• If the proper exposure is not obtained after making the settings, the setting value indicators on the screen flashes when the shutter button is pressed halfway down. You can shoot in this condition, but we recommend that you adjust the flashing values again. • The flash is set to (Forced flash) or (No flash).

Multi-pattern metering (

98

101

200 S

Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/ You can select a metering mode to determine the exposure, depending on what part of the subject is used to measure.

2.0 F

Selecting the metering mode

)

Spot metering (

)

Spot metering allows you to meter for the subject directly in a small area of the whole image. This lets you adjust the exposure to the subject even when the subject is backlit or there is strong contrast between the subject and the background.

c When selecting Spot metering in Step 2, position the spot metering cross hair on one point of the subject you want to shoot. 80 min

8M

FINE

Command dial

Mode dial: P/S/A/SCN/ Spot metering cross hair

Mode dial MAF

– EV adjustment

101

98

P

Adjusting the exposure

250 F2.0

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M, SCN or . b Press and hold (metering mode) and select the desired metering mode with the command dial.

Adjust toward –

Adjust toward +


• When using center-weighted metering or spot metering, to focus on the same spot as used for metering, we recommend using the center weighted AF range finder frame (page 65). • You cannot select the metering mode when using the NightShot/NightFraming function.

You can manually shift the exposure value determined by the camera. Use this mode when you do not get the proper exposure, for instance, the subject and its background have high contrast (light and dark). The value can be set a range from +2.0EV to –2.0EV, in 1/3EV increments.

59

Mode dial

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, SCN or . b Press and hold (exposure) and select the desired exposure value with the command dial. The value of the exposure adjustment is displayed. Adjust the exposure value while checking the brightness of the background. 80 min

8M

FINE

In Step 2, select [0EV]. • When the subject is extremely bright or extremely dark, or when you are using the flash, the adjustment may not work.

Displaying a histogram A histogram is a graph showing the brightness of an image. The horizontal axis shows the brightness, and the vertical axis shows the number of pixels. The graph display indicates a dark image when skewed to the left side, and a bright image when skewed to the right side. The histogram is a useful reference for checking the exposure during recording and playback when the screen is hard to be seen. 80

8M

FINE

101

4

Brightness Dark Bright

0 EV

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A or SCN. b Press (screen status) to display the histogram. c Adjust the exposure based on the histogram.

98

P

• The histogram also appears when the mode dial is set to or M, but the EV adjustment is deactivated.

+1.0EV

+1.3EV +1.7EV MAF

60

101

To reactivate auto exposure

Number of pixels

Command dial

250 F2.0

Shooting techniques While shooting images, the camera automatically determines the exposure. When shooting a whitish overall image such as a backlit subject or a snowy scene, the camera judges that the subject is bright and may set a darker exposure for the image. In such cases, adjustment of the exposure in the + plus direction is effective.

When shooting a darker overall image, the camera judges that the subject is dark and may set a brighter exposure for the image. In such cases, adjustment of the exposure in the – minus direction is effective.

m Adjust in the – direction

m Adjust in the + direction

You can check the exposure referring to the histogram chart. Be careful not to overexpose or underexpose your subject (giving a whitish or darkish image).


• The histogram also appears when you press (screen status) while playing back a single image (page 39) or during Quick Review (page 29). • The histogram does not appear in the following cases: – When the menu is displayed – During Quick Review of an image recorded in Exposure Bracket mode – When using playback zoom – When shooting or playing back movies • appears and the histogram does not appear in the following cases: – When recording in the digital zoom range – When the image size is [3:2] – When playing back Multi Burst mode images – When a still image is rotated • The histogram before recording represents the histogram of the image displayed on the screen at that time. A difference occurs in the histogram before and after you press the shutter button. When this happens, check the histogram while playing back a single-image or during Quick Review. In particular a large difference may appear in the following cases: – When the flash strobes – When using the NightFraming function – When [PFX] (P.Effect) is set to [Solarize] – When the shutter speed is slow or high • The histogram may not appear for images recorded using other cameras.

You can try to adjust the exposure to suit your taste.

61

Shooting with the exposure fixed – AE LOCK Mode dial: P/S/A/SCN/ You can lock the exposure before recomposing the image. This is useful when the contrast of the subject and its background is extremely high or you shoot a backlit subject.

b Target the subject for which you want to meter the exposure, then press AE LOCK. The exposure is fixed and the indicator appears. 80 min

MAF

Shutter button Mode dial AE LOCK

8M

FINE

101

98

P

250 F2.0

c Recompose the image and press and hold the shutter button halfway down.

Shooting techniques The camera automatically adjusts the exposure according to the subject. If you change the composition of your shot, the exposure may be changed, such as by changes in the brightness of the background. In such cases, use the AE lock function. You can shoot freely, regardless of the brightness of the subject. To determine the exposure, measure the exposure of the desired portion of the subject using either center-weighted metering or the spot metering function. Press AE LOCK to lock the exposure, and then recompose the picture and shoot. Portion of the image used to determine the exposure

The focus is automatically adjusted.

d Press the shutter button fully down.

To release AE LOCK

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, SCN or .

62

Carry out one of the followings: • Press AE LOCK again after Step 2. • Release your finger from the shutter button after Step 3. • Press down the shutter button in Step 4.

m

Shooting three images with the exposure shifted

Command dial

First shot (Adjusted in the + direction)

Mode dial Shutter button

– Exposure Bracket Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN Second shot (Proper exposure set by the camera)

MENU

/BRK

Third shot (Adjusted in the – direction)

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M or SCN. b Press and hold /BRK (bracket) and select [BRK] with the command dial. 80 min

8M

FINE

101

98

P


In addition to an image with the exposure automatically set by the camera, two other images are recorded with exposure values shifted to the + and – sides. If you cannot shoot with the proper brightness due to the brightness of the subject, use the Exposure Bracket mode. You can select the image that has a suitable exposure after shooting.

BRK MAF

250 F2.0

c Press MENU. The menu appears.

63

d Select [BRK] (Bracket Step) with b/B, then select the desired bracket step value with v/V. ±1.0EV: Shifts the exposure value by plus or minus 1.0EV. ±0.7EV: Shifts the exposure value by plus or minus 0.7EV. ±0.3EV: Shifts the exposure value by plus or minus 0.3EV.

e Shoot the image.

To return to normal mode In Step 2, select [Normal]. • When [Mode] (REC Mode) is not set to [Normal], you cannot use the Exposure Bracket mode. • You may not be able to use the Exposure Bracket mode depending on the Scene Selection mode (page 37). • You cannot use the flash in this mode. • During shooting in this mode, the images are not displayed on the screen. Compose the image before pressing the shutter button. • The focus and white balance are adjusted for the first image, and these settings are also used for the other images. • When the exposure is manually adjusted (page 59), the exposure is shifted based on the adjusted brightness. • The recording interval is approximately 0.42 second.

• If the subject is too bright or too dark, you may be unable to shoot properly with the selected bracket step value. • You cannot select shutter speeds of 1/25 second or slower.

Selecting the ISO sensitivity – ISO Mode dial: P/S/A/M You can change the camera’s sensitivity to light. When you select a high-number setting, you can shoot in a dark place. Normally, the ISO sensitivity is set to [Auto]. When set to [Auto], the ISO sensitivity is automatically increased in a dark place. Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) MENU Mode dial

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A or M. b Press MENU. The menu appears.

64

c Select [ISO] with b, then select desired setting with v/V. Choose from [800], [400], [200], [100], [64], or [Auto].

To return to normal mode In Step 3, select [Auto]. • To reduce camera shake, select a large number. You can shoot a subject with higher shutter speed. • When selecting a large number, the image becomes noisy. To give priority to image quality, select a small number.

Choosing an auto focus method You can set the AF range finder frame and the AF mode.

Choosing a focus range finder frame – AF range finder Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/

Multipoint AF ( AF range finder frame The AF range finder frame selects the focus position according to the subject position and size.

AF Mode

Mode dial

Center AF (

)

The AF range finder is only the center of the frame. You can shoot in desired image composition using the AF lock method.

FOCUS


The AF mode is set automatically when the camera starts and stops focusing on a subject.

)

The camera calculates the distance in five places to the top, the bottom, the left, the right, and in the center of the image, letting you shoot using the auto focus function without worrying about the image composition. This is useful when it is difficult to focus on the subject because it is not in the center of the frame. You can check the position where the focus was adjusted using the green frame. The default setting is Multipoint AF.

Multi-selector (v/V/b/B)

65

Flexible Spot AF (

)

This is useful when focusing on an extremely small subject or a narrow area. Flexible Spot AF lets you shoot in the desired image composition. This is useful when you shoot using a tripod and the subject is out of the center area. When shooting a moving subject, take care to hold the camera steady so that the subject does not deviate from the range finder frame.

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M, SCN or . b Set the FOCUS switch to AUTO. c Press the center of the multiselector repeatedly to select the desired mode. 80 min

8M

FINE

101

98

P

AF range finder frame MAF

66

250 F2.0

AF range finder frame indicator

d When selecting Flexible Spot AF in Step 3, move the AF range finder frame to the portion you want to focus on with v/V/b/B. 80 min

8M

FINE

98

P

MAF

101

250 F2.0

When you press and hold the shutter button halfway down, and the focus is adjusted, the color of the AF range finder frame changes from white to green. • When you are shooting movies and you choose Multipoint AF, the distance to the center of the screen is estimated as an average, so the AF works even with a certain amount of vibration. The AF range finder frame indicator is . Center AF and Flexible Spot AF automatically focus only on selected frame, so this is convenient when you want to focus only on what you aim at. • When you use the digital zoom or hologram AF, priority AF movement is given to subjects in or near the center of the frame. In this case, the AF range finder frame indicator flashes and the AF range finder frame is not displayed.

Choosing a focus operation – AF Mode Mode dial: SET UP

Single AF ( S A F ) This mode is useful for shooting stationary subjects. The focus is not adjusted before you press and hold the shutter button halfway down. After you press and hold the shutter button halfway down and AF lock is complete, the focus is locked.

Monitoring AF ( M A F ) This shortens the time needed for focusing. The camera automatically adjusts the focus before you press and hold the shutter button halfway down, letting you compose images with the focus already adjusted. After you press and hold the shutter button halfway down and AF lock is complete, the focus is locked. The default setting is Monitoring AF. • Battery consumption may be higher than in Single AF mode.

Continuous AF ( C AF ) The camera adjusts the focus before you press and hold the shutter button halfway down, and then continues to adjust the focus even after AF lock is completed. This allows shooting of moving subjects with continued focus. However, focus adjustment may not be able to keep up when shooting fast moving subjects. The AF range finder frame is Center AF.

Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/ Normally the focus is automatically adjusted. However, the auto focus may not work well, such as in the following cases. In these cases, adjust the focus manually. Subjects that are hard to be focused on • Subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls, and sky • Subjects in very dark places • Metals that have great reflection, or subjects with the light source behind them and that have great reflection. • Subjects through a chain-link fence or glasses. Mode dial Manual focus ring

a Set the mode dial to SET UP. b Select (Camera 1) with v , then select [AF Mode] with B/ v. 1

c Select the desired mode with B/v/V, then press the center.

Near

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M, SCN or . b Set the FOCUS switch to MANUAL. The 9 (manual focus) indicator appears on the screen.

c Turn the manual focus ring to achieve a sharp focus. The focus distance information indicator is displayed. You can adjust the focus in the following macro ranges. T-side: about 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) to ∞ (infinite) W-side: 2 cm (13/16 inches) to ∞ (infinite). If [Expanded Focus] in the SET UP settings is set to [On], the image is zoomed to 2× to achieve the focus easily when recording still images. The default setting is [On]. When the image returns to normal size and the 9 (manual focus) indicator changes from yellow to white, a sharp focus is achieved. When the 9 indicator flashes, the focus distance has reached its limit.


• The focus is not adjusted after the lock is completed in the following cases, and the “C AF” indicator flashes. The camera operates in Monitoring AF mode. – When shooting in the dark place – When shooting with a slow shutter speed – When using the NightShot/NightFraming functions • There is no lock sound when the focus is achieved. • When you press the shutter button all the way down using the self-timer, the focus is locked. • Battery consumption may be higher than in any other AF mode.

Focusing manually

To reactivate auto focusing

Far

Set the FOCUS switch to AUTO. FOCUS

67

• The focus distance information indicator is approximate, and should be used as a reference. • The focus distance information indicator does not appear when using the NightShot function. • When focusing manually, the following functions cannot be used: – Macro mode shooting – NightFraming function • When recording movies, the expanded focus function cannot be used.

Command dial

Selecting a flash mode Mode dial:

Mode dial

P/S/A/M/SCN

Normally, the flash automatically pops up and strobes when the surroundings are dark. You can intentionally change the flash mode.

Auto (No indicator) The camera decides to use the flash based on lighting conditions. The default setting is Auto.

a Set the mode dial to A, M or SCN.

Forced flash ( )

b Press and hold (flash) and select the desired mode with the command dial.

The flash fires regardless of the amout of ambient light.

80 min

8M

, P, S,

101

98

Slow synchro (

)

The flash fires regardless of the amout of ambient light. In this mode, the shutter speed becomes slower under dark conditions, so you can clearly shoot a background that is out of the flash-lit area.

No flash ( ) The flash does not fire regardless of the amount of ambient light.

68

MAF

• Note that the surface of the flash emitter may be hot right after you use the flash several times in succession. • The recommended distance using the flash is about 0.5 m to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to 14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T) (when [ISO] is set to [Auto]).

• Attaching the supplied lens hood blocks a flash light. • Because the shutter speed is slower under dark conditions when (Slow synchro) or (No flash) is selected, it is recommended that you use a tripod. • While the flash is being charged, the lamp flashes. After charging is completed, the lamp goes out. • You can change the brightness of the flash using [Flash Level] in the menu settings (page 70). (Except when the mode dial is set to .) • You can mount an external flash on this camera (page 71).

To pop up the flash manually (Pop-up Flash mode) Normally, the flash strobes automatically according to lighting conditions. However, you can pop up the flash only when you want to use it. Set [Pop-up Flash] to [Manual] in the SET UP settings (page 140).

To reduce “red-eye” when shooting live subjects The flash pre-strobes before shooting to reduce the red-eye phenomenon. Set [Red Eye Reduction] to [On] in the SET UP settings (page 140). appears on the screen.

To strobe the flash 1 Slide the OPEN (FLASH) switch in the arrow direction. The flash pops up.

m

3 Shoot the image. OPEN (FLASH)

To return to auto mode Set [Pop-up Flash] to [Auto] in the SET UP settings.

• The amount of red-eye reduction possible varies according to the individual. In addition, the distance to the subject, and whether or not the subject has seen prestrobe light begin to strobe may also reduce the effectiveness of the red-eye reduction process.


2 Set the flash mode to (Forced flash) or (Slow synchro).

69

Shooting techniques Making the best of the flash gives you various options. When you set the flash mode to (Forced flash), you can shoot a back-lit subject brightly. An effect in which the flash light reflects in the subject’s eye is also available.

The (Slow synchro) is effective when you shoot a person during a sunset and the like. You can shoot the person clearly using the flash light and the background using a long exposure. If the camera cannot shoot clearly using the slow shutter, it automatically increases the ISO number. We recommend you use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

Adjusting the flash level – Flash Level Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN You can adjust the amout of flash light. Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) MENU Mode dial

When the flash mode is set to Auto, the flash may strobe regardless of your intentions. In such situations, setting the flash mode to (No flash) slows the shutter speed automatically. This is effective when you shoot the trail of a car, the spectrum of a light, or the sunset. We recommend you use a tripod to prevent camera shake.

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M or SCN. b Press MENU. The menu appears.

70

c Select [ ] (Flash Level) with b/B, then select the desired setting with v/V. High: Makes the flash level higher than normal. Normal: Normal setting. Low: Makes the flash level lower than normal.

Using an external flash Mode dial:

/P/S/A/M/SCN

You can mount an optional external flash. Using an external flash increases the amount of light and that will allow you to shoot more vivid flash pictures than when using the internal flash. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with your flash. Shutter button Mode dial

ACC (accessory) jack


Advanced accessory shoe

• You cannot have an external flash and the builtin flash strobe at the same time. • If you use two or more external flashes at the same time, note that the camera may not be able to function properly, or that may cause a malfunction. • When the proper white balance is not set using an external flash, set the flash mode to (Forced flash) or (Slow synchro), then set the white balance using the (one-push SET) (page 73).


• When an external flash is mounted, the weight prevents the lens portion from becoming steady. We recommend ing the lens portion with your left hand or using a tripod for recording.

71

Using the Sony Flash You can mount the Sony HVL-F32X or HVL-F1000 flash on the advanced accessory shoe of your camera. The HVLF32X is also equipped with automatic flash level adjustment and AF fill light shooting functions.

a Mount the external flash on the advanced accessory shoe. b Plug the flash into the ACC (accessory) jack. When using the HVL-F32X, skip Step 2.

You can mount a commercially available external flash that s the advanced accessory shoe.

a Mount the external flash to the advanced accessory shoe. b Set the mode dial to SET UP. c Select (Camera 2) with v/V, [Hot Shoe] with B/v/V, [On] with B/v, then press the center. 2

c Turn on the external flash.

d Turn on the external flash.

d Set the mode dial to A, M or SCN.

e Set the mode dial to M or A.

, P, S,

e Shoot the image. • Check that [Hot Shoe] is set to [Off] in the SET UP settings (page 140). • When [ISO] is set to [800], you cannot use the AUTO “B” mode of the HVL-F32X.

72

Using a commercially available external flash

The flash also strobes when the mode dial is set to , P, S or SCN, but we recommend recording with the mode dial set to M or A.

f Shoot the image. • If you record with [Hot Shoe] set to [Off] in the SET UP settings, the built-in flash may pop up. If this happens, return the built-in flash to its original position and set [Hot Shoe] to [On] (page 140). • When you set [Hot Shoe] to [On] in the SET UP settings, is indicated. In this case, the built-in flash is disabled.

• Set the most appropriate aperture value according to the guide number of the flash used and the distance to the subject. • The flash guide number varies according to the ISO sensitivity (page 64) of the camera, so be sure to check the ISO number. • Note that the camera may not function properly or may malfunction when using a flash manufactured by another company for a specific camera (generally a flash with multiple points on the advanced accessory shoe), a high-voltage type flash, or a flash accessory. • Depending on the type of commercially available external flash, you may be unable to use some functions, and other operations may be difficult.

Adjusting color tones – White Balance

(Fluorescent) Used when shooting under fluorescent lights. (Color temperature: about 4000 K)

Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) Mode dial Command dial

Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/

Auto (No indicator) The white balance is set automatically in response to the condition of the subject. The default setting is Auto. (Color temperature: about 3000-7000 K)

(Incandescent) • Used when shooting, for example, at a party, where the lighting conditions change often. • Used in a studio, or under video lights. (Color temperature: about 3200 K) WB (Flash) Adjusts the white balance only to the flash conditions. This mode cannot be used with movies. (Color temperature: about 6000 K)

(One push) For adjusting the white balance depending on the light source. (Color temperature: about 2000-10000 K)

WB

a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M, SCN or . b Press and hold WB and select the desired setting with the command dial. 80 min

(Daylight) Used when shooting outdoors, and for shooting at night, under neon lights, for fireworks, sunrise, and twilight gloom. (Color temperature: about 5500 K) (Cloudy) Used when shooting under a cloudy sky. (Color temperature: about 6500 K)

(One push SET) Memorizes the basic white color which will be used in (One push) mode.

8M

FINE

MAF

101

98

P


Normally, this camera adjusts color tones automatically, but you can also select the following modes according to your shooting situations. The color of the subject that you see will be captured according to the lighting conditions. When you want to fix the conditions under which the image is captured, or when the color of the entire image seems to be a bit unnatural, it is recommended that you adjust the white balance.

250 F2.0

To return to automatic settings In Step 2, select [Auto].

73

• Under fluorescent lights that flicker, even if you choose , the white balance may not be properly adjusted. • When the flash strobes, the manual setting is canceled, and the image is recorded in [Auto] mode (except in WB (Flash) mode or (One push) mode).

To capture the basic white color in (one-push SET) mode This mode memorizes the basic white color in the shooting situation for the (One push) mode. Use this mode when the other modes cannot set the color properly. 1 In Step 2, select [ ] (One push SET). The indicator appears. 2 Frame a white object such as a piece of paper filling the screen under the same lighting conditions as you will shoot the subject. 3 Press the center of the multi-selector. The screen momentarily turns black and the indicator flashes quickly. When the white balance has been adjusted and stored in the memory, the indicator lights up.

74

• When the indicator flashes slowly, the white balance is not set or was not able to be set. Record in automatic white balance mode. • Do not shake or strike the camera while the indicator flashes quickly. • When flash mode is set to (Forced flash) or (Slow synchro), the white balance is adjusted to the condition with the flash emitting.

Selecting color reproduction – Color Mode dial: P/S/A/M You can select the color reproduction mode. Standard (No indicator) Shoots to make the resulting shot easier on the eyes. The image becomes vivid compared to its real color and the contrast becomes higher. The default setting is [Standard]. Real (REAL) Shoots for faithfulness to the actual texture and color, which the contrast, brightness, and saturation become lower. This mode is suitable for modifying the image on a computer.


Shooting images in succession Mode dial:

Mode dial Shutter button

/P/S/A/M/SCN

You can shoot up to seven images in succession while pressing the shutter button only once.

Speed Burst (

)

The frame interval becomes shorter (about 0.38 second), but the images are not displayed on the screen.

b Press MENU. The menu appears.

c Select COLOR (Color) with b/ B, then select the desired mode with v/V.

Framing Burst (

)

The images are displayed on the screen during Burst shooting, but the frame interval becomes longer (about 0.42 second). • When the capacity of the recording medium is used up, recording stops even if you press and hold the shutter button.


, P, S,

b Press and hold /BRK (Burst) and select (Speed Burst) or (Framing Burst) with the command dial. 80 min

8M

101

98


a Set the mode dial to P, S, A or M.

Command dial

/BRK

BRK MAF

75

b Press and hold /BRK (Burst) and select (Multi Burst) with the command dial.

c Shoot the image. You can shoot up to seven images when you press and hold the shutter button. You can do the next shooting after “Recording” disappears from the screen. To return to normal mode In Step 2, select [Normal].

Shooting in Multi Burst mode

80 min

– Multi Burst Mode dial:

Command dial Mode dial

101

98

BRK Normal MAF

250 F2.0


d Select (Interval) with b/B, then select the desired between-frame interval with v/ V.

Shutter button

You can choose from [1/7.5], [1/15], [1/30].

/BRK

1/7.5 1/15

MENU

1/30



76

FINE

/P/S/A/M/SCN

Pressing the shutter button once records 16 frames in a row. This is convenient for checking your form in sports, for example.

• The flash cannot be used. • When [Mode] (REC Mode) is not set to [Normal], you cannot use the Burst mode. • You may not be able to use the Burst mode depending on the Scene Selection mode (page 37). • When using the self-timer, pressing the shutter button records up to seven images in succession. • You cannot select shutter speeds of 1/25 second or slower.

8M

P

, P, S,

Interval ISO

1/30" Mode BRK

e Shoot the image. 16 frames in a row will be recorded in a single image (image size: 1M).

Shooting in the dark Mode dial:

/P/

Shutter button Command dial Mode dial

NightShot The NightShot function lets you shoot subjects in dark places without the flash such as camp scenes at night or nocturnal plants and animals. Note that images recorded using the NightShot function become greenish.

a Set the mode dial to .

, P or

b Press and hold NIGHTSHOT/ NIGHTFRAMING and select (Night shot) with the command dial. Infrared ray emitter

NIGHTSHOT/ NIGHTFRAMING

• The infrared ray light covers within approx. 0.5 m to 2.1 m (19 3/4 inches to 6 feet 10 3/4 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 2.1 m (23 5/8 inches to 6 feet 10 3/4 inches) (T). • Since the infrared emitter is located below the flash emitter, you have to pop up the flash to shoot in these modes.

The flash emitter pops up and the and “Night shot” indicators light for about five seconds. 80 min

8M

101

4

"Night shot"

MAF


• When [Mode] (REC Mode) is not set to [Normal], you cannot use the Multi Burst mode. • The following functions cannot be used in Multi Burst mode: – Smart zoom – Shooting with the flash – Inserting the date and time – NightShot – NightFraming • When the mode dial is set to , frame interval is automatically set to [1/30]. • You cannot set the shutter speed to lower than the frame interval time. • For the number of images that can be recorded, see pages 135, 136. • When you play back images recorded in Multi Burst mode on the camera, see page 87.

c Shoot the image. To cancel the NightShot function In Step 2, select [Off]. • While using the NightShot function: – The white balance is set to Auto. – The metering mode is set to center weighted.

77

•

• •

• •

– If you perform any invalid operation, the indicator flashes, and the “Night shot” indicator lights for about five seconds. While using the NightShot function, you cannot use the following functions: – AE LOCK – Shooting with hologram AF – Shooting with the flash – Selecting the color reproduction mode While the camera is in Multi Burst mode, the NightShot function cannot be used. When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual] in the SET UP settings, pop up the flash emitter using the OPEN (FLASH) switch. When attaching the supplied lens hood, infrared ray may be blocked. Do not use the NightShot function in bright places (e.g. outdoors in the daytime). This may cause your camera to malfunction.

NightFraming The NightFraming function enables you to check a subject even at night and then record with natural colors using the flash.

a Set the mode dial to

or P.

b Press and hold NIGHTSHOT/ NIGHTFRAMING and select (Night framing) with the command dial. The flash emitter pops up and the and “Night framing” indicators light for about five seconds. 80 min

8M

101

4

"Night framing"

MAF

c Press and hold the shutter button halfway down. The focus is automatically adjusted.

d Press the shutter button fully down. The shutter sounds, the flash strobes and the image is recorded. To cancel the NightFraming function In Step 2, select [Off].

78

• While using the NightFraming function: – The white balance is set to Auto. – The metering mode is set to multi-pattern metering. – The AF range finder frame is not displayed. The centrally-located subject has priority to focus on. – The AE lock cannot be used. – If you perform any invalid operation while using the NightFraming function, the indicator flashes and the “Night framing” indicator lights for about five seconds. • When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual] in the SET UP settings, pop up the flash emitter using the OPEN (FLASH) switch. • When attaching the supplied lens hood, flash light and infrared ray may be blocked. • When you press the shutter button halfway down, you will hear a sound, but this is not the sound of the shutter releasing. The image is not recorded yet. • When [Hologram AF] is set to [Off], you may not get a clear focus. Setting [Hologram AF] to [Auto] is recommended (page 35). • When using the following functions, you cannot use the NightFraming function. – Manual focus – Exposure Bracket – Burst – Multi Burst

Shooting with special effects

Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) Shutter button MENU Mode dial

– Picture Effect

Shooting still images in RAW mode – RAW

Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/

Mode dial:

You can add special effects to bring out the contrast in your images.

Used when you want to record the raw data directly onto the recording medium as it is. The data can be reproduced with much less deterioration in image processing and be displayed using the exclusive software provided. A compressed JPEG format image like that is recorded in normal shooting is recorded at the same time.

Solarize Like an illustration with clearly delineated bright and dark portions

Colored to look like an old photograph



c Select [PFX] (P.Effect) with b/ B, then select the desired mode with v/V.

Neg.Art Made to look like a negative image

d Shoot the image.

To cancel Picture Effect In Step 3, select [Off]. • You cannot select the color reproduction mode when using the picture effect.

MENU


a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M, SCN or .

Sepia

/P/S/A/M/SCN



, P, S,

79


c Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with b/B, then select [RAW] with v. d Shoot the image. You can do the next shooting after “Recording” disappears from the screen. To return to normal mode In Step 3, select [Normal]. • To reproduce the RAW data file using a computer, the exclusive software is required. Install the exclusive software on the supplied CD-ROM to your computer. Since the RAW data file is a special kind of file, general software cannot open the RAW data file. • The JPEG image is also recorded in the image size selected by the Image Size setup (page 24). (However, [3:2] cannot be selected.) RAW data images are recorded in [8M] size. • Writing data takes more time than in normal recording mode. • Digital zoom cannot be used. • For the number of images that can be recorded, see pages 134, 136.

Shooting still images in TIFF mode

c Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with b/B, then select [TIFF] with v/ V.

– TIFF

d Shoot the image.

Mode dial:

/P/S/A/M/SCN

Used when you record an image in uncompressed file format. The image quality does not deteriorate. Images recorded in this mode are suitable for fine printing. A compressed JPEG format image like that recorded in normal shooting is recorded at the same time. Shutter button Mode dial

MENU


a Set the mode dial to A, M or SCN. b Press MENU.

80

The menu appears.

, P, S,

You can do the next shooting after “Recording” disappears from the screen. To return to normal mode In Step 3, select [Normal]. • JPEG images are also recorded in the image size selected by the Image Size setup (page 24). Uncompressed (TIFF) images are recorded in [8M] size except when [3:2] is selected. • Writing data takes more time than in normal recording mode. • For the number of images that can be recorded, see pages 134, 136.

Shooting still images for e-mail

c Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with b/B, then select [E-Mail] with v/V.

Shooting still images with audio files

– E-Mail

d Shoot the image.

– Voice

Mode dial:

/P/S/A/M/SCN

You can shoot images and save them in a file that is small enough (320×240) to attach to an e-mail message. The normal mode image that was selected using the Image Size item (page 24) is also recorded. Shutter button

Mode dial:

/P/S/A/M/SCN

You can record still images with audio files. Shutter button

To return to normal mode In Step 3, select [Normal].

Mode dial

• For instructions on how to attach your images to an e-mail message, refer to the Help files of the e-mail software you are using. • For the number of images that can be recorded, see pages 135, 136.

MENU

MENU


a Set the mode dial to A, M or SCN. b Press MENU. The menu appears.

, P, S,



, P, S,


Mode dial

You can do the next shooting after “Recording” disappears from the screen.


c Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with b/B, then select [Voice] with v/ V.

81

d Shoot the image. If you press and release the shutter button, sound is recorded for five seconds. If you hold down the shutter button, sound is recorded until you release the shutter button for up to 40 seconds. To return to normal mode In Step 3, select [Normal]. • To view images recorded in Voice mode, carry out the same procedure described in “Viewing movies on the screen” (page 101). • Be careful not to touch the microphone (page 12) during shooting. • For the number of images that can be recorded, see pages 134, 136.

82

Advanced still image viewing

Selecting the folder and playing back images – Folder

d Select the desired folder with b/B.

80 min

VGA

101

9/9

Select Folder 102 2/2 Folder Name:102MSDCF No. Of Files: 9 Created: 2004 1 1 1::05:34AM OK Cancel

Mode dial:

On the single screen

101-0009

2004 1 1 10:30PM

BACK/NEXT

VOLUME

BACK/NEXT

Select the folder that images you want to play back are stored. Multi-selector (v/V/b/B)

On the Index screen

e Select [OK] with v , then press the center of the multiselector.

MENU Mode dial

To cancel the selection In Step 5, select [Cancel].


.

b Press MENU.

When the first or last image in the folder is displayed, the following icons are indicated on the screen. : Moves to the previous folder. : Moves to the next folder. : Moves to both the previous and next folders.

• When no images are stored in the folder, “No file in this folder” appears. • You can play back images from a last-shot one without selecting the folder.


When multiple folders are created in the recording medium

SINGLE DISPLAY

The menu appears.

c Select (Folder) with b, then press the center of the multiselector.

83

Enlarging a portion of a still image Mode dial: You can enlarge an image up to five times the size of the original image. You can also record the enlarged image as a new file.

e Adjust the zoom with the command dial.

Enlarging an image – Playback zoom a Set the mode dial to

.

b Display the image you want to enlarge with b/B. c Press

(playback zoom).

The image is enlarged twice. Multi-selector (v/V/b/B)

d Select a portion of the image to enlarge with v/V/b/B.

MENU

To cancel enlarged viewing

Mode dial

Press

Move to v

Move to b

Command dial

Move to B

Move to V v: To view a portion of the top of the image V: To view a portion of the bottom of the image b: To view a portion of the left side of the image B: To view a portion of the right side of the image

84

(playback zoom) again.

• You cannot use Playback zoom with movies or images recorded in Multi Burst mode. • The images displayed in Quick Review (page 29) can be enlarged using the procedures outlined in Steps 3 to 5.

Recording an enlarged image – Trimming a After you have viewed an image using playback zoom, press MENU. The menu appears.

b Select [Trimming] with B, then press the center of the multiselector. c Select the image size with v/V, then press the center of the multi-selector.

Playing back successive images

Set the following items with v/V/b/B.

– Slide show

Interval settings 3 sec/5 sec/10 sec/30 sec/1 min

Mode dial: You can play back recorded images in succession, one after another. This is useful for checking your images, or for giving a presentation. Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) MENU Mode dial

Image Folder:Plays back all the images in the selected folder. All:Plays back all the images in the recording medium. Repeat On:Plays the images back repeatedly. Off:Plays through the images one time and then stops.

d Select [Start] with V/B, then press the center of the multiselector. The slide show begins.

To cancel the slide show setting In Step 3, select [Cancel].

a Set the mode dial to b Press MENU. The menu appears.

.

To stop slide show playback


The image is recorded, and the screen image returns to the size it was before enlargement. • The trimmed image is recorded in the recording folder as the newest file, and the original image is retained. • The trimmed image may suffer some deterioration in image quality. • You cannot trim to 3:2-sized image. • You cannot trim RAW data file/uncompressed (TIFF) images. • You cannot trim images displayed with Quick Review.

c Select (Slide) with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.

Press the center of the multi-selector, select [Exit] with B, then press the center.

85

To skip to the next/previous image during slide show

Rotating still images

Move the multi-selector to B (next) or b (previous).

– Rotate

b Press MENU.

Mode dial: • The interval setting time is approximate, and may vary according to the playback image size.

a Set the mode dial to , and display the image you want to rotate.

Images shot when holding the camera vertically can be rotated and displayed horizontally.

The menu appears.

c Select (Rotate) with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector. d Select with v , and rotate the image with b/B. e Select [OK] with v/V, then press the center of the multiselector.

To cancel the rotation In Step 4 or 5, select [Cancel]. Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) MENU Mode dial

86

• You cannot rotate protected images, movies, Multi Burst mode, RAW data file and uncompressed (TIFF) images. • You may not be able to rotate images shot with other cameras. • When viewing images on a computer, the image rotation information may not be reflected depending on the application software.

Playing back images shot in Multi Burst mode Mode dial: You can play back Multi Burst images continuously or play them back frame by frame. This function is used for checking the images.

Playing back continuously

Playing back frame by frame



.

b Select the Multi Burst image with b/B. The selected Multi Burst image is played back continuously. 80 min 101

14/14

Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) Mode dial

101-0014 PAUSE

2004 1 1 10:30PM

BACK/NEXT

.

b Select the Multi Burst image with b/B. The selected Multi Burst image is played back continuously.

c Press the center of the multiselector when the desired frame is displayed. “Step” appears.

VOLUME

80 min 101

To pause

• When Multi Burst images are played back on a computer or on a camera without the Multi Burst function, the 16 frames you shot will be displayed at the same time as part of one image. • You cannot divide the Multi Burst image.

101-0014 PLAY

2004 1 1 10:30PM

FRAME BACK/NEXT

VOLUME

d Advance the frame with b/B. B:The next frame is displayed. When you move the multi-selector to B and hold it, the frame advances. b:The previous frame is displayed. When you move the multi-selector to b and hold it, the frame advances in the reverse direction.


Press the center of the multi-selector. To resume playback, press the center again. The playback starts from the frame displayed on the screen.

14/14

Step 3/16

To return to normal playback In Step 4, press the center of the multiselector. The playback starts from the frame displayed on the screen.

87

To delete shot images When using this mode, you cannot delete only certain frames. When you delete images, all 16 of the frames are deleted at the same time. 1 Display the Multi Burst image you want to delete. 2 Press

(delete).

3 Select [Delete], then press the center of the multi-selector. All of the frames are deleted.

88

Still image editing

Protecting images – Protect

On the single screen a Set the mode dial to

On the Index screen .

Mode dial:

b Display the image you want to protect with b/B.

To prevent accidental erasure of an important image, you can protect it.



d Select - (Protect) with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector. The image currently being displayed is now protected, and the - (Protect) mark is indicated on the screen. 80 min

VGA

101

2/9

• Note that formatting the recording medium erases all the data in the recording medium even if images are protected, and these images cannot be recovered. • It may take some time to protect the images.


c Select - (Protect) with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector. d Select [Select] with b/B, then press the center of the multiselector. e Select the image you want to protect with v/V/b/B, then press the center of the multiselector.

BACK/NEXT

e To protect other images, display the image you want to protect with b/B, then press the center of the multiselector.

The green - (Protect) mark is indicated on the selected image.

SELECT

To cancel the protection In Step 4 or 5, press the center of the multi-selector again. The - mark disappears.

MENU

Still image editing

Protect Exit

/

a Set the mode dial to , press / (index) to switch to the Index screen.

TO NEXT

f To protect other images, repeat Step 5.

89

g Press MENU. h Select [OK] with B, then press the center of the multiselector. The - mark turns white and the selected image is protected.

To cancel the protection In Step 4, select [Cancel], or in Step 8, select [Exit].

To release protection In Step 5, select an image for which you want to release protection with v/V/b/B and press the center of the multi-selector. The - mark turns gray and repeat this operation for all the images for which you want to release protection. Then, press MENU, select [OK], and press the center of the multi-selector.

To release protection of all the images in the folder

Changing image size

In Step 4, select [All In This Folder], and press the center of the multi-selector. Then select [Off], and press the center.

– Resize Mode dial: You can change the image size of a recorded image, and save it as a new file. You can resize to the following sizes. 8M, 5M, 3M, 1M and VGA. The original image is retained even after resizing. Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) MENU Mode dial

To protect all the images in the folder In Step 4, select [All In This Folder], then press the center of the multi-selector. Next, select [On], then press the center.


b Display the image you want to resize with b/B. c Press MENU. The menu appears.

90

.

d Select (Resize) with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector. e Select the new size with v/V, then press the center of the multi-selector. The resized image is recorded in the recording folder as the newest file.

To cancel the resizing In Step 5, select [Cancel].

– Print (DPOF) mark Mode dial: You can designate certain images to be printed. This function is convenient when you want to print images at a shop or using a printer that conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard or using PictBridge-compliant printers.

• In E-Mail mode, the print (DPOF) mark is marked on the normal size image that was recorded at the same time. • When you mark images shot in Multi Burst mode, all the images are printed on one sheet divided into 16 s. • If you mark an image shot in TIFF mode with a print (DPOF) mark, only the uncompressed (TIFF) image is printed, and the JPEG image recorded at the same time is not printed. • You cannot set the number of print sheets.


Still image editing

• You cannot change the size of movies, Multi Burst mode, RAW data file or uncompressed (TIFF) images. • When images are resized from a smaller to a larger size, the image quality will deteriorate. • You cannot resize to 3:2-sized image. • If you resize a 3:2-sized image, black bands will appear at the top and bottom of the image.

Choosing images to print

/

• You cannot mark movies or images recorded in RAW mode.

91



b Display the image you want to print with b/B.

b Press MENU.


d Select [DPOF] (DPOF) with b/ B, then press the center of the multi-selector. The image. 80 min

mark is indicated on this VGA

101

a Set the mode dial to and press / (index) to switch to the Index screen.

2/9

The menu appears.

c Select [DPOF] (DPOF) with B, then press the center of the multi-selector. d Select [Select] with b/B, then press the center of the multiselector. • You cannot mark using the [All In This Folder] option.

DPOF Exit BACK/NEXT

e To mark other images, display the image you want to mark with b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector.

To delete the

The green mark is indicated on the selected image.

mark

In Step 4 or 5, press the center of the multi-selector again. The mark disappears.

92

e Select the images you want to mark with v/V/b/B, then press the center of the multiselector.

SELECT

MENU

TO NEXT

f To mark other images, repeat Step 5 for each of them. g Press MENU. h Select [OK] with B, then press the center of the multiselector. The mark turns white and the setting is completed.

To delete the

mark

In Step 5, select the image you want to delete the mark with v/V/b/B, and press the center of the multi-selector.

To delete all the marks from the images in the folder In Step 4, select [All In This Folder], then press the center of the multi-selector. Next, select [Off], then press the center.

To cancel the marking In Step 4, select [Cancel], or in Step 8, select [Exit].

Still image printing (PictBridge printer)

Connecting to a PictBridge printer

* An Index print function may not be provided depending on the printer. • When printing images, we recommend that you use the AC Adaptor to prevent the camera turning off.

Set the USB mode on the camera to connect the camera with a printer. Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) Mode dial

Connecting the camera to the printer Connect the (USB) jack on the camera and the USB connector on the printer using a USB cable. The connection can be made regardless of whether the camera is turned on or off. When the camera is turned on, the camera turns to playback mode regardless of the mode dial position and the newest image in the selected recording folder is displayed on the screen.

a Set the mode dial to SET UP. b Select (Setup 2) with V, then select [USB Connect] with B/ v/V.

After the connection is made, the mark is indicated on the screen.

c Select [PictBridge] with B/v, then press the center of the multi-selector. Setup 2 File Number: USB Connect: PictBridge Video Out: PTP Clock Set: Normal

8M

101

101-0002 BACK/NEXT


Even if you do not have a computer, you can easily print images shot using your camera by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compliant printer. For preparation, you only need to select the USB connection in the SET UP settings and connect the camera to the printer. Using a PictBridge-compliant printer allows you to easily print the Index prints*.

Preparing the camera

2/9

2004 1 1 10:30AM VOLUME

Printer

The USB mode is set.

93

When [USB Connect] is not set to [PictBridge] in the SET UP settings You cannot use the PictBridge function, even when you turn on the camera. Set [USB Connect] to [PictBridge]. 1 Press MENU and select [USB Connect], then press the center of the multiselector. 2 Select [PictBridge] with v , then press the center.

Printing images You can select an image and print it. Set up the camera following the procedure on page 93, and then connect the printer.

On the single screen a Select the recording medium with the /CF switch and display the image you want to print with b/B. b Press MENU. The menu appears.

c Select (Print) with b/B, then press the center of the multiselector. d Select [This image] with v/V, then press the center of the multi-selector.

USB Connect PictBridge PTP Normal

/ Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) MENU

The Print screen appears.

/CF switch

8M

101

2/9

Print

• You cannot print movies and images recorded in RAW mode. • When printing E-mail mode images or uncompressed (TIFF) images, only their corresponding JPEG files are printed. • If an error message is sent from the connected printer during the connection, flashes for about five seconds. In such cases, check the printer. • Note that printing is canceled if you switch the /CF switch while printing images.

94

Index Date Quantity Exit

Off Off 1 OK

e Select [Quantity] with v/V, select the number of images with b/B. You can select the number up to 20.

f Select [OK] with V/B, then press the center of the multiselector. The image is printed. Do not disconnect the USB cable while the (Not disconnect USB cable) mark is indicated on the screen. 101

2/9

In Step 5, select [Date], then select the date format with b/B. You can select from [Day&Time] or [Date]. The date is inserted in the images printed. This function may not be provided depending on the printer.

On the Index screen a Select the recording medium with the /CF switch and press / (index) to switch to the Index screen. The screen turns to the index screen.


Printing 1/3 Exit

To cancel printing In Step 4, select [Cancel] or in Step 6, select [Exit].

To print other images After Step 6, select another image, then select [Print] with v .

To print all the images indicated with the mark

c Select (Print) with B, then press the center of the multiselector. d Select [Select] with b/B, then press the center of the multiselector. e Select the image you want to print with v/V/b/B, then press the center of the multiselector.


8M

To insert the date and time on images

The mark is indicated on the selected image.

In Step 4, select [DPOF image]. All the images indicated with the mark are printed in the specified number, regardless of the image displayed. SELECT

MENU

TO NEXT

95

f To print other images, repeat Step 5. g Press MENU. The Print screen appears.

Print


Off Off 1 OK

h Select [Quantity] with v/V, select the number of images with b/B. You can select the number up to 20. All the images selected are printed in the specified number.

i Select [OK] with V/B, then press the center of the multiselector. The images are printed. Do not disconnect the USB cable while the mark is indicated on the screen.


To print all the images indicated with the mark In Step 4, select [DPOF image]. All the images indicated with the mark are printed in the specified number, regardless of the image displayed.

To print all the images in the folder In Step 4, select [All In This Folder], then press the center of the multi-selector.

Printing index-images You can print some images side-by-side. We refer to this function as an index print*. You can lay single images side-by-side in a specified number and print them, or lay different images side-by-side to make a set by combining multiple different images and print the set in the specified number of copies. Set up the camera following the procedure on page 93, and connect the printer. * An index print function may not be provided depending on a printer.

To insert the date and time on images In Step 8, select [Date], then select the date format with b/B. You can select from [Day&Time] or [Date]. The date is inserted in the images printed. This function may not be provided depending on the printer.

/ Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) MENU

Printing 2/3 Exit

96

/CF switch

On the single screen a Select the recording medium with the /CF switch and display the image you want to print with b/B. b Press MENU. The menu appears.

c Select (Print) with b/B, then press the center of the multiselector. d Select [This image] with v/V, then press the center of the multi-selector.

f Select [Quantity] with v/V, select the number of images laid side-by-side with b/B. You can select the number up to 20. You can lay the specified number of images side-by-side.

g Select [OK] with V/B, then press the center of the multiselector. The image is printed. Do not disconnect the USB cable while the (Not disconnect USB cable) mark is indicated on the screen. 8M

101

The Print screen appears. 8M

101

2/9

2/9

Printing Index 1/1 Exit


• You cannot print movies and images recorded in RAW mode. • When printing E-mail mode images or uncompressed (TIFF) images, only their corresponding JPEG files are printed. • If an error message is sent from the connected printer during the connection, flashes for about five seconds. In such cases, check the printer. • Note that printing is canceled if you switch the /CF switch while printing images.

Print


Off Off 1 OK

e Select [Index] with v , select [On] with b/B.


To print other images After Step 7, select another image, then select [Print] with v . Then repeat from Step 4.

97

On the Index screen

g Press MENU.

In Step 4, select [DPOF image]. All the images indicated with the mark are printed, regardless of the image displayed.

a Select the recording medium with the /CF switch and press / (index) to switch to the Index screen.

h Select [Index] with v , then select [On] with b/B.

To insert the date and time on images

b Press MENU.

To print all the images indicated with the mark

In Step 6, select [Date], then select the date format with b/B. You can select from [Day&Time] or [Date]. The date is inserted in the images printed. This function may not be provided depending on the printer. • All the images may not be laid on a sheet depending on the number of images.

The menu appears.

i Select [Quantity] with v/V, select the number of copies you want to print with b/B. You can select the number up to 20.

c Select (Print) with B, then press the center of the multiselector.

j Select [OK] with V/B, then press the center of the multiselector.

d Select [Select] with b/B, then press the center of the multiselector.

The images are printed. Do not disconnect the USB cable while the mark is indicated on the screen.

e Select the desired image with v/V/b/B, then press the center of the multi-selector. The mark is indicated on the selected image.

Printing Index 1/3 Exit

To cancel printing In Step 4, select [Cancel] or in Step 0, select [Exit]. SELECT

MENU

TO NEXT

f To print other images, repeat Step 5.

98

To print all the images indicated with the mark In Step 4, select [DPOF image]. All the images indicated with the mark are printed, regardless of the image displayed.

In Step 4, select [All In This Folder], then press the center of the multi-selector.

To insert the date and time on images In Step 9, select [Date], then select the date format with b/B. You can select from [Day&Time] or [Date]. The date is inserted in the images printed. This function may not be provided depending on the printer.


To print all the images in the folder

99

Enjoying movies • The [640 (Fine)] image size can be used only when you record the image into the “Memory Stick PRO” or Microdrive.

Shooting movies Mode dial: You can shoot movies with audio.

d Press the shutter button fully down. “REC” appears on the screen and the camera starts recording the image and sound.

Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) MENU Mode dial Shutter button

80 min 101 REC 00:00:02[00:10:48]

• When the capacity of the recording medium is used up, recording stops.

e Press the shutter button fully down again to stop recording.


.


c Select (Image Size) with b, then select the desired size with v/V. You can choose from [640 (Fine)], [640 (Standard)], or [160].

100

Indicators on the screen while you are shooting movies These indicators are not recorded. Each time you press (screen status), the status of the screen changes as follows: Indicators off t Indicators on. A histogram is not displayed. See page 152 for a detailed description of the indicated items.

To shoot close-ups (Macro) Set the mode dial to and follow the procedure on page 33.

To shoot with a self-timer Set the mode dial to and follow the procedure on page 34. • Be careful not to touch the microphone (page 12) during shooting. • The following functions cannot be used. – Digital zoom – Shooting with the flash – Inserting date and time • When you select [640 (Fine)] with the supplied A/V connecting cable plugged in the A/V OUT (MONO) jack, you cannot check the shooting image using the screen. The screen turns blue. • See pages 135, 136 for the recording time allowed for each image size.

Viewing movies on the screen Mode dial: You can view movies on the screen of the camera and hear sounds from the speaker of the camera.

b Select the desired movie with b/B. Movies with the image size [640 (Fine)] or [640 (Standard)] are displayed on the full screen. 80 min 101

10/10 00:00:00

Speaker 101_0010 PLAY

Mode dial

VOLUME

Movies with the image size [160] are displayed a size smaller than still images.

c Press the center of the multiselector. The movie images and sound are played back. B (playback) appears on the screen while a movie is playing back. Multi-selector (v/V/b/B)

80 min 101

10/10 00:00:03

. Playback bar 101_0010 STOP

2004 1 1 10:30PM

REV/CUE

To fast-forward / rewind Move the multi-selector to B (next) or b (previous) while playing back a movie. To return to normal playback, press the center of the multi-selector.

VOLUME

Each time you press (screen status), the status of the screen changes as follows: Indicators off t Indicators on. A histogram is not displayed. See page 154 for a detailed description of the indicated items. • The procedure for viewing movies on a TV is the same as that for viewing still images (page 41). • A movie recorded using other Sony devices may be displayed a size smaller than still images.

Enjoying movies


Adjust the volume with v/V.

Indicators on the screen while you are viewing movies

2004 1 1 10:30PM BACK/NEXT

To adjust the volume

To stop playback Press the center of the multi-selector again.

101

Deleting movies Mode dial: You can delete unwanted movies. Mode dial



b Select the movie you want to delete with b/B. c Press

(delete).

The movie has not yet been deleted at this point.

d Select [Delete] with v , then press the center of the multiselector. “Access” appears on the screen and the movie is deleted. / Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) • You cannot delete the protected movies. • Note that the movies once deleted cannot be recovered.

e To delete other movies, display the movie you want to delete with b/B, then repeat Step 4.

a Set the mode dial to and press / (index) button to switch to the Index screen. b Press

(delete).

c Select [Select] with b/B, then press the center of the multiselector. d Select the movies you want to delete with v/V/b/B, then press the center of the multiselector. The (delete) mark is indicated on the selected movie.

To cancel the deletion In Step 4 or 5, select [Exit]. SELECT

TO NEXT


e Repeat Step 4 to delete other movies. f Press

102

(delete).

g Select [OK] with B, then press the center of the multiselector. “Access” message appears on the screen and the movie will be deleted.

To cancel the deletion In Step 3 or 7, select [Exit].

To delete all the images in the folder In Step 3, select [All In This Folder], then press the center of the multi-selector. Next, select [OK], then press the center. To cancel the deletion, select [Cancel] with b, then press the center.

Editing movies

<Example> Cutting the movie numbered 101_0002 101_0003

101_0001

Mode dial: You can cut movies, or delete unnecessary portions of movies. This is the recommended mode to use when the recording medium capacity is insufficient, or when you attach movies to your e-mail messages.

1. Cutting scene A.

The file numbers assigned when movies are cut

2. Cutting scene B.

The cut movies are assigned new numbers and recorded as the newest files in the recording folder. The original movie is deleted and its file number is skipped.

1

3

2 101_0002

1

A

B

2

Divide point

3

101_0002

101_0004 1

3

A

2 101_0005

B

Divide point

3. Deleting scenes A and B if they are unnecessary. 101_0004 1

3

101_0007

A

B

2

Delete

4. Only the desired scenes remain. 1

3

2

Enjoying movies

101_0006

Delete

101_0006

103

Cutting movies

80 min

Divide


101

10/10 00:00:02

Dividing Point

MENU

OK Cancel Exit

Mode dial

When you want to adjust the cutting point, select [c/C] (frame forward/ rewind) and adjust the cutting point with b/ B. If you want to change the cutting point, select [Cancel]. The playback of the movie starts again.

f When you have decided on a cutting point, select [OK] with v/V, and press the center of the multi-selector. a Set the mode dial to

.

b Select the movie you want to cut with b/B. c Press MENU. The menu appears.

d Select (Divide) with B, then press the center of the multiselector. Next, select [OK] with v , then press the center. The playback of the movie starts.

e Decide on a cutting point.

104

Press the center of the multi-selector at the desired cutting point.

g Select [OK] with v , then press the center of the multiselector. The movie is cut.

To cancel cutting In Step 5 or 7, select [Exit]. The movie appears on the screen again. • You cannot cut the following images. – Still images – Movies not long enough to cut – Protected movies • You cannot restore movies once you cut them. • The original movie is deleted when you cut it. • The cut movie is recorded in the selected recording folder as the newest file.

Deleting unnecessary portions of movies a Cut an unnecessary portion of a movie. b Display the portion of the movie you want to delete. c Press

(delete).


d Select [Delete] with v , then press the center of the multiselector. The movie currently displayed on the screen is deleted.

Enjoying images on your computer

Copying images to your computer – For Windows s Recommended computer environment

• This camera is compliant with USB 2.0. • Use with a USB 2.0 (High-Speed USB) compatible computer environment allows highspeed data transfer. • If you connect two or more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, some equipment, including your camera, may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment.

USB mode There are two modes for a USB connection when connecting with a computer, [Normal] and [PTP]* modes. The default setting is the [Normal] mode. * Compatible only with Windows XP. When connected to a computer, only the data in the folder selected by the camera is copied to the computer. To select the folder, follow the procedure on page 83.

Communication with your computer When your computer resumes from the suspend or sleep mode, communication between your camera and your computer may not recover at the same time.

When a USB connector is not provided on your computer When neither a USB connector nor a recording medium slot is provided, you can copy images using an additional device. See the Sony Website for details. http://www.sony.net/

Contents of the CD-ROM x USB Driver This driver is needed in order to connect the camera to a computer. When using Windows XP, you need not install the USB driver. x Image Transfer This application is used to easily transfer images from the camera to a computer. x ImageMixer This application is used to display and edit images that are stored in a computer. • The required operations may differ depending on your OS. • Close down all applications running on the computer before installing the USB driver and application. • When using Windows XP or Windows 2000, log on as s. • The display settings should be 800 × 600 dots or more and High Color (16-bit color, 65000 colors) or more. When set to less than 800 × 600 dots or 256 colors or less, the install title screen does not appear.


OS: Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows Millennium Edition, Windows XP Home Edition, or Windows XP Professional The above OS must be installed at the factory. Operation is not assured in an environment upgraded to the operating systems described above or in a multi-boot environment. U: MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster USB connector: Provided as standard Display: 800 × 600 dots or more High Color (16-bit color, 65000 colors) or more

• Operations are not guaranteed when using a USB hub. • Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned above.

105

Installing the USB driver When using Windows XP, you need not install the USB driver. Once the USB driver is installed, you need not install the USB driver.

c Click [USB Driver] on the title screen.

e Click [Yes, I want to restart my computer now], then click [Finish].

a Turn on your computer, and insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Do not connect your camera to your computer at this time. The model selection screen appears. If it does not appear, double-click (My Computer) t (ImageMixer) in that order.

The “InstallShield Wizard” screen appears.

d Click [Next]. When the “Information” screen appears, click [Next].

b Click [Cyber-shot] on the model selection screen.

The installation menu screen appears. The USB driver installation starts. When the installation is completed, the screen informs you of completion.

106

Your computer restarts. Then, you can establish USB connection.

Installing “Image Transfer” You can use the “Image Transfer” software to copy images to your computer automatically when you connect the camera to your computer.

c Click [Next]. When “License Agreement” screen appears, click [Yes].

e Select the folder to be installed, then click [Next]. Select the program folder, then click [Next].

a Click [Cyber-shot] on the model selection screen.

b Click [Image Transfer] on the installation menu screen. Select the desired language, then click [OK].

The “Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Image Transfer” screen appears. • This section describes the English screen.

Read the agreement carefully. If you accept the of the agreement, proceed with the installation. The “Information” screen appears.

d Click [Next].

f Confirm if the checkbox is checked on the “Image Transfer Settings” screen, then click [Next].


The installation menu screen appears.

When the installation is completed, the screen informs you of completion.

107

g Click [Finish].

Installing “ImageMixer” You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software to copy, view and edit images, and create video CDs. For details, see the software’s help files.

The “InstallShield Wizard” screen closes. If you wish to continue with the installation of “ImageMixer,” click [ImageMixer] on the installation menu screen and then follow the procedure. • The USB driver is needed in order to use “Image Transfer.” If the necessary driver is not already installed on your computer, a screen that asks if you want to install the driver will appear. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.

a Click [ImageMixer] on the installation menu screen. Select the desired language, then click [OK].

The “Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard” screen appears. • This section describes the English screen.

b Follow instructions on each succeeding screen. Install “ImageMixer” according to the screen. • When you use Windows 2000 or Windows XP, install “WinASPI.”

108

• If DirectX8.0a or a later version is not installed in your computer, the “Information” screen appears. Follow the procedure on the screen.

c Restart your computer according to the screen. d Remove the CD-ROM.

Connecting the camera to your computer a Insert the recording medium with the images you want to copy into the camera. Connect the supplied AC Adaptor, and plug the adaptor into a wall outlet (wall socket).

Memory Stick

b Turn on your computer and the camera.

Access indicators*

Switch on MENU

“USB Mode Normal” appears on the screen of the camera. When a USB connection is established for the first time, your computer automatically runs the used program to recognize the camera. Wait for a while.

d Connect the USB cable to your computer.

* During communication, the access indicators turn red. • If “USB Mode Normal” does not appear in Step 4, press MENU, select [USB Connect], and set it to [Normal]. • When using a Microdrive/CF card, opening the CF card cover cancels the USB connection. Do not open the CF card cover during the USB connection.

To a wall outlet (wall socket) • Select the recording medium with the /CF switch (page 21). • When you copy images to your computer using the battery pack, copying may be failed or cause data corruption by battery shutoff. We recommend that you use the AC Adaptor.

USB Mode Normal


AC Adaptor

c Connect the supplied USB cable to the (USB) jack of the camera.

• When using a desktop computer, connect the USB cable to the USB connector on the rear . • When using Windows XP, the AutoPlay wizard automatically appears on the desktop. Proceed to page 112.

109

P Disconnecting the USB cable, removing the recording medium, or turning off the camera during a USB connection For Windows 2000, Me, or XP s 1 Double-click

on the tasktray.

Copying images using “Image Transfer” – Windows 98/98SE/2000/Me Connect the camera and your computer with the USB cable. “Image Transfer” launches and the images are automatically copied to the computer. When copying is complete, “ImageMixer” automatically launches and images appear.

– Windows XP Connect the camera and your computer with the USB cable. “Image Transfer” starts up automatically and the images are automatically copied to the computer. Windows XP is set so that the OS AutoPlay Wizard activates. If you want to cancel the setting, follow the procedure below.

a Click [Start], then click [My Computer]. Double-click here

2 Click

b Right-click [Sony MemoryStick], then click [Properties].

(Sony DSC), then click [Stop].

3 Confirm the device on the confirmation window, then click [OK].

c Cancel the setting.

4 Click [OK]. Step 4 is unnecessary for Windows XP s. 5 Disconnect the USB cable, remove the recording medium, or turn off the camera. For Windows 98 or 98SE s Confirm that the access indicators (page 109) on the screen are turned white and carry out only Step 5 above.

• Normally “Image Transfer” and “Date” folders are created inside the “My Documents” folder, and all of the image files recorded with the camera are copied into these folders. • You can change the “Image Transfer” settings (page 111).

1 Click [AutoPlay]. 2 Set [Content type] to [Pictures]. 3 Check [Select an action to perform] under [Actions], select [Take no action], then click [Apply]. 4 Set [Content type] to [Video files] and proceed Step 3. Set [Content type] to [Mixed content] and proceed Step 3. 5 Click [OK]. The [Properties] screen closes. The OS AutoPlay Wizard does not start up automatically even if the USB connection is made next time.

110

Changing “Image Transfer” settings

Copying images without using “Image Transfer”

You can change “Image Transfer” settings. Right-click the “Image Transfer” icon on the tasktray, select [Open Settings]. The settings you can set are as follows: [Basic], [Copy], and [Delete].

– Windows 98/98SE/2000/Me

When the “Image Transfer” starts, the below window appears.

a Double-click [My Computer], then double-click [Removable Disk]. The contents of the recording medium inserted in your camera appear. • This section describes an example of copying images to the “My Documents” folder. • When the “Removable Disk” icon is not shown, see page 112. • When using Windows XP, see page 112.

b Double-click [DCIM], then double-click the folder that the image files you want to copy are stored. c Right-click the image file to display the menu, then select [Copy] from the menu.

The image files are copied to the “My Documents” folder.


Right-click here

If you do not set to launch “Image Transfer” automatically, you can copy images as following procedure.

d Double-click the “My Documents” folder and rightclick on the “My Documents” window to display the menu, then select [Paste] from the menu.

When you select [Settings] from the above window, you can only change the [Basic] setting.

111

When an image with the same file name exists in the copy destination folder The overwrite confirmation message appears. When you overwrite the existing image with the new one, the original file data is deleted. To change the file name To copy an image file to the computer without overwriting, change the file name to the desired name. However, note that if you change the file name, you may not be able to play back that image with your camera. To play back images with the camera, perform the operation on page 116.

When a removable disk icon is not shown 1 Right-click [My Computer] to display the menu, then click [Properties]. The “System Properties” screen appears. 2 Display [Device Manager]. 1 Click [Hardware]. 2 Click [Device Manager]. • For Windows 98, 98SE, Me s, Step 1 is unnecessary. Click the [Device Manager] tab. 3 If [ Sony DSC] is displayed, delete it. 1 Right-click [ Sony DSC]. 2 Click [Uninstall]. The “Confirm Device Removal” screen appears. • For Windows 98, 98SE, Me s, click [Remove]. 3 Click [OK]. The device is deleted. Try the USB driver installation again using the supplied CD-ROM (page 106).

– Windows XP

Copying images using the Windows XP AutoPlay wizard a Make a USB connection (page 109). Click [Copy pictures to a folder on my computer using Microsoft Scanner and Camera Wizard], then click [OK]. The “Scanner and Camera Wizard” screen appears.

b Click [Next]. The images stored on the recording medium are displayed.

c Click the checkbox of images that you do not want to copy to your computer to remove the checkmark, then click [Next]. The “Picture Name and Destination” screen appears.

d Select a name and destination for your pictures, then click [Next]. Image copying starts. When the copying is completed, the “Other Options” screen appears.

112

e Select [Nothing. I’m finished working with these pictures], then click [Next]. The “Completing the Scanner and Camera Wizard” screen appears.

f Click [Finish].

Viewing the images on your computer a Click [Start], then click [My Documents]. The “My Documents” folder contents are displayed.

The wizard closes. • This section describes the procedure for viewing copied images in the “My Documents” folder. • When not using Windows XP, double-click [My Documents] on the desktop. • You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software to view and edit images on your computer. For details, see the software’s help files.

b Double-click the desired image file. The image is displayed.


• To continue copying other images, follow the procedure given under P on page 110 to disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. Then, perform the procedure from Step 1 again.

113

Image file storage destinations and file names The image files recorded with your camera are grouped as folders in the recording medium. Example: when viewing folders on Windows XP (when using a “Memory Stick”)

Folder containing image data which was recorded using the camera not equipped with the folder creating function. Folder containing image data which was recorded using your camera. When not creating any folders, there is only the “101MSDCF” folder. Folder containing E-Mail and TIFF mode image data/movie data/ Voice mode audio data which was recorded using the camera not equipped with the folder creating function.

• Even when using a Microdrive/CF card, “Sony MemoryStick” may be displayed, depending on your computer environment.

114

• You cannot record any images to “100MSDCF” or “MSSONY” folders. The images in these folders are available only for viewing. • For more information about the folder, see pages 50, 83.

Folder

File name

File meaning

101MSDCF to 999MSDCF

DSC0ssss.JPG

• Still image files shot in – Normal mode (page 27) – Exposure Bracket mode (page 63) – Burst mode (page 75) – Multi Burst mode (page 76) • Still image files recorded simultaneously in – RAW mode (page 79) – TIFF mode (page 80) – E-Mail mode (page 81) – Voice mode (page 81)

DSC0ssss.JPE

• Small-size image files shot in E-Mail mode (page 81)

DSC0ssss.MPG

• Audio files shot in Voice mode (page 81) • Uncompressed (TIFF) image file recorded in TIFF mode (page 80)

DSC0ssss.SRF

• RAW data file recorded in RAW mode (page 79)

MOV0ssss.MPG

• Movie files (page 100)

MOV0ssss.THM

• Index image files recorded in movie mode (page 100)

• ssss stands for any number within the range from 0001 to 9999. • The numerical portions of the following files are the same. – A RAW data file shot in RAW mode and its corresponding image file – An uncompressed image file shot in TIFF mode and its corresponding image file – A small-size image file shot in E-Mail mode and its corresponding image file – An audio file shot in Voice mode and its corresponding image file – A movie file recorded in movie mode and its corresponding index image file


DSC0ssss.TIF

• To view a RAW data file, you have to install exclusive application software from the supplied CD-ROM.

115

Viewing an image previously copied to a computer This operation is required for viewing image files that have been copied previously to a computer and already deleted from the recording medium using the camera. Copy the image files stored on your computer to a recording medium and view them on the camera. • Skip Step 1 if you have not changed the file name assigned by this camera. • You may not be able to view the image depending on the image size. • Images modified with a computer or images shot using other than this camera may not be able to be played back on the camera. • If the warning message for overwriting the data appears, enter other numbers in Step 1. • If there is no folder to store the image file, create a new folder, then copy the image file. For details on how to create the folder, see page 50.

116

a Right-click the image file, then click [Rename]. Change the file name to “DSC0ssss”. ssss stands for any number within the range from 0001 to 9999. • A file extension may be indicated depending on the setup of the computer. The extension of a still image is “JPG” and that of a movie is “MPG”. Do not change the extension.

b Copy the image file to a folder on the recording medium. 1 Right-click the image file, then click [Copy]. 2 Select the [DCIM] folder from [Removable Disk] or [Sony MemoryStick] in [My Computer]. 3 Right-click the [sssMSDCF] folder, then click [Paste]. sss stands for any number within the range from 100 to 999.

Copying images to your computer – For Macintosh s Recommended computer environment

• If you connect two or more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, some equipment, including your camera, may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment. • Operations are not guaranteed when using a USB hub. • Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments mentioned above.

USB mode

Communication with your computer When your computer resumes from the suspend or sleep mode, communication between your camera and your computer may not recover at the same time.

When a USB connector is not provided on your computer

Disconnecting the USB cable, removing the recording medium, or turning off the camera during a USB connection Drag and drop the drive icon or the icon of the recording medium to the “Trash” icon, then remove the USB cable, remove the recording medium, or turn off the camera • If you are using Mac OS X v10.0, remove the USB cable etc., after you have turned your computer off.

b Copying images

When neither a USB connector nor a recording medium slot is provided, you can copy images using an additional device. See the Sony Website for details. http://www.sony.net/

1 Double-click the newly recognized icon on the desktop. The contents of the recording medium inserted in your camera appear.

a Connecting your camera to your computer

3 Double-click the folder that the images you want to copy are stored.

For details, see page 109.

2 Double-click “DCIM.”

4 Drag and drop the image files to the hard disk icon. The image files are copied to your hard disk. For details on the storage location of the images and file names, see page 114.


OS: Mac OS 9.1, 9.2, or Mac OS X (v10.0/ v10.1/v10.2) The above OS must be installed at the factory. USB connector: Provided as standard Display: 800 × 600 dots or more 32000-color mode or more

computer. To select the folder, follow the procedure on page 83.

There are two modes for a USB connection when connecting with a computer, [Normal] and [PTP]* modes. The default setting is the [Normal] mode. * Compatible only with Mac OS X. When connected to a computer, only the data in the folder selected by the camera is copied to the

117

c Viewing the images on your computer 1 Double-click the hard disk icon. 2 Double-click the desired image file in the folder containing the copied files. The image file opens. • Close down all applications running on the computer before installing application. • You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software to copy images to your computer and to view images on your computer. For details on installing, see operating instructions supplied with the CDROM. For details on operation, see the software’s help files. • When the image cannot be displayed, increase the virtual memory capacity. • “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” cannot be used with Mac OS X. • “Image Transfer” cannot be used with Macintosh.

118

For Mac OS X s When you click an E-Mail mode image file, “There is no application available to open the document "DSC0ssss.JPE".” may be shown. In this case, carry out the following setup. The screen may differ depending on your OS version. 1 Click [Choose Application...] on the screen “There is no application available to open the document "DSC0ssss.JPE".” 2 Change [Recommended Applications] to [All Applications]. 3 Select [QuickTime Player] from the application list, then click [Open].

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting If you have trouble with your camera, try the following solutions. 1 First, check the items on pages 119 to 129. If the screen shows “C:ss:ss,” the self-diagnosis function is working. Please see page 133.

2 Should your camera still not work properly, press the RESET button located inside the battery/“Memory Stick” cover, then turn on the camera again. (This will clear the date and time settings, etc.)

3 Should your camera still not work properly, consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

RESET

Battery and power Cause

Solution

You cannot charge the battery pack.

• The camera is turned on.

p Turn the camera off (page 18).

The battery pack cannot be installed.

• The battery pack is not installed correctly.

p Install the battery pack while pushing the battery eject lever down using the front edge of the battery pack (page 14).

The e on the display window flashes quickly when charging a battery pack.

• The battery pack is not installed correctly. • The battery pack has malfunctioned.

p Install the battery pack correctly (page 14). p Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

The r on the display window does not flash when charging a battery pack.

• The AC Adaptor is disconnected. • The AC Adaptor has malfunctioned.

p Properly connect the AC Adaptor (page 14). p Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. p Install the battery pack correctly (page 14). —

• The battery pack is not installed correctly. • The battery pack is completely charged.

Troubleshooting

Symptom

119

Symptom

Cause

Solution

The battery remaining indicator is incorrect, or sufficient battery remaining indicator is displayed but the power runs out soon.

• You have used the camera for a long time in an extremely hot or an extremely cold location. • A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time. • The battery pack is discharged. • The battery pack is dead (page 147).

p See page 146.

The battery pack runs down too quickly.

• You have used the camera in an extremely cold location. • The DC plug is dirty so the battery pack is not charged enough. • The battery pack is dead (page 147).

p See page 146.

• The battery pack is not installed correctly. • The AC Adaptor is disconnected. • The AC Adaptor has malfunctioned.

p Install the battery pack correctly (page 14). p Properly connect the AC Adaptor (page 17). p Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. p Install a charged battery pack (page 14). p Replace the battery pack with a new one.

You cannot turn on the camera.

• The battery pack is discharged. • The battery pack is dead (page 147). The power turns off suddenly.

• If you do not operate the camera for about three minutes when using a battery pack, the camera turns off automatically to prevent wearing down the battery (page 18). • The battery pack is discharged.

p Charge the battery pack after using it completely. The battery remaining indicator displays the correct time (page 15). p Install a charged battery pack (page 14). p Replace the battery pack with a new one.

p Clean the DC plug with a cotton bud, etc., and charge the battery pack (page 143). p Replace the battery pack with a new one.

p Turn on the camera again (page 18) or use the AC Adaptor (page 17). p Replace it with a charged battery pack (page 14).

Shooting still images / movies

120

Symptom

Cause

Solution

The LCD screen is not turned on even when the power is turned on.

• The FINDER/LCD switch is set to FINDER.

p Set it to LCD (page 29).

The subject is not visible on the finder.

• The diopter scale is not properly adjusted.

p Adjust the finder adjustment lever (page 29).

The subject is not visible on the screen.

• The mode dial is not set to or .

, P, S, A, M, SCN p Set it to

, P, S, A, M, SCN or

(pages 27 and 100).

Symptom

Cause

The shooting image is not displayed on the screen during a movie shooting.

• The image size is set to [640 (Fine)] when the A/ p Disconnect the A/V connecting cable. V connecting cable is connected to the A/V OUT p Set the image size to any setting other than [640 (Fine)]. (MONO) jack.

Solution

p Set the macro recording mode. Make sure to place the lens farther away from the subject than the shortest shooting distance when shooting (page 33). • (Twilight mode) or (Landscape mode) is p Set it to other modes (page 37). selected for the Scene Selection function. • Manual focus mode is selected. p Set the FOCUS switch to AUTO (page 67).

The image is out of focus. • The subject is too close.

Precision digital zoom does not function.

Smart zoom does not function.

• [Digital Zoom] is set to [Smart] in the SET UP settings. • You are shooting in RAW mode.

p Set [Digital Zoom] to [Precision] (pages 30, 48, 140).

• [Digital Zoom] is set to [Precision] in the SET UP settings. • The image size is set to [8M] or [3:2].

p Set [Digital Zoom] to [Smart] (pages 30, 48, 140).

• You are shooting in Multi Burst mode. • You are shooting in RAW mode.

p The precision digital zoom cannot be used in RAW mode (pages 30, 79).

p Set image size to other settings except [8M] and [3:2] (page 24). p The smart zoom cannot be used in Multi Burst mode (pages 30, 76). p The smart zoom cannot be used in RAW mode (pages 30, 79).

• You are shooting a subject with a light source behind the subject.

The image is too bright.

• You are shooting a spot lighted subject in a dark location such as on a stage. • The brightness of the screen is too high.

p Adjust the exposure (page 59).

When looking at the screen in a dark place, some noise may show up on the screen.

• The camera temporarily brightens the screen to allow you to check the image being displayed while you are using the camera in a dark place.

p This will have no effect on the image you shoot.

Vertical streaks appear when you are shooting a very bright subject.

• The smear phenomenon is occurring.

p This is not a malfunction.

• The brightness of the screen is too low.

p Adjust the brightness of the screen (pages 48, 141).

Troubleshooting

p Select the metering mode (page 58). p Adjust the exposure (page 59). p Set the flash mode to (Forced flash) (page 68). p Adjust the brightness of the screen (pages 48, 141).

The image is too dark.

121

Symptom

Cause

p Insert a recording medium (pages 22, 23). p Delete the images saved in the recording medium (page 43). p Change the recording medium. p Set the switch to the proper position (page 21).

Recording takes a long time.

• NR slow shutter function is activated.

p Set to a faster shutter speed than 1/25 second (page 55).

A sound is made when changing between the NightShot and NightFraming modes, or when the shutter button is lightly pressed while NightFraming is set.

• The sound is made by the lens in operation.


The image colors are not correct.

• The NightShot or NightFraming function is set.

p Cancel the Nightshot/NightFraming functions (pages 77 and 78). p Cancel Picture Effect (page 79).

• Picture effect is activated. NightShot or NightFraming does not function.

122

Solution

You cannot shoot images. • No recording medium is inserted. • The capacity of the recording medium is insufficient. • The /CF switch is not set to the proper position. • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to the LOCK position. • The CF card cover is open. • You cannot shoot while the flash is charging. • The mode dial is not set to , P, S, A, M or SCN when you want to shoot a still image. when you want to • The mode dial is not set to shoot a movie. • The image size is set to [640 (Fine)] when you shoot a movie.

• The mode dial is set to S, A, M or SCN. • Manual focus mode is selected.

p Set it to the recording position (page 144). p Close the CF card cover (page 23). — p Set the mode dial to , P, S, A, M or SCN (page 27). p Set the mode dial to

(page 100).

p Use a “Memory Stick PRO” or Microdrive (pages 100, 144). p Set the image size to any position other than [640 (Fine)].

p Set it to , P or (only for NightShot) (pages 77 and 78). p The NightFraming function cannot be used when manual focus mode is selected. Set the FOCUS switch to AUTO (page 67).

Symptom

Cause

Solution

Cannot shoot images with the flash.

• The mode dial is set to . • The flash is set to (No flash).

p Set the mode dial to , P, S, A, M or SCN (page 27). p Set the flash to “Auto” (No indicator), (Forced flash), or (Slow synchro) (page 68). p Set it to other settings (page 37).

• • • • •

•

(Twilight mode) is selected for the Scene Selection function. (Landscape mode) is selected for the Scene Selection function. The camera is in Multi Burst, Burst, or Exposure Bracket mode. [Hot Shoe] in the SET UP settings is set to [On]. When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual] in the SET UP settings, you did not pop the flash up using the OPEN (FLASH) switch. NightShot is activated.

p Set the flash to

(Forced flash) (page 37).

p Cancel the Multi Burst, Burst, or Exposure Bracket mode. p Set it to [Off] (pages 48 and 140). p Set [Pop-up Flash] to [Auto] in the SET UP settings (pages 48, 140) or pop the flash up using the OPEN (FLASH) switch (page 69). p Select the NightFraming function or cancel the NightShot function (pages 77 and 78). p Set it to other settings (page 37).

•

Cannot record in Multi Burst, Burst, or Exposure Bracket mode.

• [Mode] (REC Mode) is set to other than [Normal].

p Set it to [Normal].

The eyes of the subject come out red.

—

p Set [Red Eye Reduction] to [On] (page 69).

The date and time are recorded incorrectly.

• The date and time are not set correctly.

p Set the correct date and time (page 19).

The aperture value and shutter speed flash when you press and hold the shutter button halfway down.

• The exposure is incorrect.

p Adjust the exposure (page 59).

(Twilight mode) or (Landscape mode) is selected for the Scene Selection function.

Troubleshooting

The macro mode does not function.

123

Viewing images Symptom

Cause

Solution

The image cannot be played back.

• The mode dial is not set to . • You changed the folder/file name on a computer. • You cannot play back the image on the camera if you modify the image on a computer. • The camera is in USB mode. • The CF card cover is open.

p Set the mode dial to p See page 116. —

The image is coarse right after being played back.

• The image momentarily becomes rough for image processing.


The images cannot be played back on a TV.

• The [Video Out] setting for the camera in SET UP is incorrect. • The connection is not correct.

p Set [Video Out] to [NTSC] or [PAL] (pages 48 and 142).

The images cannot be played back on a computer.

—

p See page 125.

(page 39).

p Cancel USB communication (page 110). p Close the CF card cover (page 23).

p Check the connection (page 41).

Deleting/editing an image

124

Symptom

Cause

Your camera cannot delete an image.

• The image is protected. p Cancel the protection (page 89). • The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” p Set it to the recording position (page 144). is set to the LOCK position.

Solution

You have deleted the image by mistake.

• Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it.

The resizing function does not work.

• You cannot resize movies, Multi Burst, RAW data files, and uncompressed (TIFF) images.

—

You cannot attach a print (DPOF) mark.

• Print (DPOF) marks cannot be attached to movies or images recorded in RAW mode.

—

You cannot cut a image.

• The movie is not long enough to cut. • Protected movies cannot be cut. • Still images cannot be cut.

p Protecting the image can prevent accidental erasure (page 89). p The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” will prevent you from deleting images by mistake (page 144).

— p Cancel the protection (page 89). —

Computers Symptom

Cause

Solution

You do not know whether or not your OS can be used with the camera.

—

p Check “Recommended computer environment” (pages 105, 117).

You cannot install the USB driver.

—

p In Windows 2000, log on as (authorized s) (page 105).

Your computer does not recognize your camera.

• • • •

p Turn on the camera (page 18). p Use the AC Adaptor (page 17). p Use the supplied USB cable (page 109). p Disconnect the USB cable, and securely connect it again. Make sure that “USB Mode” is displayed on the screen (page 109). p Set it to [Normal] (page 142).

The camera is turned off. The battery level is too low. You are not using the supplied USB cable. The USB cable is not connected securely.

You cannot copy images.

• The camera is not correctly connected to your computer. • The copy procedure differs depending on your OS. — —

p Disconnect the USB cables except for those connected to the keyboard and the mouse. p Directly connect the camera and your computer without using a USB hub. p Install the USB driver (page 106). p Delete the erroneously recognized device from your computer, then install the USB driver (pages 106, 112).

p Close the CF card cover (page 23). p Connect the camera and your computer correctly (page 109). p Follow the copy procedure for your OS (pages 110, 111, 117).

Troubleshooting

• [USB Connect] is not set to [Normal] in the SET UP settings. • The USB connectors on your computer are connected to other equipment besides the keyboard, the mouse. • The camera is not directly connected to your computer. • The USB driver is not installed. • Your computer does not properly recognize the device because you connected the camera and your computer with the USB cable before you installed the “USB Driver” from the supplied CD-ROM. • The CF card cover is open.

p If you are using the “Image Transfer” software, see page 110. p If you are using the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software, click on HELP.

125

Symptom

Cause

Solution

After making a USB connection, “Image Transfer” does not automatically start.

—

p Select [Launch Image Transfer automatically when the camera, etc., is connected.] at [Basic] setting (page 111). p Make a USB connection when the computer is turned on.

The image cannot be played back on a computer.

• You try to play back the image recorded in the RAW mode. —

—

—

p Install exclusive software from the supplied CD-ROM (page 79). p If you are using the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software, click on HELP. p Consult the computer or software manufacturer.

The image and sound are affected by noise when you play back a movie on a computer.

• You are playing back the movie directly from the recording medium.

p Copy the movie to the hard disk of the computer and then play the movie file back from the hard disk (pages 110, 111, 117).

You cannot print an image.

— —

p Check the printer settings. p If you are using the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software, click on HELP.

The error message appears when loading the supplied CD-ROM.

• The computer display is not set correctly.

p Set the display mode of your computer as follows: For Windows, 800 × 600 dots or more, high color (16-bit color, 65000 colors) or more. For Macintosh, 800 × 600 dots or more, 32000 colors or more.

“Memory Stick”

126

Symptom

Cause

Solution

You cannot insert a “Memory Stick.”

• You are inserting it backwards.

p Insert it from the right side (page 22).

You cannot record on a “Memory Stick.”

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to the LOCK position. • The “Memory Stick” is full. • The /CF switch is set to CF. • When shooting movies, the image size is set to [640 (Fine)].

p Set it to the recording position (page 144).

You cannot format a “Memory Stick.”

p Delete unnecessary images (pages 43, 102). p Set the switch to (page 21). p Use a “Memory Stick PRO” or the Microdrive (pages 100, 144). p Set the image size to any setting other than [640 (Fine)].

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” p Set it to the recording position (page 144). is set to the LOCK position.

Symptom

Cause

You have formatted a “Memory Stick” by mistake.

• All the data on the “Memory Stick” are erased by p We recommend that you set the “Memory Stick” write-protect formatting. You cannot restore them. switch to the LOCK position to protect accidental erasure (page 144).

Solution

Microdrive/CF card Symptom

Cause

Solution

You cannot insert a Microdrive/CF card.

• You try to insert an unusable CF card. • You are inserting it backwards.

— p Insert it from the right side (page 23).

You cannot record on a Microdrive/CF card.

• • • • •

p Delete unnecessary images (pages 43, 102). — p Close the CF card cover (page 23). p Set the switch to CF (page 21). p Use a “Memory Stick PRO” or the Microdrive (pages 100, 144). p Set the image size to any setting other than [640 (Fine)].

The Microdrive/CF card is full. An unusable CF card is inserted. The CF card cover is open. The /CF switch is set to . When shooting movies using a CF card, the image size is set to [640 (Fine)].

The Microdrive is heated.

• You are using the Microdrive for a long time.

You have formatted a Microdrive/CF card by mistake.

• All the data on the Microdrive/CF card are erased by formatting. You cannot restore them.

p This is not a malfunction. —

Symptom

Cause

Solution

The connection cannot be established.

• The printer is not compliant with the PictBridge standard. • The printer does not set for the connection with the camera. • [USB Connect] is not set to [PictBridge] in the SET UP settings.

p Consult with the printer manufacturer. p Check that the printer is turned on and can connect with the camera. p Set it to [PictBridge] (page 142).

Troubleshooting

PictBridge-compliant printer

127

Symptom

Cause

Solution

You cannot print images.

• The camera does not connect to the printer.

p Check that the camera and the printer are properly connected using the USB cable. p Turn on the printer. For further information, refer to the operating instructions supplied with it. —

• The printer is not turned on. • Movies and images recorded in RAW mode cannot be printed. • Images modified with a computer or images shot using other than this camera may not be able to be printed. Printing is canceled.

• You disconnected the USB cable before the (Not disconnect USB cable) mark disappears. • You switched the /CF switch while printing.

You cannot insert the date or print images in the index mode.

• The printer does not provide these functions.

“---- -- --”is printed on the date-inserted part.

• The recording date data is not recorded on the image.

• The date may not be inserted in the index mode depending on the printer.

—

—

— p Consult with the printer manufacturer whether the printer provides these function or not. p Consult with the printer manufacturer. p The images that do not have the recording date data cannot be printed with the date inserted. Set [Date] to [Off] and print it.

Others Symptom

Cause

Solution

The camera does not work, no operations can be performed.

• You are not using an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. • The battery level is low or zero (The indicator appears.). • The AC Adaptor is not connected securely.

p Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (page 146).

• The internal system is not working properly.

p Remove, and then, after one minute, reinstall the battery pack and turn on the camera. If this does not work, press the RESET button located inside the battery/“Memory Stick” cover with a pointed object, then turn the power on again. (This will clear the date and time settings, etc.)

The power is on, but the camera does not work.

128

p Charge the battery pack (page 14). p Connect it securely to the DC IN jack of the camera and to a wall outlet (wall socket) (page 17).

Symptom

Cause

Solution

You cannot identify the indicator on the screen.

—

p Check the indicator (pages 149 to 154).

The lens gets fogged.

• Condensation is occurring.

p Turn off the camera, leave the camera for about an hour and then try to use it again (page 143).

The camera gets hot if you use it for a long time.

—


Troubleshooting

129

Warnings and messages The following messages appear on the screen.

130

Message

Meaning/ Corrective Action

No Memory Stick

• Insert a “Memory Stick” (page 22). • Set the /CF switch to CF and record the image using the Microdrive/CF card.

System error

• Turn the power off and on again (page 18).

Memory Stick error

• The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be used with your camera (page 144). • The “Memory Stick” is damaged, or the terminal section of the “Memory Stick” is dirty. • Insert the “Memory Stick” correctly (page 22).

Memory Stick type error

• The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be used with your camera (page 144).

Read only memory

• You cannot record or delete images on the “Memory Stick” with this camera.

Memory Stick locked

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to the LOCK position. Set it to the recording position (page 144).

No memory space

• The capacity of the “Memory Stick” is insufficient. You cannot record images. Delete unnecessary images or data (pages 43, 102).

No CF card

• Insert the Microdrive/CF card (page 23). • Set the /CF switch to and record the image using the “Memory Stick.”

CF card error

• An unusable CF card is inserted (page 145). • The Microdrive/CF card is damaged, or the terminal section of the Microdrive/CF card is dirty. • Insert the Microdrive/CF card correctly (page 23).

CF card type error

• The inserted CF card cannot be used with your camera (page 21).

CF card locked

• The Microdrive/CF card is set to be unrecordable. Consult with the Microdrive/CF card manufacturer.

No CF card space

• The capacity of the Microdrive/CF card is insufficient. You cannot record images. Delete unnecessary images or data (pages 43, 102)

Cover open

• Close the CF card cover.

Format error

• The recording medium format failed. Format the recording medium again (page 45).

For “InfoLITHIUM” battery only

• The battery pack is not the “InfoLITHIUM” type.

Message

Meaning/ Corrective Action • The battery level is low or zero. Charge the battery pack (page 14). Depending on the conditions of use or the type of battery pack, the indicator may flash even though there are still 5 to 10 minutes of remaining battery time left.

Folder error

• A folder with the same first three digits number already exists on the recording medium. (For example: 123MSDCF and 123ABCDE) Select other folders, or create a new folder.

Cannot create more folders • The folder whose first three digits of the name is “999” exists on the recording medium. You cannot create any more folders. Cannot record

• You attempted to select the folder that is available only for viewing with your camera. Select other folders (page 51). • The amount of light is not sufficient, or camera shake may occur because a slower shutter speed is set. Use the flash, or mount the camera on a tripod to steady the camera.

“Night shot”

• An operation that is not valid while NIGHTSHOT is set was attempted.

“Night framing”

• An operation that is not valid while NIGHTFRAMING is set is attempted.

Manual focus is invalid

• The FOCUS switch is set to MANUAL when the mode dial is set to

The flash is not open

• Pop the flash up using the

640 (Fine) is not available

• A recording medium that does not correspond to the [640 (Fine)] size movie is inserted (page 100).

Busy

• When using the Microdrive, the data writing process was not performed due to a drop in data transmission rate.

Buffer over

• When using the Microdrive, the data writing process was not performed due to a drop in data transmission rate. (This message is indicated after the “Busy” message appeared.)

Read error

• The movies stored on the Microdrive cannot be played back due to an internal temperature problem or vibration. • The file is corrupted.

File error

• An error occurred while playing back the image.

Image size over

• You are playing back an image of a size that cannot be played back on your camera.

No file in this folder

• No images have been recorded in this folder.

Cannot divide

• The movie is not long enough to be divided. • The file is not a movie.

Invalid operation

• You are playing back a file that was created on equipment other than your camera.

Enable pritner to connect

• [USB Connect] is set to [PictBridge], however the camera is connected to a non-PictBridge-compliant device. Check the device.

Connect to

• You tried to print images before the printer connection was established.

Troubleshooting

device

.

OPEN (FLASH) switch (page 69).

131

Message

Meaning/ Corrective Action

No printable image

• You tried to execute [DPOF image] without checking the mark. • You tried to execute [All In This Folder] while selecting the folder that stores only movies or images recorded in RAW mode. You cannot print movies or images recorded in RAW mode.

Printer busy

• Since the printer is busy, it cannot receive print requests. Check the printer.

Paper error

• A paper error occurred, such as paper-out, paper-jam, etc. Check the printer.

Ink error

• An ink error occurred. Check the printer.

Printer error

• The camera received an error from the printer. Check the printer, or check the image you want to print is corrupted. • The data is being transferred to the printer. Do not disconnect the USB cable.

132

Self-diagnosis display –If a code starting with an alphabet letter appears Your camera has a self-diagnosis display. This function displays the condition of the camera on the screen using a combination of a letter and four numerical digits. If this occurs, check the following code chart and take the corresponding countermeasure. The last two digits (indicated by ss) will differ depending on the state of the camera.

Code

Cause

Countermeasure

C:32: ss

There is trouble with your camera’s hardware.

Turn the power off and on again (page 18).

C:13: ss

The camera cannot read or write data on the recording medium.

Re-insert the recording medium several times.

An unformatted recording medium is inserted.

Format the recording medium (page 45).

The inserted recording medium cannot be used with your camera, or the data is damaged.

Insert a new recording medium (pages 21, 22, 23).

A camera malfunction that you cannot reverse has occurred.

Press the RESET button (page 119) located inside the battery/“Memory Stick” cover, then turn on the camera again.

E:61: ss E:91: ss

If your camera is not still functioning well after trying the countermeasure a couple of times, the camera may need to be repaired. your Sony dealer or local autholized Sony service facility and inform them of the 5-digit code. Troubleshooting

Self-diagnosis display

133


The number of images that can be saved/ shooting time The number of images that can be saved and the shooting time are different, depending on the capacity of the recording medium, the image size, and the image quality. Refer to the following charts when you choose a recording medium.

“Memory Stick” RAW 8M 3:2 5M 3M 1M VGA

(Units: images) 16MB 0 (0) — 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0)

32MB 1 (1) — 1 (1) 1 (1) 1 (1) 1 (1)

64MB 3 (3) — 3 (3) 3 (3) 3 (3) 3 (3)

128MB 6 (6) — 6 (6) 6 (7) 7 (7) 7 (7)

MSX-256 MSX-512 10 (11) 22 (24) — — 11 (12) 23 (25) 12 (12) 25 (26) 12 (13) 26 (26) 13 (13) 27 (27)

16MB 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0)

32MB 1 (1) 1 (1) 1 (1) 1 (1) 1 (1) 1 (1)

64MB 2 (2) 2 (2) 2 (2) 2 (2) 2 (2) 2 (2)

128MB 4 (4) 5 (5) 4 (5) 5 (5) 5 (5) 5 (5)

MSX-256 MSX-512 8 (8) 17 (18) 9 (9) 18 (20) 8 (9) 17 (18) 9 (9) 18 (19) 9 (9) 19 (19) 9 (9) 19 (19)

16MB 3 (7) 3 (7) 6 (11) 9 (17) 22 (38) 69 (121)

32MB 8 (14) 8 (14) 12 (22) 19 (34) 45 (78) 140 (245)

64MB 16 (29) 16 (29) 25 (45) 39 (69) 91 (157) 281 (492)

TIFF • The number of images is listed in Fine (Standard) order. • The values for the number of images that can be saved and the shooting time may vary, depending on the shooting conditions. • For normal shooting times and numbers of images that can be saved, see pages 25, 26. • When the remaining number of images recordable is more than 9999, “ >9999 ” is indicated on the screen. And when it is more than 999, “ 999 ” is indicated on the display window.

8M 3:2 5M 3M 1M VGA

(Units: images)

Voice* 8M 3:2 5M 3M 1M VGA

MSX-1G 34 (37) 38 (41) 36 (38) 38 (39) 39 (39) 40 (40)

(Units: images)

* For five-second audio recording

134

MSX-1G 45 (49) — 48 (51) 51 (53) 53 (54) 55 (55)

128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G 32 (58) 58 (106) 119 (216) 242 (442) 32 (58) 58 (106) 119 (216) 242 (442) 50 (91) 90 (166) 183 (337) 375 (689) 79 (138) 142 (246) 290 (500) 592 (1022) 183 (316) 324 (549) 660 (1117) 1347 (2280) 564 (987) 1020 (1785) 2074 (3630) 4234 (7410)

E-mail 8M 3:2 5M 3M 1M VGA

(Units: images) 16MB 4 (7) 4 (7) 6 (11) 9 (17) 23 (42) 81 (162)

32MB 8 (14) 8 (14) 12 (23) 20 (35) 47 (85) 163 (327)

64MB 128MB 16 (29) 32 (59) 16 (29) 32 (59) 25 (46) 50 (94) 40 (71) 80 (143) 96 (171) 192 (343) 328 (657) 658 (1317)

MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G 59 (108) 120 (220) 244 (449) 59 (108) 120 (220) 244 (449) 91 (170) 186 (345) 380 (705) 145 (255) 296 (518) 604 (1058) 340 (595) 691 (1210) 1411 (2470) 1190 (2381) 2420 (4841) 4940 (9881)

Multi Burst 1M

(Units: images)

16MB 24 (46)

32MB 50 (93)

64MB 101(187)

128MB 202 (376)

16MB —

32MB —

64MB —

128MB —

MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G 357 (649) 726 (1320) 1482 (2694)

Movie 640 (Fine) 640 (Standard) 160

MSX-256 MSX-512 0:02:57 0:06:02

MSX-1G 0:12:20

0:00:42

0:01:27

0:02:56

0:05:54

0:10:42

0:21:47

0:44:27

0:11:12

0:22:42

0:45:39

1:31:33

2:51:21

5:47:05

11:44:22

The numbers indicate the recording time. For example: “1:31:33” indicates “1 hour, 31 minutes, 33 seconds.”


135

Microdrive RAW 8M 3:2 5M 3M 1M VGA

TIFF 8M 3:2 5M 3M 1M VGA

Voice* 8M 3:2 5M 3M 1M VGA

E-mail (Units: images) 1G (DSCM-11000) 50 (55) — 54 (57) 56 (58) 59 (60) 61 (61)

(Units: images) 1G (DSCM-11000) 38 (41) 42 (45) 40 (42) 42 (43) 43 (44) 44 (44)


* For five-second audio recording

136

8M 3:2 5M 3M 1M VGA

Multi Burst 1M


(Units: images) 1G (DSCM-11000) 1643 (2988)

Movie 640 (Fine) 640 (Standard) 160

1G (DSCM-11000) 0:13:41 0:49:13 12:42:06

The numbers indicate the recording time. For example: “12:42:06” indicates “12 hours, 42 minutes, 6 seconds.”

Menu items Menu items that can be changed differ depending on the position of the mode dial. The screen shows only the items you can operate based on the current position of the mode dial. Default settings are indicated with x.

When the mode dial is set to Item (Image Size) Mode (REC Mode)

Setting

Description

x 8M/3:2/5M/3M/1M/VGA

Selects the image size when shooting still images (page 24).

RAW TIFF Voice E-Mail

– – – –

Records RAW data file in addition to the JPEG file (page 79). Records uncompressed (TIFF) file in addition to the JPEG file (page 80). Records an audio file (with a still image) in addition to the JPEG file (page 81). Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG file in addition to the selected image size (page 81). – Records an image using the normal recording mode.

xNormal

Item SCN (Scene) ISO (ISO)

Setting

/

/

Description

/x

800 / 400 / 200 / 100 / 64 / xAuto

Sets the Scene Selection mode (page 37). (This setting can be made only in SCN mode.) Selects the ISO sensitivity. When shooting under dark conditions or shooting a fastmoving subject, use a high-number setting. When recording high-quality images, use a low-number setting (page 64). (This setting cannot be made in SCN mode.)

(Image Size)

x 8M/3:2/5M/3M/1M/VGA

Selects the image size when shooting still images (page 24).

(P.Quality)

xFine / Standard

Records images with fine image quality mode. / Records images in the standard image quality mode (page 49).


When the mode dial is set to P, S, A, M or SCN

137

Item

Setting

Description

Mode (REC Mode)

RAW TIFF Voice E-Mail

– – – –

xNormal BRK (Bracket Step)

Records RAW data file in addition to the JPEG file (page 79). Records uncompressed (TIFF) file in addition to the JPEG file (page 80). Records an audio file (with a still image) in addition to the JPEG file (page 81). Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG file in addition to the selected image size (page 81). – Records an image using the normal recording mode.

±1.0EV/x±0.7EV/±0.3EV

Sets the exposure compensation value when recording three images with each exposure value shifted (page 63). (This setting can be made only in Exposure Bracket mode using the /BRK button.)

(Interval)

1/7.5 / 1/15 / x1/30

Selects the Multi Burst between-frame shutter interval (page 76). (This setting can be made only in Multi Burst mode using the /BRK button.)

(Flash Level)

High / xNormal / Low

Selects the amount of flash light (page 70).

PFX (P.Effect)

Solarize / Sepia /Neg.Art / xOff

Sets the special effects for the image (page 79).

COLOR (Color)

Real/ xStandard

Selects the color reproduction mode (page 74).

(Saturation)

+ / xNormal / –

Adjusts the saturation of the image. The indicator appears (except when the setting is Normal.) (This setting cannot be made in SCN mode.)

(Contrast)

+ / xNormal / –

Adjusts the contrast of the image. The indicator appears (except when the setting is Normal.) (This setting cannot be made in SCN mode.)

+ / xNormal / –

Adjusts the sharpness of the image. The indicator appears (except when the setting is Normal.) (This setting cannot be made in SCN mode.)

(Sharpness)

When the mode dial is set to Item (Image Size) PFX (P.Effect)

138

Setting

Description

640 (Fine)/ x 640 (Standard)/160

Selects the image size when shooting movies (page 100).

Solarize / Sepia /Neg.Art / xOff

Sets the special effects for the image (page 79).

When the mode dial is set to Item (Folder)

Setting

Description

OK/Cancel

Selects the folder that contains the images you want to play back (page 83).

- (Protect)

—

Protects/unprotects images against accidental erasure (page 89).

DPOF (DPOF)

—

Selects still images you want to attach/cancel the print (DPOF) mark (page 91).

(Print)

—

Prints images using a PictBridge-compliant printer (page 93).

(Slide)

Interval

– Sets the slide show interval (page 85). (For single-image screen only.) x3 sec/ 5 sec/ 10 sec/ 30 sec/ 1 min – Selects images from either folder or recording media. xFolder/All – Repeats the slide show. xOn/Off – Starts the slide show. – Cancels the settings and execution of the slide show.

Image Repeat Start Cancel (Resize) (Rotate) (Divide)

8M / 5M / 3M / 1M / VGA / Cancel Changes the recorded image size (page 90). (For single-image screen only.) (counter-clockwise) / (clockwise) / OK / Cancel OK / Cancel

Rotates the still image (page 86). (For single-image screen only.) Divides a movie (page 104). (For single-image screen only.)


139

SET UP items Set the mode dial to SET UP. The SET UP screen appears. Default settings are indicated with x.

1

Item

Setting

Description

AF Mode

Single / xMonitor / Cont

Selects the focus operation mode (page 66).

Digital Zoom

Smart / xPrecision

Selects the digital zoom mode (page 30).

Date/Time

Day&Time / Date / xOff

Selects whether to insert the date and time into the image (page 36). When shooting movies or images recorded in Multi Burst mode, the date and time cannot be inserted in the image. Also, the date and time will not be displayed when shooting. The date and time will be displayed when the image is played back.

Red Eye Reduction

On / xOff

Reduces the red-eye phenomenon when using a flash (page 69).

Hologram AF

xAuto / Off

Selects whether to emit hologram AF light. Used when it is difficult to focus on the subject in dark conditions (page 35).

Auto Review

On / xOff

When shooting still images, selects whether to display the image just after you shoot a still image. Setting this to [On] displays the recorded images for about two seconds. During this time, you cannot shoot the next image.

Item

Setting

Description

Expanded Focus

xOn / Off

When focusing manually, the image is enlarged to 2× (page 67).

Hot Shoe

On / xOff

Selects whether to use a commercially available external flash (page 72).

Pop-up Flash

xAuto / Manual

Selects whether to pop up the flash automatically (page 69).

2

140

(Camera 1)

(Camera 2)

(Memory Stick Tool) (When the

/CF switch is set to

)

Item

Setting

Description

Format

OK / Cancel

Formats the “Memory Stick.” Note that formatting erases all data on a “Memory Stick,” including even protected images (page 45).

Create REC. Folder

OK / Cancel

Creates a folder for recording images (page 50).

Change REC. Folder

OK / Cancel

Changes a folder for recording images (page 51).

(CF Card Tool) (When the

/CF switch is set to CF)

Setting

Description

Format

OK / Cancel

Formats the Microdrive/CF card. Note that formatting erases all data on a Microdrive/CF card, including even protected images (page 45). You cannot format it using the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor that is compliant with the CompactFlash slot (page 145).

Create REC. Folder

OK / Cancel

Creates a folder for recording images (page 50).

Change REC. Folder

OK / Cancel

Changes a folder for recording images (page 51).

Item

Setting

Description

LCD Brightness

Bright/ xNormal/ Dark

Selects the LCD brightness. This has no effect on the recorded images.

LCD Backlight

Bright/ xNormal

Selects the brightness of the LCD backlight. Selecting [Bright] makes the screen bright and easy to see when using the camera outdoors or in other bright locations, but also uses up the battery charge faster. Displayed only when you are using the camera with the battery pack.

EVF Backlight

Bright/ xNormal

Selects the brightness of the finder backlight. Selecting [Bright] makes the screen bright and easy to see when using the camera outdoors or in other bright locations, but also uses up the battery charge faster.

Shutter

– Turns on the shutter sound when you press the shutter button. – Turns on the beep/shutter sound when you press the center of the multi-selector/the shutter button. – Turns off the beep/shutter sound.

(Setup 1)

Beep

x On

Off


Item

141

Item Language

Setting

Description

—

Displays the menu items, warnings and messages in selected language.

(Setup 2) Item

Setting

Description

File Number

x Series

– Assigns numbers to files in sequence even if the recording medium is changed or the recording folder is changed. – Resets the file numbering and starts from 0001 each time the folder is changed. (When the recording folder contains a file, a number one higher than the largest number is assigned.)

Reset

142

USB Connect

PictBridge/PTP/ xNormal

Switches the USB mode when connecting with a computer or a PictBridge-compliant printer using the USB cable.

Video Out

NTSC PAL

– Sets the video output signal to NTSC mode (e.g., Japan, USA). – Sets the video output signal to PAL mode (e.g., Europe).

Clock Set

OK / Cancel

Sets the date and time (pages 19, 48).

Precautions Do not leave the camera in the following places • In extremely hot place, such as in a car parked in the sun. The camera body may become deformed or this may cause a malfunction. • Under direct sunlight or near a heater. The camera body may become deformed or this may cause a malfunction. • On rocking vibration • Near strong magnetic place • On sandy or in dusty place Do not let sand get into the camera. Sand or dust may cause the camera to malfunction and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.

Cleaning the LCD screen Clean the screen surface with an LCD cleaning kit (not supplied) to remove fingerprints, dust, etc. Cleaning the lens Wipe the lens with a soft cloth to remove fingerprints, dust, etc.

Cleaning the camera surface Clean the camera surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then wipe the surface with a dry cloth. Do not pour volatile insecticide on the camera, with rubber or vinyl for a long time, or use the following as this may damage the finish or the casing. • Thinner • Benzine • Alcohol • Diposable cloth

Note on operating temperature The camera is designed for use within a temperature range of 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). (When using a Microdrive: 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)) Shooting in extremely cold or hot locations that exceed this range is not recommended.

On moisture condensation If the camera is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, or is placed in a very damp room, moisture may condense inside or outside the camera. This moisture condensation may cause a malfunction of the camera. Moisture condensation occurs easily when: • The camera is brought from a cold location such as a ski slope into a warmly heated room. • The camera is taken from an airconditioned room or car interior to the hot outdoors, etc. To prevent moisture condensation When bringing the camera from a cold place to a warm place, seal the camera in a plastic bag and leave it in the new location for about an hour. Remove the plastic bag when the camera has adapted to the new temperature. If moisture condensation occurs Turn off the camera and wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate. Note that if you attempt to shoot with moisture remaining inside the lens, you will be unable to record clear images.


Cleaning

Cleaning the DC plug Clean the DC plug of the AC Adaptor with a dry cotton bud. Do not use the dirty plug. Use of the dirty plug may not properly charge the battery pack.

143

The internal rechargeable button battery This camera has an internal rechargeable button battery for maintaining the date and time and other settings regardless of whether the power is on or off. This rechargeable button battery is continually charged as long as you are using the camera. However, if you use the camera for only short periods it discharges gradually, and if you do not use the camera at all for about one month it becomes completely discharged. In this case, be sure to charge this rechargeable button battery before using the camera. Note that even if this rechargeable button battery is not charged, you can still use the camera as long as you do not record the date and time. How to charge Connect the camera to a wall outlet (wall socket) using the AC Adaptor, or install the charged battery pack, and leave the camera for 24 hours or more with the power turned off. • The rechargeable button battery is located inside the battery/“Memory Stick” cover. Never remove the rechargeable button battery.

144

4) [640

The “Memory Stick” “Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable and versatile IC recording medium with a data capacity that exceeds the capacity of a floppy disk. The “Memory Stick” that can be used with this camera is as follows. However, we have no guarantee of proper operation. “Memory Stick” Memory Stick Memory Stick Duo 1) Memory Stick Duo (MagicGate/ higher speed data transmission compatible) 1) MagicGate Memory Stick MagicGate Memory Stick Duo 1) Memory Stick PRO Memory Stick PRO Duo 1) 1) When

Recording/ playback Yes Yes

(Fine)] size movies can be recorded or played back only using a “Memory Stick PRO” or Microdrive. • The “Memory Stick” formatted with a computer is not guaranteed to operate with this camera. • The data read/write time differs depending on the combination of the “Memory Stick” and a device.

Notes on use of the “Memory Stick” • You cannot record, edit, or delete images when the write-protect switch is set to LOCK. The position or the shape of the write-protect switch may differ depending on the “Memory Stick” you use. Terminal

Yes 2)3) Yes 2) Yes 2) Yes2)3) Yes 2)3)

using it with this camera, be sure to insert into the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor. 2) “MagicGate Memory Stick” is equipped with the MagicGate copyright protection technology. MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses encryption technology. However, because your camera does not the MagicGate standards, data recorded with your camera is not subject to MagicGate copyright protection. 3) s high-speed data transmission using the parallel interface.

Write-protect switch Labeling position • Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while reading or writing data. • Data may be damaged in the following cases: – Removing the “Memory Stick” or turning off the camera while reading or writing data. – Using the camera in a location subject to the effects of static electricity or noise. • We recommend you back up any important data. • Do not attach any other material than the supplied label on the labeling position.

• When you attach the supplied label, be sure to attach it to the labeling position. Be careful that the label does not stick out. • When you carry or store the “Memory Stick,” put it in the case supplied with it. • Do not touch the terminals of a “Memory Stick” with your hand or a metal object. • Do not strike, bend or drop a “Memory Stick.” • Do not disassemble or modify a “Memory Stick.” • Do not expose the “Memory Stick” to water. • Avoid using or storing the “Memory Stick” in the following places: – In a car parked in the sun, or at a high temperature. – Under direct sunlight. – In a humid place or near corrosive material.

Notes on use of the “Memory Stick Duo”

Note on use of the “Memory Stick PRO” “Memory Stick PRO” with a capacity of up to 1 GB is verified for this camera.

The Microdrive A Microdrive is a compact and lightweight hard disk drive that complies with Compact Flash TypeII. Camera operations are confirmed using a Microdrive (Hitachi Global Storage Technologies, Inc. DSCM11000 (1 GB)). Notes on use of the Microdrive • Be sure to format the Microdrive using this camera when you use it for the first time. • The Microdrive is a compact hard disk drive. Since the Microdrive is a rotating disk, the Microdrive is not strong enough to resist vibration and shock compared to a “Memory Stick,” which uses flash memory. Be sure not to transmit vibration or shock to the Microdrive during playback or shooting. • Data may be damaged in the following cases: – Removing the Microdrive while reading or writing data. – If you store the Microdrive near corrosive material. • Note that the use of the Microdrive under 5°C (41°F) may bring performance degradation. Operating temperature range when using the Microdrive: 5° to 40°C (41°F to 104°F) • Note that the camera cannot be used under low atmospheric pressure (above 3 000 meters above sea-level). • If the data transmission rate becomes slow in an extremely high or low temperature and writing movie data cannot be done, “Busy” is indicated on the screen and writing data stops (page 131).


• Be sure to insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor when using the “Memory Stick Duo” with the camera. If you insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into the camera without attaching the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor, you may not be able to remove the “Memory Stick Duo.” • that you are inserting the “Memory Stick Duo” in the proper direction when inserting it into the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor. • that you are inserting the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor in the proper direction when inserting it into the camera. Inserting it in the wrong direction may cause a malfunction. • Do not insert a “Memory Stick Duo” that is not inserted into a Memory Stick Duo Adaptor into a “Memory Stick”-compatible unit. This may cause a malfunction of the unit.

• When formatting the “Memory Stick Duo,” insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor and use the “Memory Stick” slot. • When the “Memory Stick Duo” is equipped with the write protect switch, release its lock. • You can use the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor that is compliant with the CompactFlash slot, however, you cannot format it using this camera and cannot record [640 (Fine)] movies.

145

• The Microdrive may be hot just after it has been used. Be careful when you handle it. • Do not write on the label. • Do not remove the label or attach a new label over the label. • When you carry or store the Microdrive, put it in the case supplied with it. • Do not expose the Microdrive to water. • Do not press on the label strongly. • Hold the sides of the Microdrive in your hand and do not squeeze the Microdrive.

On “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack

What is the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack? The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a lithium-ion battery pack that has functions for communicating information related to operating conditions of your camera. The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack calculates the power consumption according to the operating conditions of your camera, and displays the remaining battery time in minutes.

Effective use of the battery pack • Battery performance decreases in lowtemperature surroundings. So, the time that the battery pack can be used is shorter in cold places. We recommend the following to ensure longer battery pack use: – Put the battery pack in a pocket close to your body to warm it up, and insert it in your camera immediately before you start shooting. • Frequently operating the zoom or flash wears out the battery charge faster. • We recommend having spare battery packs handy for two or three times the expected shooting time, and making trial shots before taking the actual shots. • Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.

Charging the battery pack We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F). You may not be able to efficiently charge the battery pack outside of this temperature range.

146

Remaining battery time indicator The power may go off although the battery remaining indicator shows there is enough power to operate. Use the battery pack up and charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on the battery remaining indicator is correct. Note, however, that the correct battery indication sometimes will not be restored if the camera is used in high temperatures for a long time or left in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is frequently used.

How to store the battery pack • If the battery pack is not to be used for a long time, do the following procedure once per year to maintain proper function. 1 Fully charge the battery. 2 Discharge on your camera. 3 Remove the battery from your camera and store it in a dry, cool place. • To use the battery pack up on your camera, leave the camera to on in slide show playback mode (page 85) until the power goes off.

Battery life

x Camera [System] Image device 11 mm (2/3 type) color CCD 4-color filter (RGBE) Total pixels number of camera Approx. 8 314 000 pixels Effective pixels number of camera Approx. 8 068 000 pixels Lens Carl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar T* 7.1× zoom lens f=7.1 to 51 mm (35 mm camera conversion: 28 to 200 mm) F2.0-2.8 Filter diameter: 58 mm (2 3/8 inches) Exposure control Automatic, Shutter speed priority, Aperture priority, Manual exposure, Scene selection (4 modes) White balance Automatic, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Incandescent, Flash, One-push File format (DCF compliant) Still images: Exif Ver. 2.2, JPEG compliant, RAW, TIFF, DPOF compatible Audio with still image: MPEG1 compliant (Monaural) Movies: MPEG1 compliant (Monaural) Recording medium “Memory Stick”, Microdrive, CompactFlash card (TypeI/TypeII)

Viewfinder

Recommended distance (when ISO sensitivity is set to Auto) 0.5 to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to 14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W) 0.6 to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T) Electric viewfinder (color)

[Output connectors] A/V OUT (MONO) jack (Monaural) Minijack Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced, sync negative Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load) Output impedance 2.2 kΩ Accessory jack Mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm) USB jack mini-B USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0 HighSpeed compliant)

[LCD screen] LCD used 4.6 cm (1.8 type) TFT drive Total number of dots 134 400 (560×240) dots



• The battery life is limited. Battery capacity decreases little by little as you use it more and more, and as time es. When the battery operating time is shortened considerably, a probable cause is that the battery pack has reached the end of its life. Buy a new battery pack. • The battery life varies according to how it is stored and the operating conditions and environment for each battery pack.

Flash

Specifications

147

[Power, general]


Accessories

Used battery pack NP-FM50 Power requirements 7.2 V Power consumption (during shooting with LCD screen on) 2.2 W Operating temperature range 0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F) (When using the Microdrive: +5° to +40°C (41° to +104°F)) Storage temperature range −20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F) Dimensions (lens: W-end) 134.4 × 91.1 × 157.2 mm (5 3/8 × 3 5/8 × 6 1/4 inches) (W/H/D, protruding portions not included) Mass Approx. 955 g (33.7 oz) (battery pack NP-FM50, “Memory Stick,” shoulder strap, lens cap, and so on included) Microphone Electret condenser microphone Speaker Dynamic speaker


• • • • • • • • • • • •

Exif Print Compatible PRINT Image Matching II Compatible PictBridge Compatible

148




* The selected mode mark or setting value is not displayed on the display window as it is in the LCD screen/finder. Note that the mark on the display window is not changed even when you change the mode or setting value.

Display window 1

7

2

8

3

9

The page numbers in parentheses indicate the location of additional important information.

4 q; 5 6 F EV adjustment indicator* (59) G Aperture value indicator (56)/ Available movie recording time indicator (second) (100) H Burst/Multi Burst/Exposure bracket indicator* (63, 75, 76) I Metering mode indicator (58) J Remaining number of recordable images indicator (25, 26)


A Self-diagnosis display (133)/ Shutter speed indicator (55)/ Available movie recording time indicator (minute) (100)/ Available shooting time indicator (15)/ PLAY indicator B Flash mode (68) C Self-timer indicator (34) D White balance indicator* (73) E Battery remaining indicator (15)

149

The LCD/finder screen For shooting still images

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 q; qa qs qd qf

150

80min

SOLARIZE

MAF

VGA FINE 101 1/30" 400 DATE C:32:00 REAL ISO400 0.3EV

250 F2.0 +2.0EV

qg qh qj qk ql w; wa ws wd wf wg wh wj wk

A Burst/Multi Burst indicator (75, 76) B Image size indicator (24)/ Multi Burst between-frame interval indicator (76) C Recording mode indicator (79–81) D AE/AF lock indicator (27) E Battery remaining indicator (15) F White balance indicator (73)/ Mode dial indicator/ Scene Selection indicator (37)/ Flash mode (34)/Red-eye reduction (69) G Sharpness indicator (138)/ Saturation indicator (138)/ Contrast indicator (138)/ Hologram AF indicator (35, 140) H Metering mode indicator (58)/ Picture effect indicator (79) I NightShot/NightFraming indicator (77) J Low battery warning (131) K Macro (33) L AF mode (66)/ AF range finder frame indicator (65)/ Focus distance information indicator (67)

• Pressing the MENU button switches the menu/ guide menu on/off.


M NR slow shutter indicator (55)/ Shutter speed indicator (55) N Aperture value indicator (56) O Image quality indicator (49) P Recording folder indicator (50) Q Remaining number of recordable images indicator (25, 26) R Remaining recording medium capacity indicator S Self-diagnosis display (133)/ Date/time indicator (36)/ Color reproduction indicator (74)/ ISO sensitivity (64) T Bracket step indicator (63) U Self-timer indicator (34) V Vibration warning indicator (131) W Spot metering cross hair (58) X AF range finder frame (65) Y Histogram indicator (60) wh AE LOCK indicator (62) wj EV adjustment indicator (59) wk Menu/guide menu (47)


151

For shooting movies

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K

152

80min STBY

101

00:00:00 [00:28:25] C:32:00

SOLARIZE

Image size indicator (100) Recording mode indicator (100) Battery remaining indicator (15) White balance indicator (73) Metering mode indicator (58)/ Picture effect indicator (79) NightShot indicator (77) Low battery warning (131) Macro (33) AF range finder frame indicator (65) Recording time [Maximum recordable time] indicator (100) Recording folder indicator (50)

+2.0EV

q; qa qs qd qf qg qh qj qk ql

L Remaining recording medium capacity indicator M Self-diagnosis display (133) N Self-timer indicator (34) O AF range finder frame (65) P Spot metering cross hair (58) Q AE LOCK indicator (62) R EV adjustment indicator (59) S Menu/guide menu (47)

For still image playback

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

80min x1.3

VGA 101

12/12 C:32:00 +2.0EV ISO400 AWB 2000 F5.6

8 BACK/NEXT

VOLUME

J Image number K Number of images recorded in the playback folder L Remaining recording medium capacity indicator M Self-diagnosis display (133) N EV adjustment indicator (59)/ ISO sensitivity (64) O Metering mode indicator (58)/ Flash indicator/ White balance indicator (73) P Shutter speed indicator (55)/ Aperture value indicator (56) Q Histogram indicator (60) R Recording date/time of the image (19)/Menu/guide menu (47)


A PictBridge connecting indicator (93) B Change folder indicator (83) C Image size indicator (24) D Recording mode indicator (79–81) E Volume indicator (81)/ Protect mark indicator (89)/ Print (DPOF) mark indicator (91) F Zoom indicator (30)/ Jog playback indicator (87) G Not disconnect USB cable indicator (93) H Folder-file number (114) I Playback folder indicator (83)

9 q; qa qs qd qf qg qh qj qk


153

For movie playback

1 2 3 80min

4

101 101

VOL.

8/8 00:00:12

5 6 7 8 9 q; qa

DPOF

A B C D E F

G H I J K L

154

Change folder indicator (83) Image size indicator (101) Recording mode indicator (101) Playback indicator (101)/ Volume indicator (101) Playback folder indicator (83) Image number/Number of images recorded in the playback folder Recording folder indicator (50) Remaining recording medium capacity indicator Counter (101) Playback screen (101) Playback bar (101) Menu/Guide menu (47)

qs The page numbers in parentheses indicate the location of additional important information.

Quick reference chart This section describes the restrictions in the setup of the following functions, depending on the mode dial position or the setup of some functions : shutter speed, aperture, flash, etc. Quick chart of exposure, white balance, and auto focus functions (based on the mode dial position) Aperture

ISO

White balance

Metering mode

AF range finder frame

Auto (1/8 to 1/3200)

Auto (F2 to F8)

Auto (64 to 200)

Auto

Multi-pattern metering

Multipoint

P

Auto (1 to 1/3200)

Auto (F2 to F8)

Auto (64 to 200)/Setup is available from 64 to 800

Setup is available

Setup is available

Setup is available

S

Setup is available from 30 to 1/2000 F2 to F8

Auto (64 fixed)/Setup is available from 64 to 800

Setup is available

Setup is available

Setup is available

A

8 to 1/2000 (aperture value F2 to F7.1)

Setup is available from F2 Auto (64 fixed)/Setup is to F8 available from 64 to 800

Setup is available

Setup is available

Setup is available

Setup is available from F2 Auto (64 fixed)/Setup is to F8 available from 64 to 800

Setup is available

Setup is available

Setup is available

8 to 1/3200 (aperture value F8) M

30 to 1/2000 (aperture value F2 to F7.1) 30 to 1/3200 (aperture value F8)

• Note that shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are not as valid for the above table when the flash strobes. • When using the digital zoom or horogram AF, the AF is automatically set to focus on the centrally-located subject.


Shutter speed (second)

155

Quick chart of flash mode Mode dial

Normal/E-Mail/Voice/RAW/TIFF

P

Auto/ /

/

Auto/ /

/

S

/

A

/

M

/

SCN

Exposure Bracket

Multi Burst

/

NightShot

NightFraming

—

—

—

—

—

—

Twilight

—

—

—

—

—

Twilight portrait

—

—

—

—

—

Landscape Portrait

/ Auto/ /

/

• When shooting movies, the flash mode is set to (No flash). • When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual], the flash mode is set to

156

Burst

(Forced flash),

(Slow synchro), or

(No flash).

—

—

—

—

The relation between the shutter speed and aperture To shoot clear images, selecting the proper exposure is very important, adding to the chance of achieving the proper focus. The exposure is an amount of light that is determined by the shutter speed and aperture value. The shutter speed is adjusted by the time, longer or shorter. The aperture is adjusted by the scale of the lens hole, larger or smaller. When the shutter speed is faster by one step, the aperture is opened by one step to get the same exposure.

The movement of the program diagram The program diagram shows the movement of the combination of the shutter speed and aperture value. The program shift function (page 54) quickly shifts the combination of exposure that the camera has decided upon. Program diagram (example) The movement of the program shift (EV: 10, ISO sensitivity: 100) (example) • When the EV value remains the same, the brightness of the recorded image is the same. Brighter subject

3

4

5

6

Darker subject

7

8

9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

EV

2

F8 F5.6 F4

Aperture

F2 1/4

1 1/2

1/15 1/60 1/250 1/1000 1/8 1/30 1/125 1/500 1/2000 Shutter speed


F2.8

157

Index

Index A A/V connecting cable ...................................... 41 AC Adaptor ................................................ 14, 17 Access lamp ..................................................... 22 Advanced accessory shoe ................................ 71 AE LOCK ........................................................ 62 AE/AF lock ................................................ 27, 29 AF .................................................................... 27 AF Mode .......................................................... 66 AF range finder ................................................ 65 Aperture priority .............................................. 56 Auto adjustment mode ..................................... 27 Auto Focus ................................................. 29, 65 Auto Power Off function ................................. 18 Auto Review .................................................. 140

CompactFlash .................................................. 21 Continuous AF ................................................. 67 Contrast .......................................................... 138 Copying images to your computer ......... 110, 111 Cutting movies ............................................... 104

D DC plug ...................................................... 14, 17 Deleting movies ............................................. 102 Deleting still images ........................................ 43 Digital zoom .................................................... 31 Display window ............................................. 149 Divide ............................................................ 104 DPOF ............................................................... 91

E E-Mail .............................................................. 81 EV adjustment ................................................. 59 Exposure bracket ............................................. 63

B Battery remaining indicator ............................. 15 Beep/shutter sound ........................................ 141 Burst ................................................................ 75

C CD-ROM ....................................................... 106 Center AF ........................................................ 65 Charging the battery pack ................................ 14 Charging time .................................................. 15 Cleaning ......................................................... 143 Clock Set ........................................... 19, 48, 142 Color ................................................................ 74 Command dial ................................................. 48

158

H Histogram ........................................................ 60 Hologram AF ........................................... 35, 140 Hot Shoe ........................................................ 140

I Image quality ................................................... 49 Image size .................................................. 24, 25 Image Transfer ............................................... 107 ImageMixer .................................................... 108 Index screen ..................................................... 39 Indicators on the screen during shooting ......... 30 InfoLITHIUM battery pack ........................... 146 Inserting a Memory Stick ................................ 22 Inserting a Microdrive ..................................... 23 Inserting the date and time ............................... 36 Installation ..................................... 106, 107, 108 ISO ................................................................... 64

J F File names ...................................................... 114 File storage destinations ................................ 114 Finder ............................................................... 29 Finder adjustment ............................................ 29 Flash ........................................................... 34, 68 Flash Level ....................................................... 70 Flexible spot AF .............................................. 66 Folder ......................................................... 50, 83 Format .............................................................. 45 Framing burst ................................................... 75

JPG ................................................................. 115

L LCD screen brightness ................................... 141 LCD screen display ........................................ 150 Lens hood ......................................................... 13

M Macro ............................................................... 33 Manual exposure .............................................. 57 Manual focus ................................................... 67 Memory Stick ................................................ 144 Menu ........................................................ 47, 137

Metering mode .................................................58 Microdrive ......................................................145 Mode dial ..........................................................27 Moisture condensation ...................................143 Monitoring AF ..................................................66 MPG ...............................................................115 Multi Burst .................................................76, 87 Multi-pattern metering .....................................58 Multipoint AF ...................................................65 Multi-selector ...................................................18

N NightFraming ...................................................78 NightShot .........................................................77 NR slow shutter ................................................55 NTSC ..............................................................142 Number of images that can be saved or shooting time .....................................16, 25, 26, 134

P

Quick reference chart .................................... 155 Quick Review .................................................. 29

USB driver ..................................................... 106 Using your camera abroad ............................... 17

V R RAW ................................................................ 79 Red Eye Reduction .......................................... 69 RESET button ................................................ 119 Resize .............................................................. 90 Rotate ............................................................... 86

VGA ................................................................. 25 Viewing images on TV .................................... 41 Viewing movies on the LCD screen .............. 101 Viewing the images on the LCD screen .......... 39 Voice ................................................................ 81

W S Saturation ....................................................... 138 Scene Selection ................................................ 37 Self-diagnosis display .................................... 133 Self-timer ......................................................... 34 SET UP .................................................... 48, 140 Sharpness ....................................................... 138 Shooting movies ............................................ 100 Shooting still images ....................................... 27 Shutter speed priority ...................................... 55 Single AF ......................................................... 66 Single screen .................................................... 39 Slide show ....................................................... 85 Smart zoom ...................................................... 31 Speed burst ...................................................... 75

Warnings and messages ................................. 130 White balance .................................................. 73

Z Zoom ................................................................ 30

T TIFF ................................................................. 80 Trimming ......................................................... 85

Index

PAL .................................................................142 PictBridge .........................................................93 Picture effect .....................................................79 Playback zoom .................................................84 Pop-up Flash .....................................................69 Power on/off .....................................................18 Precautions .....................................................143 Precision digital zoom ......................................31 Print (DPOF) mark ...........................................91 Program auto shooting ...............................28, 54 Program shift ....................................................54 Protect ...............................................................89

Q

U USB ....................................................... 109, 117

159

3 0 8 4 9 9 6

Printed on 100% recycled paper using VOC (Volatile Organic Compound)-free vegetable oil based ink.

1 1 Sony Corporation Printed in Japan

Additional information on this product and answers to frequent asked questions can be found at our Customer Website.

DSC-F828 SERVICE MANUAL

LEVEL

2

US Model Canadian Model AEP Model UK Model E Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model Korea Model Tourist Model Chinese Model Japanese Model

Ver 1.1 2004. 04 Revision History How to use Acrobat Reader

Link SPECIFICATIONS

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

SERVICE NOTE

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

REPAIR PARTS LIST

DISASSEMBLY

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

• For ADJUSTMENTS (SECTION 6), refer to SERVICE MANUAL, ADJ (987627951.pdf). • For INSTRUCTION MANUAL, refer to SERVICE MANUAL, LEVEL 1 (987627941.pdf). • Reference No. search on printed wiring boards is available. • When the laser unit is repaired, Make sure to follow the items of “NOTE ON HANDLING THE LASER DIODE”. On the SY-096 board This service manual provides the information that is premised the circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the SY-096 board. Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board, mounted parts location and electrical parts list of the SY-096 board are not shown. The following pages are not shown. Schematic diagram ............................. Pages 4-25 to 4-44 Mounted parts location ............................. Pages 4-65 to 4-66 Printed wiring board ............................ Pages 4-59 to 4-62 Electrical parts list ................................... Pages 5-14 to 5-18

DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

DSC-F828

SPECIFICATIONS x Camera [System] Image device 11 mm (2/3 type) color CCD 4-color filter (RGBE) Total pixels number of camera Approx. 8 314 000 pixels Effective pixels number of camera Approx. 8 068 000 pixels Lens Carl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar T* 7.1× zoom lens f=7.1 to 51 mm (35 mm camera conversion: 28 to 200 mm) F2.0-2.8 Filter diameter: 58 mm (2 3/8 inches) Exposure control Automatic, Shutter speed priority, Aperture priority, Manual exposure, Scene selection (4 modes) White balance Automatic, Daylight, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Incandescent, Flash, One-push File format (DCF compliant) Still images: Exif Ver. 2.2, JPEG compliant, RAW, TIFF, DPOF compatible Audio with still image: MPEG1 compliant (Monaural) Movies: MPEG1 compliant (Monaural) Recording medium “Memory Stick”, Microdrive, CompactFlash card (TypeI/TypeII) Flash Recommended distance (when ISO sensitivity is set to Auto) 0.5 to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to 14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W) 0.6 to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T) Viewfinder Electric viewfinder (color)

[Output connectors]

[LCD screen]


LCD used 4.6 cm (1.8 type) TFT drive Total number of dots 134 400 (560×240) dots



[Power, general] Used battery pack NP-FM50 Power requirements 7.2 V Power consumption (during shooting with LCD screen on) 2.2 W Operating temperature range 0° to + 40°C (32° to +104°F) (When using the Microdrive: +5° to +40°C (41° to +104°F)) Storage temperature range −20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F) Dimensions (lens: W-end) 134.4 × 91.1 × 157.2 mm (5 3/8 3 × 5/8 × 6 1/4 inches) (W/H/D, protruding portions not included) Mass Approx. 955 g (33.7 oz) (battery pack NP-FM50, “Memory Stick,” shoulder strap, lens cap, and so on included) Microphone Electret condenser microphone Speaker Dynamic speaker Exif Print Compatible PRINT Image Matching II Compatible PictBridge Compatible

A/V OUT (MONO) jack (Monaural) Minijack Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω , unbalanced, sync negative Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load) Output impedance 2.2 kΩ Accessory jack Mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm) USB jack mini-B USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0 HighSpeed compliant)


Accessories • • • • • • • • • • • •



—2—

DSC-F828

CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.


SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY.

ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT À LA SÉCURITÉ! LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

SAFETY CHECK-OUT After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer. 1.

2. 3.

4.

5. 6.

Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are "pinched" or high-wattage resistors. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing • Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C during repairing. • Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the circuit board (within 3 times). • Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering or unsoldering.

Unleaded solder Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the leadfree mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead. (Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with the lead free mark due to their particular size.)

: LEAD FREE MARK Unleaded solder has the following characteristics. • Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than ordinary solder. Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be applied to the solder t for a slightly longer time. Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to about 350°C. Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful! • Strong viscosity Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such as on IC pins, etc. • Usable with ordinary solder It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may also be added to ordinary solder.

—3—

DSC-F828 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.

SERVICE NOTE

• AS-050 FLEXIBLE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-14 • UA-003 (AV, USB JACK) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15 • LB-091 (EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-16 • CF-097 (CF CARD CONNECTOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-17 • FP-756 FLEXIBLE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-17 • SW-410 (FUNCTION KEY) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-19 • AJ-007 (JACK) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-19 • CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-21 • CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-22 • CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-23

1-1. NOTE FOR REPAIR ······················································· 1-1 1-2. DISCHARGING OF THE FLASH UNIT’S CHARGING CAPACITOR ··································································· 1-1 1-2-1. Preparing the Short Jig ···················································· 1-1 1-2-2. Discharging the Capacitor ··············································· 1-1 1-3. NOTES ON HANDLING THE LASER DIODE [LASER UNIT] ······························································· 1-2 1-4. DESCRIPTION ON SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY ······ 1-2

2.

DISASSEMBLY

2-1. 2-2. 2-3. 2-4. 2-5. 2-6. 2-7. 2-8. 2-9. 2-10. 2-11. 2-12. 2-13. 2-14. 2-15. 2-16. 2-17. 2-18. 2-19. 2-20. 2-21. 2-22. 2-23. 2-24. 2-25. 2-26. 2-27.

CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD ············ 2-2 STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ························· 2-3 ST SECTION ·································································· 2-4 ST-088 BOARD, LENS SECTION ································· 2-4 ST CABINET ASSEMBLY ············································ 2-5 MT-067 BOARD ····························································· 2-5 SI-037 BOARD, FLASH UNIT ······································ 2-6 LS-067 BOARD, LASER UNIT ····································· 2-7 REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY ························ 2-8 EVF SECTION ································································ 2-8 CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER) ······················ 2-9 CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID), LCD UNIT ······· 2-9 BTH SECTION ····························································· 2-10 SY-096 BOARD ···························································· 2-11 DD-204 BOARD ··························································· 2-12 CF-097 BOARD ···························································· 2-12 LR-018 BOARD, LITHIUM BATTERY ······················ 2-13 MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR ······························· 2-13 AJ-007 BOARD ···························································· 2-14 DC-IN CONNECTOR, UA-003 BOARD ····················· 2-14 FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD ·························· 2-15 HINGE/CABINET (LL) ASSEMBLY ·························· 2-16 SPEAKER/MICROPHONE SECTION ························ 2-16 CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY ·································· 2-17 CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP) ·························· 2-19 CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ································· 2-20 CIRCUIT BOARDS AND FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ······························ 2-21

3.

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. 3-2. 3-3. 3-4. 3-5.

OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) ··························· 3-1 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ··························· 3-3 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) ··························· 3-5 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ································ 3-7 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ································ 3-9

4.

PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/4) ······················· 4-1 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/4) ······················· 4-3 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (3/4) ······················· 4-5 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (4/4) ······················· 4-7 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS • DD-204 (DC/DC CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-11 • LR-018 (BATTERY, RESET SW) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-12 • ST-088 (FLASH CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13 • LS-067 (AF LASER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13 • MT-067 (FLASH MOTOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-14 • SI-037 (FLASH, IR LED) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-14

Schematic diagrams of the SY-096 board are not shown. Pages from 4-25 to 4-44 are not shown. 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS • DD-204 (DC/DC CONVERTER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-49 • LR-018 (BATTERY, RESET SW) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-50 • ST-088 (FLASH CONTROL) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-51 • MT-067 (FLASH MOTOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-51 • LS-067 (AF LASER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-52 • SI-037 (FLASH, IR LED) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-53 • UA-003 (AV, USB JACK) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-54 • LB-091 (EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-54 • CF-097 (CF CARD CONNECTOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-55 • AJ-007 (JACK) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-56 • SW-410 (FUNCTION KEY) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-57 • FP-748 (CONNECTOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-57 Printed wiring board of the SY-096 board is not shown. Pages from 4-59 to 4-62 are not shown. 4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ································· 4-63 Mounted parts location of the SY-096 board is not shown. Page 4-65 to 4-66 are not shown.

5.

REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 5-3 5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 5-3 5-1-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ························· 5-4 5-1-3. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 ················ 5-5 5-1-4. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2 ················ 5-6

—4—

DSC-F828

5-1-5. BTH BLOCK ASSEMBLY ············································· 5-7 5-1-6. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY ····················· 5-8 5-1-7. EVF ASSEMBLY ···························································· 5-9 5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ········································ 5-10 Parts list of the SY-096 board are not shown. Pages from 5-14 to 5-18 are not shown.

—5—

DSC-F828 SECTION 1 SERVICE NOTE 1-1. NOTE FOR REPAIR Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of bent at the terminal. Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly.

When remove a connector, don't pull at wire of connector. Be in danger of the snapping of a wire.

When installing a connector, don't press down at wire of connector. Be in danger of the snapping of a wire.

Cut and remove the part of gilt which comes off at the point. (Take care that there are some pieces of gilt left inside)

1-2. DISCHARGING OF THE FLASH UNIT’S CHARGING CAPACITOR The charging capacitor of the FLASH unit is charged up to the maximum 300 V potential. There is a danger of electric shock by this high voltage when the capacitor is handled by hand. The electric shock is caused by the charged voltage which is kept without discharging when the main power of the DSC-F828 is simply turned off. Therefore, the remaining voltage must be discharged as described below.

1-2-1. Preparing the Short Jig

1-2-2. Discharging the Capacitor

To preparing the short jig. a small clip is attached to each end of a resistor of 1 kΩ /1 W (1-215-869-11) Wrap insulating tape fully around the leads of the resistor to prevent electrical shock.

Short circuits between the positive and the negative terminals of charged capacitor with the short jig about 10 seconds. Short jig (1kΩ /1W)

1 kΩ/1 W

Wrap insulating tape. 04

-2

DD

DD-204 board

1-1

DSC-F828

1-3. NOTES ON HANDLING THE LASER DIODE [LASER UNIT] Note: Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced. Refer to “21. AF Laser Output Adjustment” (page6-29) and “22. AF Laser Axis Check” (page6-30) of SERVICE MANUAL, ADJ (987627951.pdf).

The laser diode may suffer electrostatic breakdown because of the potential difference generated by the charged electrostatic load, etc. on clothing and the human body. During repair, pay attention to electrostatic breakdown and also use the procedure in the printed matter which is included in the repair parts. The flexible board is easily damaged and should be handled with care.

Laser unit (D001)

Soldering Conditions of Laser Unit Temperature of the Soldering Iron Time to Solder Interval to Solder

Less than 350 °C 3 seconds Next terminal is soldered after waiting for 1 second

1-4. DESCRIPTION ON SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY

Self-diagnosis display • C: ss: ss The contents which can be handled by customer, are displayed. • E: ss: ss The contents which can be handled by engineer, are displayed.

Display Code

Countermeasure

Cause

Caution Display During Error

C:32:01

Turn off the main power then back on.

Trouble with hardware.

SYSTEM ERROR

C:13:01

Replace the memory stick. Format the memory stick with the DSC-F828.

• The type of memory stick that cannot be used by this machine, is inserted. • Data is damaged. • Unformatted memory stick is inserted.

MEDIA ERROR

E:91:01

Checking of flash unit or replacement of flash unit.

Abnormality when flash is being charged.

Flash LED Flash display Flashing at 3.2 Hz

Checking of lens drive circuit

When failed in the focus initialization.

E:61:00 *1 E:61:10 *1

Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash unit. *1: The error display is given in two ways.

1-2E

—

DSC-F828 SECTION 2 DISASSEMBLY

HELP

The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.

DISASSEMBLY HELP

HELP DISASSEMBLY

DISASSEMBLY

HELP

Discharging the Capacitor

DISASSEMBLY

04

-2

DD

DISASSEMBLY

HELP

HELP

HELP

DISASSEMBLY

DISASSEMBLY

DISASSEMBLY

SY-096 board service position HELP DISASSEMBLY

HELP DISASSEMBLY

HELP DISASSEMBLY

PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE SY-096 BOARD (SERVICE POSITION) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 q; qa

2-1. 2-2. 2-9. 2-13. 2-14. 2-15. 2-16. 2-18. 2-20. 2-21. 2-24.

CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD ................................ (page 2-2) STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ........................................... (page 2-3) REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY ........................................... (page 2-8) BTH SECTION .............................................................................. (page 2-10) SY-096 BOARD ............................................................................. (page 2-11) DD-204 BOARD ............................................................................ (page 2-12) CF-097 BOARD ............................................................................ (page 2-12) MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR .................................................. (page 2-13) DC-IN CONNECTOR,UA-003 BOARD ......................................... (page 2-14) FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD ............................................ (page 2-15) CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY ..................................................... (page 2-17)

2-1

DSC-F828

NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

2-1. CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD

Caution

Tape (A)

Note: When installing, be careful not to pinch the extra length of flexible board because it can be easily pinched during installation. FP-751 flexible board

3 Three screws (M2 × 4), lock ace 7 SW-410 board

5 Tape (A)

2 FP-751 flexible board (6P)

6 FP-751 flexible board (6P) 4 Cabinet (LR) assembly

2-2

1 Six screws (M2 × 4), lock ace

DSC-F828

2-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY

2 Peel the Radiation sheets (LR) from flexible boards.

Dowel

Caution

1 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4)

Radiation sheet (LR)

Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4)

Harness processing ST-088 board harness (PT132)

8 Two screws (M2 × 4), lock ace

3 Claw

Note: Be careful not to drop the ferrite core.

5 FP-746 flexible board (51P) 4 FP-747 flexible board (51P)

ST-088 board


Adhesion side (Ferrite core) 7 AJ-006 flexible board (6P)

q; Stroboscope block assembly

9 harness (PT132)

2-3

DSC-F828

2-3. ST SECTION 5 ST section


2 LS-067 board (6P)

4 MT-067 board (16P)

3 SI-037 board (26P)

2-4. ST-088 BOARD, LENS SECTION

8 Lens section

5 FP-750 flexible board (22P) 2 FP-750 flexible board (22P) 3 ST-088 board

4 Flexible board (Lens)(39P) 7 Harness guide

1 Screw (M1.7 × 3), lock ace 6 Two claws

2-4

DSC-F828

2-5. ST CABINET ASSEMBLY 2 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4)

3 ST blind cover 4 Four tapping screws (M1.7 × 4)

6 ST section

1 AS-050 flexible board (10P)

5 ST cabinet assembly

2-6. MT-067 BOARD 1 Three tapping screws (M1.7 × 4)

2 Claw

Stroboscope motor

3 STFPC cover 4 Screw (M1.7 × 2), grip

6 Remove the two solderings. 5 Screw (M1.7 × 2), grip

9 MT-067 board

7 Stroboscope motor

8 Three claws

2-5

DSC-F828

2-7. SI-037 BOARD, FLASH UNIT Remove the ST unit holder from the SI-037 board by disengaging the claw while sliding the (A) section of the SI-037 board in the direction of the arrow (B). 5 ST cover

SI-037 board

ST unit holder (A) Section (B)


2 8 Claw 1

7 Open the ST unit holder section

4 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4) 6 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4)

9 ST unit holder

q; Two claws

qa Remove soldering from the three points

qs Flash unit

qd SI-037 board

2-6

DSC-F828

2-8. LS-067 BOARD, LASER UNIT

1 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4) 2 Two dowels

3 Two grooves

6 Laser unit (D001)

4 ST laser holder

5 Remove the three solderings

7 LS-067 board

Caution When soldering the laser unit on the LS-067 board, observe the following things. (Refer to Service Note (page 1-2)). Observe the following conditions of temperature and time of soldering. Temperature of soldering iron : 350 °C Time of ing the soldering : 3 seconds iron with the solder The laser diode may suffer electrostatic breakdown because of the potential difference generated by the charged electrostatic load, etc. on clothing and the human body. During repair, pay attention to electrostatic breakdown and also use the procedure in the printed matter which is included in the repair parts. The flexible board is easily damaged and should be handled with care.

2-7

DSC-F828

2-9. REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY 5 Screw (M2 × 4), lock ace

Caution The LB-091 board may be damaged if you remove the rear cabinet block assembly forcibly. Be very careful not to damage the flexible board. 4 Screw (M2 × 4), lock ace 2 Screw (M2 × 4), lock ace

6 LB-091 board (22P) 7 Control switch block (under) (50P)


1 Two screws (M2 × 4), lock ace 8 Rear cabinet block assembly

2-10.EVF SECTION 3 Three claws 4 Prism sheet 5 Illuminator 7 Two claws

6 LCD (LCX044AK-1) (18P)

8 LB-091 board

9 Lamp guide (20)

2 EVF section q; LCD (LCX044AK-1)

1 Four tapping screws (M1.7 × 4)

2-8

DSC-F828

2-11.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER) 3 Block light guide plate (6P)

5 Cabinet (rear) assembly

Caution Control switch block (under)

4 LCD module (24P) 2 Control switch block (mid)(10p)

7 Control switch block (under)

Tape (A)

6 Tape (A)

Caution

1 Three screws (M1.7 × 3), lock ace

Install the control switch block (under) in the cabinet (rear) assembly so that the tip of the control switch block (under) go under the bottom of the control switch block (mid).

2-12.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID), LCD UNIT 8 CF lid assembly 2 Open the CF lid

7 Two screws (M1.7 × 3), lock ace

6 LCD unit

5 Block light guide plate

4 Tape (A)

Caution Tape (A) 1 Five screws (M1.7 × 3), lock ace

3 Control switch block (mid)

Block light guide plate

2-9

DSC-F828

2-13.BTH SECTION

Caution Note: When installing, be careful not to pinch the flexible board or harness during installation.

6 Harness (microphone) 7 Harness (speaker) 1 FP-754 flexible board (21P)

4 Control switch block (top) (12P) 5 LCD module (26P) 2 FP-746 flexible board (51P) q; Harness (PT-132) qs BTH section


Use the groove on side when installing it. 8 UA-003 board (12P) qa Connector (3P)

2-10


DSC-F828

2-14.SY-096 BOARD 2 FP-749 flexible board (10P) 4 FP-756 flexible board (51P)

6 SY-096 board

3 FP-748 board (60P)

5 Cushion (SY)


Caution

Cushion (SY)

SY-096 board

2-11

DSC-F828

2-15.DD-204 BOARD

Caution Note: The power supply capacitor of the flash unit is charged to the high tension voltage as high as 300 V at a maximum. You will get electrical shock when you touch the terminal of the charged capacitor . The charged potential remains even after the main power of the machine is turned off. Discharge the remaining power in the capacitor referring to Service Note (See page 1-1). High-voltage cautions. Short jig (R: 1k Ω /1W)

6 FP-748 board 7 Remove soldering from two point 9 DD-204 board 4 Two claws

2 Two screws (M1.7 × 3) lock ace

3 LR-018 board (6P)

4

20

5 Battery terminal board (3P)

DD

8 Capacitor

Caution 1 Fuse replacement caution label

DD-204 board

Fuse replacement caution label

2-16.CF-097 BOARD

Caution

4 Tape (A)

Tape (A) Ferrite bead 5 Ferrite bead

FP-749 flexible board 2 SY retainer 3 FP-756 flexible board (51P)

1 Four screws (M1.7 × 3) lock ace 6 CF-097 board

2-12

DSC-F828

2-17.LR-018 BOARD, LITHIUM BATTERY

2 Two claws

4 Remove soldering from the two points. 3 LR-018 board


5 Lithium battery

2-18.MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR

2 Hook


5 Memory stick connector

Caution

3 Sheet (MS)

Sheet (MS)


Memory stick connector

2-13

DSC-F828

2-19.AJ-007 BOARD

1 Screws (M1.7 × 3), lock ace 2 AJ-006 flexible board (6P)

3 AJ-007 board

2-20.DC-IN CONNECTOR, UA-003 BOARD

Jack holder assembly

4 Three Claws

3 Two tapping screws (M1.7 × 4) 5 UA-003 board

6 Jack ground plate

7 Jack holder assembly

Harness processing DC-IN connector


2 DC-IN connector

Hook UA-003 board

2-14

DSC-F828

2-21.FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD

FP-754 flexible board

Caution 1 Ferrite core

Tape (A) 2 harness (PT132) 3 Screw (M1.7 × 3), lock ace 5 Radiation sheet (LR)

FP-747 flexible board 6 Two screws (M1.7 × 3), lock ace

4 Flexible guide (R)

Harness processing 7

Harness processing

9 Tape (A)

harness (PT132)

Flexible guide (R)

8 harness (PT132)

Harness (PT-132)

q; Tape (A)

Caution qg FP-754 flexible board


qh FP-746 flexible board qf Adhesive tape

qs Two claws

Tape (A)

qa Ferrite core qd Flexible guide (L) qj FP-747 flexible board

2-15

DSC-F828

2-22.HINGE/CABINET (LL) ASSEMBLY Hinge /Cabinet (LL) Assembly

Remove it while rotating the Hinge/Cabinet (LL) Assembly.

3

4 2 Two screws(2 × 4), lock ace 1 Rotate the Hinge/Cabinet (LL) Assembly up to the position where screw becomes visible.

2-23.SPEAKER/MICROPHONE SECTION

Harness processing

2 Speaker /Microphone section

1 Three screws (M1.7 × 3), lock ace

Speaker

Microphone

Microphone holder 8 Speaker retainer plate

9 Speaker

5 Microphone 6 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4)

7 Claw 4 Microphone gom

3 Microphone grille

2-16

DSC-F828

2-24.CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY 4 Three tapping screws (M1.7 × 4) 2 Notch 5 Control switch block (top), LCD module section


3 Cabinet upper section

6 MD cushion

Control switch block (top)

Caution

When installing it, align the switch position as shown.

2-17

7 Cabinet upper assembly

DSC-F828

[SERVICE POSITION (SY-096 BOARD) ] FP-756 flexible board (51P) FP-749 flexible board (10P)

Control switch block (top) (12P) Memory stick connector

CN709

FP-746 flexible board (51P)

SY-096 board Control switch block (under) (50P)

CN706 CN701 CN751

CN711

CN703 CN707


ST-088 board

CN451

CN702

CN502

CN402

FP-754 flexible board (21P) UA-003 board CN401 CN103

CD-469 board CN404

Caution Note: High-voltage cautions.

harness (2P) (PT-132)

DD-204 board CN401

Extension cable

CN601

CN001

DC-IN connector


DC-IN

CN001

SW-410 board

AC power adaptor

PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE SY-096 BOARD (SERVICE POSITION) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 q; qa

2-1. 2-2. 2-9. 2-13. 2-14. 2-15. 2-16. 2-18. 2-20. 2-21. 2-24.

CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD ................................ (page 2-2) STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ........................................... (page 2-3) REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY ........................................... (page 2-8) BTH SECTION .............................................................................. (page 2-10) SY-096 BOARD ............................................................................. (page 2-11) DD-204 BOARD ............................................................................ (page 2-12) CF-097 BOARD ............................................................................ (page 2-12) MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR .................................................. (page 2-13) DC-IN CONNECTOR,UA-003 BOARD ......................................... (page 2-14) FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD ............................................ (page 2-15) CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY ..................................................... (page 2-17)

2-18

AC IN

DSC-F828

2-25.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)

3 LCD

2 Two claws

Caution

4 Control switch block (top)

Tape (A) 1 Tape (A)


2-19

DSC-F828

2-26.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

CF-097 DD-204

SY-096

ST-088 UA-003

SW-410 AJ-007

Board Name

Function

SY-096

CAMERA DSP, CAMERA SYSTEM CONTROL, CF DRIVE I/F, USB I/F, MODE CONTROL, AUDIO AMP, LCD DRIVER, EVF, LCD DRIVER, CONNECTOR, POWER SUPPLY

UA-003

AV, USB JACK

SW-410

FUNCTION KEY

AJ-007

JACK

ST-088

FLASH CONTROL

CF-097

CF CARD CONNECTOR

DD-204

DC/DC CONVERTER

2-20

DSC-F828

2-27.CIRCUIT BOARDS AND FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION Control switch block (top) Control switch block (under) FP-748 FP-749 (flexible) SI-037 LR-018 FP-754 (flexible) AJ-006 (flexible)

FP-746 (flexible) FP-751 (flexible)

Control switch block (mid)

FP-756 (flexible)

LB-091 LS-067

MT-067

FP-747 (flexible)

FP-750 (flexible)

Board Name

Function

SI-037

FLASH, IR LED

MT-067

FLASH MOTOR

LS-067

AF LASER

LB-091

EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT

FP-748

CONNECTOR

LR-018

BATTERY, RESET SW

2-21E

DSC-F828 2003. 12. 8 Update

HELP Sheet attachment positions and procedures of processing the flexible boards/harnesses are shown.

STROBOSCOPE SECTION

CABINET (LR) SECTION

Tape (A)

Tape (A)

SW-410 board



FRONT CABINET SECTION FP-747 flexible board FP-746 flexible board Radiation sheet (LR)

FP-747 flexible board Tape (A)

Tape (A)

FP-747 flexible board FP-754 flexible board

Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4)

Radiation sheet (LL) AJ-007 board

REAR CABINET SECTION Control switch block (under) Tape (A)

Tape (A)

Block light guide plate

HELP

DSC-F828

BTH SECTION CF radiation sheet (B)

CF radiation sheet (A) SY-096 board

Cushion (SY) BT holder assembly (front side)

BT holder assembly (rear side)

Tape (A) Ferrite bead DD-204 board Sheet (MS)

Fuse replacement caution label

HELP

Memory stick connector


DSC-F828

3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS Link OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)

POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)

OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)

POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)

OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)

DSC-F828 SECTION 3 BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) LENS UNIT (1/3)

FP-756

SY-096 BOARD (1/3)

IRIS SHUTER

CCD IMAGER

S/H,AGC A8

28,27,23

H8-H6,H4

B4-B8,A7 G5,G3 E7 E6 D9 F5 F6 TIMING GENERATOR

D1 E2 F2

E1 F1

IC452

FP-754 FLEXIBLE

CAM AD0 CAM AD13

18

4

5

17

G) (1,3)

CAM SO,SCK

H1A,B,C H2A,B,C

A2,B1,J2, (C,D,E,F,

J5

HJ J2

XCAM RST

MCK TG

20,19

CAM HD CAM F

F1 C9 B9 J4 G5 J3 SHD,SHP

17 V1A,B,C V2 V3A,B,C V4 V5A,B,C V6 RG C3-C7

C1 B1

A/D CONV.

(AA,AB,AC,

(AA,AB,Y)

U,V,W,Y)

(13-17)

MC D0-D15

CLP OB

21

1

Y18

MC A1-A25

3

TGCLK SHD SHP

19

1

21 CN711

MCK TG TG CLK

AC16 AC20 T23

MC CKIO

CAM SO,SCK

CAM SO,S1,SCK

AA7

EEPROM

FP-746 FLEXIBLE (1/6)

CAM HD CAM F

M

20 13

SHUTTER MOTOR

M

5

FOCUS MOTOR

M

24

FOCUS A FOCUS A FOCUS B FOCUS B

21

IR FILTER MOTOR

M

SHUTTER + SHUTTER -

8

39

IR + IR -

36

F7

E7 D7

SHUTTER DRIVE

A6 B5 A4 B4

FOCUS MOTOR DRIVE

C1 D2

G1 G2 H2 G3

IR FILTER DRIVE

34 33 35

21 22

CA HD CA F

AU LRCK

28

CN701


CN702

F8

41

11

C8 C7 B8 B7

37 36 38

15 16 14

HR DQ00

(A-E,

HR DQ31

L-M,

B3 A2

29

13

40

12

MSHUT DIR

IR FILTEREN EN IR FILTEREN DIR XFC RST SENS XIR RST SENS

HR AQ12

L21

A4,

P21

(B,C,D),

(1-3,

AA5

(4-8)

7-9)

B8

HR EN2 HR DIR2A HR DIR2B

MSHUT EN

9

45

7

IR FILTER SENSOR

34

42

10

BUFFER

4

46

6 4


TO OVER ALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)

1 3

FC RING FG A FC RING FG B

30 29


CN701

22 23

HR QCLK

C7

N20

AD11

W21

AE17

Y21

AD13 AD18

A16

A2

AE13 AA4

A7

AB3

1 2

SP+ SP-

19 21

19 21

33 31

33 31

37

37

15

CF RESET

15

20

20

32

32

CN103 COMPACT FLASH MICRO DRIVE

C7

FLEXIBLE

CN706 9

MS SDIO/DATA0-3,MS BS, MS SCLK

MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR

3

FR SO,SI,SCK XSYS RST XACCESS LED XCF COVER OPEN

2

XPROGRAM DIAL A XPROGRAM DIAL B XMINL LCD BL ON


(PAGE 3-6)

XAE LOCK ON XSHTR ON STRB CHG XSTRB FULL EXT STRB CONT STRB POP UP CNTSENS

Q302-Q304

VIDEO AMP

3

PRELAMP AF CONT PD LV SELF TIMER LED


(PAGE 3-3)

XSTRB POP UP STRB POP UP DC EN STRB POP UP DC DIR STRB POP UP DC BRAKE

UA-003 BOARD

E23 C23

XCAM RST

D23

IRIS RESET SENS AD

C18

ZOOM POS OUT

D17

IC303

SYS SO,SI,SCK PRELAMP AF ON

B6

U20

BUFFER

2

M7

CF A0-A10

A16

AB4

IR LED ON

AC12 AC9

AU A IN

G26

(AA,AB,AC,

E4

T,U,W,Y)

E4

(1-4)

(4/10)

50

PHY DATA0-DATA15

29

IC251

AU A OUT N1

4

AC3

F23

PHY CLKOUT

USB2.0 I/F

55

PHY RESET

28

5 4

11 12

USBPHY D+,D-

CN707 11 10

CN001 (USB)

CX251 12MHz

T20

XSYS RST

MIC IN

39

D15

AC14

STRB ON R G B

A11

AE14 AE12

A17 D16

AD12 AF14

1

3

39

D21

H20

B15

MIC

(1-3)

B21

AC15 J1

CAM SO,SI,SCK

CN713 SP901 SPEAKER

(2/10)

M21

(1/10)

CN712 MIC901

B20

AC19

U20

HDO V

V OUT

FOCUS RING FG

J,K,L)

C22

H25

ZOOM POS OUT

CN702

3

13

FP-749

E26

H21

EXT STRB ON

6

49

13

F21

HOT STRB ON

XFC RST SENS

(PAGE 3-3) 1

(F,G,H

(E,F,G)

C19

D5

1

49

C17

IC304

1

XIR RST SENS

41 12

D14

(F-J)

IRIS RESET SENS AD

43

48

41 12

B16

(1/10)

3

32

27

(23-26)

B17

FC RING FG AMP

ZOOM RING POSITION SENSOR

(23-26)

D24

10

B9,D12, (1-3),H11

XSYS RST

M2

Y21

IRIS RESET SENSOR

48

C11

HR AQ00

N21

MSHUT EN MSHUT DIR


FOCUS RESET SENSOR

4 11 40

SRRAM 512Mbit

P,R) (1-3, 7-9)

(A-D) (13-17)


IR FILTEREN EN IR FILTEREN DIR

4 11 40

CAMERA SYSTEM CONTROL

IC302

U21

24

P,R,T-W,Y)

IC501

CAMERA DSP

AB18

CN702


(AA,AB,N,

M,N)

A10

(1/10)

(A-G)

XCAM RST

(H,J,K,L,

A8 K1 D8

IC301

Y17

CN701

8 12 7

18 19 17

MC A0-A10,A24

(1/10)

31 30

43 44 40 45

IRIS DRIVE

X501 27MHz

XCAM RST

(1-4),

G4 H4 G5 H6

MC A0-A25

MC CKI0

3 4 2

CF D0-D15

(1-4)

(8-10)

(J,K,L,M,

FP-747 FLEXIBLE(1/6)

IRIS MOTOR

L,M)

(A-F)

CLP OB N,P,R,T,U)

MCK TG


MC D0-D15

(1-4)

ADCLK

9

IRIS A IRIS A IRIS B IRIS B

MC D0-D15

(1-4)

CN101

CN451

MICRO DRIVE I/F

(H,J,K,

J8

ADCLK

15 12-13

V OUT

CCDINP CCDINM F9 E9

CF-097 BOARD

FLEXIBLE

(3/10)

MELODY MELODY EW

Q601 MOD

BEEP

AU A IN AU A OUT MIC IN SP+ SP-

E1

(6/10)

B4

5

A OUT

IC601 H4 H5

AUDIO AMP

B9 A2 D1 5

AUDIO SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL

3-1

3-2

J001 A/V OUT (MONO)

DSC-F828 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS 3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)


SY-096 BOARD (2/3)

4


(PAGE 3-5)

AJ-006 FLEXIBLE

LENS UNIT (2/3)

CN702 STRB POPUO DC EN STRB POPUO DC DIR 11 STRB POPUO DC BRAKE 9 12


B2 A1 F2

41 43 40

STROB POPUP MOTOR DRIVE

2

2

6

6

1

E1 E2

AJ-007 BOARD

FP-750 FLEXIBLE

J201 ACC (Accessory)

CN201 LANC SIG ACC STRB ON

ST-088 BOARD

MT-067 BOARD CN503

CN501 22

1

4

19

4

16

STRB POPUP+ STRB POPUP-

M

M910 FLASH MOTOR

LANC SIG

EXT STRB CONT

IC703

13

8

44

16

7

23

8

15

2

26

19

4

2

27

25

12

11

25

27

5

11

12

1

10

13

CN701 29

(9/10) 4

HOT STRB ON

EXT STRB ON

4

S001 MOTOR POSITION DETECT

39

STRB POPUP CNTSENS


CAM -7.5V

CN001

26


LANC SIG

5

D504

CN702

8 9

FLASH DRIVE

11

10 7 6

HOT

EXT STRB ON CN

ACCESSORY SHOE

4

(9/10)

3


(PAGE 3-2)

SYS SO,SI,SCK

IC702

AMP AF ON AMP AF CONT

PD LV SELF TIMER LED

30

22

31

21

15

37

CN701 26

XSTRB POPUP STRB POPUP DC EN STRB POPUP DC DIR STRB POPUP DC BRAKE

4 2

AF LD DRIVE

LD OUT

CN504 3

PD OUT

LED DRIVE

26

5

18

6

17

SELF TIMER LED

6 Q501

15

24

CN505

LED DRIVE

8

6

IC502

IC701

STRB ON


2

Q502-504 STRB ON

4

29

IR LED ON

23

14

FLASH DRIVE

9

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(UNDER) (1/2)

(PAGE 3-1) R G B

HDO V

HDO V

SYS SO,SI,SCK

40 39 38 43 42 47 48 46

(7/10)

IC801 RGB DRVE TIMING GENERATOR (LCD)

VR VG VB

19 20 21

VCOM HCNT, MVLK, OE, GRES, STBYB, SRT, GSRT,GPCK,

25

35 32 16 6 2

(7/10) 31 28

TRIGGER TRANSFORMER

23

XE-L

26

SI-037 BOARD

BL ON BL LEVEL

IC802

CN703 29 21 25

CN002 30 22 26

1

2

17 13 9 24 5 7 20 22 26 30

18 14 10 23 6 8 19 21 25 29

CN502 2 LCD901

CN001

2.5INCH LCD UNIT

10 8 9 1

7 3 24 21

BL H BLREG

BACK LIGHT

CN004 1

BL REG

ND901

BL UNREG

R G B HDO V

SYS SO,SI,SCK

40 39 38 43 42 47 48 46

(8/10)

IC902 RGB DRVE TIMING GENERATOR (EVF)

R G B

19 20 21

COM PCG VST VCK STB EN DWN HST HCK2,HCK1

23

35 31 15 14

LB-091 BOARD

CN901

LCD902

CN001

15 16 14

4 3 5

17

1

3

16

12

7

COLOR EVF UNIT

4 2 16 28

DC1 EXTDA

Q901-903 BACK LIGHT DRIVE

21

D001 BACK LIGHT

VIDEO SIGNAL

3-3

9 13 14


R G B

D001 Infrared ray emitter XE-H L001

2

(9/10)

EXT STRB ON

FLEXIBLE

D004 Self-timer S001 FLASH OPEN DETECT

1

FP-746 FLEXIBLE(5/6) CN702 28

AS-050

LS-067 BOARD

HOT STRB ON

1

D001 AF LASER UNIT

4

3-4

DC 300V

5

TO OVER ALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) (DD-204)

(PAGE 3-5)

XENON TUBE

DSC-F828 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS 3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)


SW-410 BOARD

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(UNDER)

SY-096 BOARD (3/3)

LENS UNIT (3/3)

(5/10)

IC401 S001-007

HI CONTROL

XACCESS LED XCHARGE/ B1 XSTRB LED

XCHARGE/XSTRB LED XCF COVER OPEN

CN001

OPEN(FLASH),FLASH, METERING MODE,MACRO, BURST/BRACKET,FOCUS, NIGHT SHOT/NIGHT FLAMING

2 3

2 3

KEY AD3 24 KEY AD4 25 CN701

28 27


FP-751 FLEXIBLE

J7 KEY AD3 H7 KEY AD4

XPROGRAM DIAL A XPROGRAM DIAL B

KEY AD0

KEY AD 0 J6 (8/10) LCD903 CHARACTER DISPLAY UNIT

IC201

CN201 1 25

COMO-COM3,SEG1-SEG20

12

9 8

LCD DRIVE

37

C1 DDCON SO D3 DDCON SCK

DDCON SO,SCK X401 32.768KHz

IC402 RESET

RST VIN

17

50

49

1

D001 FLASH

36

35

9

CF COVER OPEN

40 38

39 37

7 8

46 42

45 41

44

43

CN003

GUI DOWN

3 5

GUI UP

4 S001-006

3V REG

KEY AD2

KEY AD 2 G6

KEY AD0 L5

J5 32KHz OUT

5

D7 XRSTX

6

A5 BACK UP VCC H4

3 7

KEY AD1

KEY AD 1 H6

D001 ACCESS

18

J4 32KHz IN

(5/10)

VL 3V

CN002

CN703

Q701 LED DRIVE

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(MID)

10 2

FINDER/LCD,SCREEN STATUS, SELF TIMER/INDEX, DIGITAL ZOOM,QUICK REVIEW, MEMORY STICK/CF CARD

9 1

S003-005 CN709 KEY AD0 L2

8 CN602

S001

LR-018 BOARD

RESET

5

BT001 LITHIUM BATTERY (SECONDARY)

3

XRST SW VL 3V

CN751

CN601 33

33

35

35

MODE DIAL 0 J8 MODE DIAL 1 J9 XMINI LCD BL ON F1 BATT SIG

DD-204 BOARD

A7 BATT/XEXT H2 FAST CHARGE

BATT SIG BATT/XEXT FAST CHARGE CN002

Q001,002

S

E8 SYS DD ON

RST VIN

3

XPWR ON B8

25 27

XAE LOCK ON

29

XACCESS LED

IC001

CN001

37

37

FR SO D2 FR SI D1 XFR SCK E1

LANC SI

48

LANC SIG

51

J901 DC IN

27 28

2

3

POWER

S002

5 6

SHUTTER

S001

SYS DD ON DDCON SO,SCK

FR SO,SI,SCK XSYS RST XACCESS LED XCF COVER OPEN

LANC SO

50

DC/DC CONVERTER

1

9

9

11

11

7

7

23

23

19 17

19 17

LANC SIG

4


(PAGE 3-3)

XPROGRAM DIAL A XPROGRAM DIAL B XMINI LCD BL ON

2


CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(TOP)

(PAGE 3-2)

XAE LOCK ON XSHTR ON STRB CHG XSTRB FULL

DD 1.8V DD P5V DD 2.95V DD 4.7V DD 3.3V DD 4.2V DD 15V DD -7.5V

3

IC004 FP-748 FLEXIBLE

ACV UNREG BL UNREG STRB CHG XSTRB FULL

STRB UNREG

HI VOLTAGE CHARGER Q401,402,407

D006 MINI LCD BACK LIGHT D001 POWER

2 XPWR ON

29

XSYS RST B3

38

MODE DIAL X MINI LCD BL ON

F2 LANC SO

D001

LANC I/O

WHITE BALANCE, EXPOSURE, DISPLAY WINDOW BACKLIGHT

9 8 12

XPOWER LED ON B2

27

F3 LANC SI 2

Q704 LED DRIVE

25

BATT UNREG

1

BT901 BATTERY TERMINAL

MODE DIAL 0 MODE DIAL 1

EVER 3.0V

10

15

15

13

13

CN401 1

DC300V

C405 (FLASH)

5

TO OVER ALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) (ST-088)

(PAGE 3-4)

3-5

3-6

COMMAND DIAL

MULTISELECTOR

MENU, AE LOCK

S002,S012

DSC-F828 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS 3-4. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)


DD-204 BOARD 1


S

2

F001

CN002 BATT UNREG

Q401,402,407,T401

BATT SIG

F004 Q001,002

F003

1 2 3

SY-096 BOARD (2/3)

5V UNREG

STRB CHG XSTRB FULL

BL UNREG

BL UNREG

13 13

41 41

41 41

FP-748 BOARD (2/2)

31 31 VREF 37 RT 30

CN002 27 25 27 25

29 29

DC/DC CONVERTER LANC I/O

D001

31 31

CN751

SY-096 BOARD (1/3)

Q007 SWITCHING

L002

DD 1.8V

37 37

37 37

BATT UNREG 45 45 ACV UNREG 43 43

45 45

56

VCC

43

VIN

Q008 SWITCHING

L757

DD P 5V

36 36

36 36

38 38 40 40

38 38 40 40

42 42 44 44

42 42 44 44

46 46

46 46

48 48 50 50

48 48 50 50

52 52

52 52

Q009 SWITCHING

L004

DD 2.95V

L759

D 2.95V A 2.95V

OUT3 59 DDCON SCK C1 DDCON SCK D3 XCS DD CON H1

19 19

19 19

17 17 21 21

17 17 21 21

CTL1 38

23 23

23 23

DDCON SO,SCK,XCS

27 28 26

DIN CLK LD

38

CTL1

IN3 22 Q010 SWITCHING

L005

DD 4.7V

L751 53 53

4.7V

53 53

H2 FAST CHARGE

1 3

OUT4 60

D7 XRSTX XLANC IC ON A1

3

7 S002 POWER

3V REG

BATTER IN DETECT

6

A5 BACK UP VCC H4

4

A9 BATT IN

D 1.2V D 1.8V A 2.95V

(10/10) L753

D404 5

CAM 15V CAM P 5V D 2.95V

2.95V

L760

J4 INIT CHARGE

RESET

D 1.2V CAM P 5V

L761

HI CONTROL

A7 BATT/XEXT

2 VCH

,Q751

1.2V REG

43 43

F1 BATT SIG

IC402

D 1.8V

49 49

OUT2 58

IC401

(5/10)

49 49

13.5V 2.95V 4.7V EVER 3.0V

IC751 L003

IN2 21

G8 ACV SENS

BL UNREG

OUT1 57

(5/10)

H8 BATT SENS

MD 3.3V STRB CHG XSTRB FULL

(10/10)

IN1 20

RST VIN

3 3 CN751

47

3 3 CN002

CN001

CN601 Q006

5.6V REG

52 54

IN4 23

XCTL 2

L011 V CONT

Q011 SWITCHING

LANC I/O

MD 3.3V

L006

54 54

54 54

56 56 58 58

56 56 58 58

60 60

60 60

55 55

55 55

57 57 59 59

57 57 59 59

IC752

L754 5

CAM 3.3V

CAM 3.3V

3.3V REG MD 3.3V

LANC DC OUT5 61

8 EVER 3.0V

CN709

IN5 24

3

B8 XPER ON

Q012 SWITCHING

F8 DDCON SENS

L007

DD 4.2V

1

L756

Q752

OUT6 62

13.5V

13.5V REG

CN751 35 39 35 39

33 33

IN6 25 CN002

D010 RECT

(10/10)

L001

OUT7 63

TG 4.2V

TG 4.2V

DD 15.5V

47 47

2

47 47

IC753

1

CAM 15V

15.1V REG

Q015 SWITCHING

-INE7 2

FP-748 BOARD(1/2)

CN001 35 39 35 39

33 33

2 CN601

EVER 3.0V VL 3V 3


29

XRST SW CN602 5

RST

D011 RECT

IC004

1

DD -7.5V

L763 51 51

51 51

CAM -7.5V

CAM -7.5V

-7.5V REG

S001 RESET

LANC DC

LR-018 BOARD

CN601

5 5

LANC DC

5 5 CN001

CN002

CN751

EVER 3.0V

POWER

13 13

CN601 29 29

IC001

D001

15 15

ACV UNREG

CN001

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)

15 15

BATT/XEXT 27 25 27 25

TO POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)

UNREG3

F006

F002

1

(PAGE 3-10)

Q003,004

LF001

DC 300V

C405

BATT UNREG

CHARGE SWITCH

J901 DC IN

1

F005

3

CN001 AV UNREG

CN401

HIGHT VOLTAGE CHARGER

STRB UNREG

3-7

3-8

D 1.2V

2


(PAGE 3-9)

DSC-F828 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS 3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)

( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located. FP-756

SY-096 BOARD (3/3)

FP-749

FLEXIBLE Q451

L452

MD 3.3V

25

27

27

28

28

24

24

D 2.95V

CN103

CN101

K6

XSTRB FULL

CF POWER ON

L804

4.7V

CN703 33

34

49 35

50 36

47

48

45

46

2.95V Q801,802

L803

CAM 15V

CN002

(7/10) 13.5V CN901

FB901

13.5V

VDD

1

18

BL ON BL LEVEL

COLOR EVF UNIT

RGB DRIVE TIMING GENERATOR

31 28

24

12 20

VGH (15V)

XCSSAVE2

18

ND901

34

LB-091 BOARD

RGB DRIVE TIMING GENERATOR

EVF LED A

THERMISTOR BACK LIGHT

L805

L806 30

33

28

31

48

47

BL H BL REG

1

D805 (RECT)

D001 BACK LIGHT L902

27

CN004 6

BL THH

BL MODE BL UNREG

LCD901 2.5INCH LCD UNIT

19

VDC (15V)

Q703

IC902

4.7V

CN001 11

VSH (5V) VDD (3V)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)

IC801

LCD902

CN001

(8/10)

2.95V


VCC

2

MS PWR ON

MICRO DRIVE I/F

STRB CHG

CN706

Q702

D 2.95V

COMPACT FLASH/ MICRO DRIVE

VCC

CF-097 BOARD

(3/10)

IC452

FLEXIBLE

CN451 25

(7/10) 6

19

IC802

5 9

BL UNREG 13.5V

BL REG

1 3

BL L IN2-

3

2.95V

EVER 3.0V

CN003

EVER 3.0V

2

D001 FLASH

TO POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) (DD-204)

1

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID)

4.7V

(PAGE 3-8)

R701 2 CN701 CAM P 5V

42

10

39

13

2


(1/10)

(1/10)

(9/10)

(8/10)

IC451

IC304

IC302

IC201

OR GATE

FC RING FG AMP

SDRAM 512Mbit

IC701 IC702 IC703

(PAGE 3-8)

6

FLASH DRIVE

6

9 R509,510

FP-746 (3/10)

18

5

FP-750

FLEXIBLE (1/2)

FLEXIBLE

LCD DRIVE

IRIS/ SHUTTER/ FOCUS/ IR FILTER DRIVE

BUFFER

AF LD DRIVE

1

ZOOM POSI VCC 28 29

XMF SENS LED

FOCUS RING FG

D 2.95V

(6/10)

(1/10)

IC601

IC301

AUDIO AMP

CAMERA DSP

14 15

31

FOCUS RESET SENSOR

IRIS SENS VCC 11 12

IRIS RESET SENSOR

F SENS VCC XIRIS RST LED

XIR SENS LED

(2/10) L581 L582 U22 V22 T22 W20

XFC RST LED XIRIS RST LED

L583 L584

XIR SENS LED XMF SENS LED

AVDD PLL 1.2V

IC501

AVDD AD 2.95V

CAMERA SYSTEM CONTROL

AVDD DA 2.95V AVRT DA 2.95V

IR SENS VCC AE17 AD13 AC18 E25

AE19

STRB CHG

EEPROM

BUFFER

XSTRB FULL

35

LENS UNIT

IR FILTER RESET SENSOR

MS PWR ON BL MODE CAM DD ON

XMF SENS LED

AU 2.95V D 1.2V D 1.8V A 2.95V CAM 3.3V

38 37

XENON TUBE

SI-037 BOARD

ZOOM RING POSITION SENSOR

2

MF VCC

FB301

XE H D001 Infrared ray emitter

ST-088 BOARD

XFC RST LED

CAM 15V CAM P 5V D 2.95V

CN505

CN502

Q502-504

CN501 17

8

44

32

20

31

21

CAM DD ON

L602 CAM 15V CAM -7.5V

(1/10)

(4/10)

IC303

IC251

VIDEO AMP

USB 2.0 I/F

CN702 XFC RST LED 21 XIRIS RST LED 19 XIR SENS LED 18 CAM DD ON 33 LANC DC 17

31 33 34 19 35

A/D CONV.

S/H AGC

3

3.45V REG

5

3.45V

TIMING GENER

CCD IMAGER

FP-747 FLEXIBLE CN701

TG 4.2V CAM -7.5V LANC DC

A 2.95V

36 35

16 17

CAM 3.3V

34 33

18 19

TG 4.2V

45 43

4

7

FP-746

CN201

AJ-006

FLEXIBLE (2/2)

3-9

4

9

FLEXIBLE

3-10E

AJ-007 BOARD

J201 ACC (Accessory)

DSC-F828 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

SECTION 4 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/4) 2

1

3

D001 Infrared ray emitter

A

5

4

CN505

6

7

9

8

11

10

12

13

26P

1

IR_LED_A

2

IR_LED_K

3

N.C.

4

N.C.

5

N.C.

STRB_POPUP+

22

1

STRB_POPUP+

6

XE_H

STRB_POPUP+

21

2

STRB_POPUP+

7

XE_H

STRB_POPUP-

20

3

STRB_POPUP-

8

XE_H

STRB_POPUP-

19

4

STRB_POPUP-

9

XE_H

SELF_TIMER_LED

18

5

SELF_TIMER_LED

10

N.C.

XSTRB_POPUP

17

6

XSTRB_POPUP

11

N.C.

REG_GND

16

7

REG_GND

12

N.C.

LANC_SIG

15

8

LANC_SIG

13

TRIGGER

REG_GND

14

9

REG_GND

14

TRIGGER

PD_OUT

13

10

PD_OUT

15

N.C.

LD_OUT

12

11

LD_OUT

16

N.C.

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

11

12

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

17

N.C.

XASHOE_JACK_IN

10

13

XASHOE_JACK_IN

18

REG_GND

STRB_ON

9

14

STRB_ON

19

REG_GND

IR_LED_ON

8

15

IR_LED_ON

20

N.C.

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

7

16

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

21

N.C.

CAM_P_5V

6

17

CAM_P_5V

22

N.C.

D_2.95V

5

18

D_2.95V

23

XE_L

HOT_STRB_ON

4

19

HOT_STRB_ON

24

XE_L

REG_GND

3

20

REG_GND

25

XE_L

REG_GND

2

21

REG_GND

26

XE_L

REG_GND

1

22

REG_GND

CN501

22P

22P

XENON TUBE

B

SI-037 BOARD C

D

ST-088 BOARD

FP-750

FLEXIBLE

D001 AF LASER UNIT CN504 6P

E

LS-067 BOARD

1

SELF_TIMER_LED

2

REG_GND

3

LD_OUT

4

PD_OUT

5

REG_GND

6

XSTRB_POPUP

1 CN502

TO DD-204 BOARD CN401

STRB_POPUP+

STRB_POPUP+

STRB_POPUP-

STRB_POPUP-

LANC_SIG

REG_GND

N.C.

HOT

HOT

N.C.

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

XASHOE_JACK_IN

SHOE_GND

SHOE_GND

REG_GND

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

16P

1

S001

2

LENS UNIT(1/2) (CD-469 BOARD)

F OPEN ( FLASH DETECT )

1

DC_300V

(PAGE 4-7)

CN503

D004 (Self-timer)

2P

REG_GND

Note: Since a servce is not for the single CD-469 Board. Because adjustment is needed.

SW-410 BOARD

G

CN001 6P

AS-050

H

FLEXIBLE

10

LANC_SIG

9

REG_GND

8

N.C.

7

HOT

6

HOT

5

N.C.

4

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

3

XASHOE_JACK_IN

2

SHOE_GND

1

SHOE_GND

TO LENS UNIT (2/2)

(PAGE 4-3)

6P 1

N.C.

2

KEY_AD3

3

KEY_AD4

4

N.C.

5

5

REG_GND

6

6

N.C.

LANC_GND

1

1

LANC_GND

2

LANC_SIG

3

LANC_GND

4

LANC_DC

N.C.

1

KEY_AD3

2

KEY_AD4

3

N.C.

4

REG_GND N.C.

CN001 10P ACCESSORY SHOE

2

FP-751 FLEXIBLE

AJ-007 BOARD I


MT-067 BOARD CN201

6P

6P

J201 ACC(Accessory)

M910 FLASH MOTOR

J

LANC_SIG

2

LANC_GND

3

LANC_DC

4

XLANC_JACK_IN

5

5

XLANC_JACK_IN

ACC_STRB_ON

6

6

ACC_STRB_ON

AJ-006 FLEXIBLE

M 16

4-1

4-2

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/4)



FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/4) 1

2

3

5

4

6

7

9

8

11

10

12

13

15

14

16

17

18

A

B 39P 1

REG_GND

1

REG_GND

2

REG_GND

3

REG_GND

4

REG_GND

5

XFE_CS

6

XCAM_SCK

7

CAM_SO XCAM_RST

2

C

MF_OUT_F1

4

MF_GND

5

SHUTTER+

SHUTTER-

8

SHUTTER-

D

IRIS_SENS_OUT

11

IRIS_SENS_VCC

12

IRIS_SENS_VCC

IRIS_B

15

IRIS_B

16

IRIS_B

18

LENS

E

F

IRIS_A IRIS_A

20

IRIS_A

21

FOCUS_B

22

FOCUS_A

23

FOCUS_B

24

FOCUS_A

Note: Since a servce is not for the single CD-469 Board. Because adjustment is needed.

25

STATIC_GND

26

ZOOM_POSI_GND

27

ZOOM_POSI_OUT

ZOOM_POSI_VCC

30

GND(SENS,THERM)

31

F_SENS_VCC

12 13

REG_GND

14

CCD_TEMP

15

REG_GND

16

LENS_TEMP

17

REG_GND

18

CAM_DD_ON

19

MSHUT_REF

20

PD_LV

21

PRELAMP_AF_CONT

22

STRB_ON

23

IR_LED_ON

24

EXT_STRB_ON

25

HOT_STRB_ON

26

TO SY-096 BOARD

PRELAMP_AF_ON

27

(PAGE 4-5)

MSHUT_EN

28

FC_RING_FGB

29

FC_RING_FGA

30

XFC_RST_LED

31

XCAM_DR_PS

32

XIRIS_RST_LED

33

XIR_SENS_LED

34

LANC_DC

35

XLANC_JACK_IN

36

SELF_TIMER_LED

37

FP-747 FLEXIBLE

XHSHOE_CONT

38

XLENS_EEP_WE

39

STRB_POPUP_DC_BRAKE

40

STRB_POPUP_DC_EN

41

F_SENS_OUT

33

THERM_OUT

34

IR_SENS_OUT

35

IR_SENS_VCC

36

11

CAM_SI

ZOOM_POSI_VCC

29

32

G

LENS UNIT(2/2) (CD-469 BOARD)

IRIS_A

19

28

XCDS_CS

EXT_STRB_CONT

IRIS_B

14

17

10

IRIS_SENS_GND

10

13

XTG_CS

SHUTTER+

7

9

9

MF_VCC

3

6

8

MF_OUT_F0

XLENS_EEP_CS

42

STRB_POPUP_DC_DIR

43

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

44

REG_GND

45

REG_GND

46

REG_GND

47

REG_GND

48

IR-

37

IR-

38

IR+

39

IR+

2

REG_GND

49

REG_GND

50

REG_GND

51

51P TO LENS UNIT (1/2)

51P

21P

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

ZOOM_POS_OUT

XFC_RST_SENS

XMF_SENS_LED

IRIS_SENS_AD

XIR_RST_SENS

MSHUT_DIR

IR_FILTER_IN

IR_FILTER_EN

HR_DIR2B

HR_EN2

HR_DIR2A

HR_DIR3B

HR_EN3

HR_DIR3A

VSUB_CONT

CA_HD

CA_F

PBLK

KEY_AD3

KEY_AD4

XSTRB_POPUP

XASHOE_JACK_IN

REG_GND

LANC_SIG

REG_GND

CAM_-7.5V

CAM_15V

CAM_3.3V

CAM_3.3V

A_2.95V

A_2.95V

D_2.95V

D_2.95V

CAM_P_5V

CAM_P_5V

CAM_P_5V

CAM_P_5V

TG_3.45V

TG_3.45V

TG_3.45V

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

CLP_OB

AD_GND

AD_GND

CA_AD00

CA_AD01

CA_AD02

CA_AD03

CA_AD04

CA_AD05

CA_AD06

CA_AD07

CA_AD08

CA_AD09

CA_AD10

CA_AD11

CA_AD12

CA_AD13

AD_GND

MCKTG

AD_GND

TG_CLK

51

50

49

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

(PAGE 4-2)

H

I 3

FP-746 FLEXIBLE

FP-754 FLEXIBLE 4

TO SY-096 BOARD

TO SY-096 BOARD

(PAGE 4-5)

(PAGE 4-6)

J 16


4-3

4-4

5




1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

A 12P

CN709

EVER_3.0V

1

XPOWER_LED_ON

2

XPWR_ON

3

GND

4

XAE_LOCK_ON

5

XSHTR_ON

6

GND

7

B

C

LCD902 COLOR EVF UNIT

D

22P

22

N.C.

MODE_DIAL1

8

CN001 18P

21

EVF_LED_K

MODE_DIAL0

9

18

VDD

20

N.C.

KEY_AD0_L2

10

17

VSS

19

EVF_LED_A

GND

11

16

RCG

18

N.C.

XMINILCD_BL_ON

12

15

VST

17

COM

14

VCK

16

G

13

STB

15

R

12

ENB

14

B

11

DWN

13

TEST

10

RGT

12

HCK1

9

HST

11

HCK2

8

HCK2

10

HST

SP_-

2

7

HCK1

9

RGT

SP_+

1

6

TEST

8

DWN

5

B

7

ENB

4

R

6

STB

3

G

5

VCK

2

N.C.

4

VST

1

COM

3

PCG

2

VSS

1

VDD

LB-091 BOARD D001 BACK LIGHT

E

CN713 2P

G

51

REG_GND

50

REG_GND

49

REG_GND

48

REG_GND

47

REG_GND

46

REG_GND

45

TG_4.2V

44

TG_4.2V

43

TG_4.2V

42

CAM_P_5V

SY-096 BOARD(1/2)

41

CAM_P_5V

40

CAM_P_5V

39

CAM_P_5V

38

D_2.95V

37

D_2.95V

36

A_2.95V

35

A_2.95V

34

CAM_3.3V

33

CAM_3.3V

32

CAM_15V

MIC_GND

2

MIC_IN

1

5

H

TO LENS UNIT(2/2)

(PAGE 4-4)

30

FP-746 FLEXIBLE

29 28 27

12

USB_D+

11

USB_D-

10

USB_GND

9

USB_VBUS

8

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

7

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

6

A_OUT

5

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

4

AV_JACK_IN

3

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

2

V_OUT

1

J

KEY_AD3

23

PBLK

22

CA_F

21

CA_HD

20

VSUB_CONT

19

HR_DIR3A

13 12 11 10 9 8

K

2

D-

1

VCC

(USB)

26P

COM0

1

COM1

2

SEG0

3

SEG1

4

SEG2

5

SEG3

6

SEG4

7 8

SEG6

9

SEG7

10

SEG8

11

SEG9

12

SEG10

13

SEG11

14

SEG12

15

SEG13

16

SEG14

17

SEG15

18

SEG16

19

SEG17

20

SEG18

21

SEG19

22

SEG20

23

COM2

24

COM3

25

N.C.

26

LCD903 CHARACTER DISPLAY UNIT

HR_EN3 HR_DIR3B HR_DIR2A HR_EN2 HR_DIR2B IR_FILTER_EN IR_FILTER_IN MSHUT_DIR XIR_RST_SENS IRIS_RESET_SENS_AD XMF_SENS_LED

7

XFC_RST_SENS

6

ZOOM_POS_OUT

5

REG_GND

4

REG_GND

3

REG_GND

2

REG_GND

CN706

10P VSS

1

D+

ASHOE_JACK_IN

24

14

ID

REG_GND

KEY_AD4

15

GND

3

LANC_SIG

25

16

5 4

REG_GND

XSTRB_POPUP

17

UA-003 BOARD

CAM_-7.5V

26

18

J001 A/V OUT(MONO)

CN001

SEG5

I

MIC901

12P

USB_GND

CN201

31

SP901 SPEAKER

CN712 2P

CN707

F

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(TOP)

MIC

CN901

10

MS_BS

9

DATA1

8

SDIO/DATA0

7

DATA2

6

INT

5

DATA3

4

SCLK

3

VCC

2

VSS

1

REG_GND CN701

51P

CN702

51P

CN711

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

XFE_CS

XCAM_SCK

CAM_SO

XCAM_RST

XTG_CS

XCDS_CS

CAM_SI

EXT_STRB_CONT

REG_GND

CCD_TEMP

REG_GND

LENS_TEMP

REG_GND

CAM_DD_ON

MSHUT_REF

PD_LV

PRELAMP_AF_CONT

STRB_ON

IR_LED_ON

EXT_STRB_ON

HOT_STRB_ON

PRELAMP_AF_ON

MSHUT_EN

FC_RING_FGB

FC_RING_FGA

XFC_RST_LED

XCAM_DR_PS

XIRIS_RST_LED

XIR_SENS_LED

LANC_DC

XLANC_JACK_IN

SELF_TIMER_LED

XHSHOE_CONT

XLENS_EEP_WE

STRB_POPUP_DC_BRAKE

STRB_POPUP_DC_EN

XLENS_EEP_CS

STRB_POPUP_DC_DIR

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

REG_GND

TG_CLK

D_GND

MCKTG

D_GND

CA_AD13

CA_AD12

CA_AD11

CA_AD10

CA_AD09

CA_AD08

CA_AD07

CA_AD06

CA_AD05

CA_AD04

CA_AD03

CA_AD02

CA_AD01

CA_AD00

D_GND

D_GND

CLP_OB

51

50

49

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

L

21P

FP-749


FLEXIBLE

M 6 FP-747

3

FP-754

(PAGE 4-8)

FLEXIBLE

4

TO LENS UNIT(2/2)

TO LENS UNIT(2/2)

(PAGE 4-3)

N

FLEXIBLE

TO SY-096 BOARD (2/2)

(PAGE 4-4) 16

4-5

4-6





1

3

5

4

6

7

9

8

10

11

12

13

15

14

16

18

17

A CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID)

15

A01

XINPACK

36

16

XINPACK

A02

35

17

A02

XWAIT

34

18

XWAIT

A03

33

19

A03

RESET

32

20

RESET

A04

31

21

A04

XCSEL

29

A06

28

CF-097 BOARD

VCC

26 25

VCC

24

IREQ

23

A07

22

VCC

29

IREQ

30

A07

2

REG_GND

4

5

STBYB

REG_GND

6

5

STBYB

REG_GND

7

SRT

REG_GND

8

7

SRT

REG_GND

8

9

OE

KEY_AD2

10

9

OE

KEY_AD2

10

XIOWR

A09

18

34

A09

XIORD

17

35

XIORD

XVS1

16

36

XOE

A10

15

37

A10

XCE2

14

38

XCE2

39

12

40

D15

D07

11

41

D07

42

9

43

D06

D13

8

44

D13

D05

7

45

D05

D12

6

46

D12

D04

5

47

D04

D11

4

48

D11 D03

D03

3

49

2

50

GND

1

51

12

13

MCLK

REG_GND

14 13

MCLK

REG_GND

14

15

REG_GND

REG_GND

16 15

REG_GND

REG_GND

16

17

HCNT

XACCESS_LED

18 17

XACCESS_LED

18

19

REG_GND

GSRT

20 19

REG_GND

GSRT

20

21

VG

GPCK

22 21

VG

GPCK

22

23

REG_GND

GRES

24 23

REG_GND

GRES

24

25

VB

27

REG_GND

29

VR

HCNT

31

REG_GND

33

VSH(5V)

35

VDD(3V)

37

VSS

39

VGL

41

C2

43

VSS

45

VDC(15V)

26 25

VB

BL_L IN2-

28 27

REG_GND

BL_H BL_REG

30 29

VR

26 28

BL_H BL_REG

30

BL_THL

32 31

REG_GND

34 33

VSH(5V)

XCF_COVER_OPEN

36 35

VDD(3V)

XPROGRAM_DIAL_B

38 37

VSS

XPROGRAM_DIAL_A

40 39

VGL

XPROGRAM_DIAL_A

40

GUI_UP

42 41

C2

KEY_AD1

44 43

VSS

GUI_DOWN

46 45

VDC(15V)

47

VGH(15V)

49

VDD(3V)

EVER_3.0v

48 47

VGH(15V)

CHARGE_LED/XSTRB_LED

50 49

VDD(3V)

BL_THL

32

BL_THH(_2.95V)

34

XCF_COVER_OPEN

36

XPROGRAM_DIAL_B

38

GUI_UP

42

KEY_AD1

44

GUI_DOWN

46

D_2.95V

48


50

REG_GND

LANC_SI

11

2

REG_GND

13

XSTRB_FULL

REG_GND

14

14

REG_GND

XSTRB_FULL

13

15

REG_GND

16

16

REG_GND

STRB_CHG

15

DDCON_SCK

REG_GND

18

18

REG_GND

DDCON_SCK

17

19

DDCON_SO

REG_GND

20

20

REG_GND

DDCON_SO

19

1

ACV_UNREG

21

XCS_DDCON

REG_GND

22

22

REG_GND

XCS_DDCON

21

2

ACV_GND

23

SYS_DD_ON

REG_GND

24

24

REG_GND

SYS_DD_ON

23

3

BATT/XEXT

25

BATT_SIG

REG_GND

26

26

REG_GND

BATT_SIG

25

27

BATT/XEXT

REG_GND

28

28

REG_GND

BATT/XEXT

27

29

FAST_CHARGE

REG_GND

30

30

REG_GND

FAST_CHARGE

29

31

INIT_CHARGE

REG_GND

32

32

REG_GND

INIT_CHARGE

31

33

XRST_SW

REG_GND

34

34

REG_GND

XRST_SW

33

35

VL_3V

DD_P_5V

36

36

DD_P_5V

37

RST_VIN

DD_P_5V

38

39

EVER_3.0V

DD_P_5V

40

41

BL_UNREG

DD_P_5V

J901 DC IN

FP-748 BOARD

STRB_CHG

17 CN001 3P

VL_3V

35

38

DD_P_5V

RST_VIN

37

40

DD_P_5V

EVER_3.0V

39

42

42

DD_P_5V

BL_UNREG

41

BATT_UNREG BATT_SIG


43

ACV_UNREG

DD_P_5V

44

44

DD_P_5V

ACV_UNREG

43

45

BATT_UNREG

DD_2.95V

46

46

DD_2.95V

BATT_UNREG

45

47

DD_15.5V

DD_2.95V

48

48

DD_2.95V

DD_15.5V

47

49

DD_1.8V

DD_2.95V

50

50

DD_2.95V

DD_1.8V

49

51

DD_-7.5V

DD_2.95V

52

52

DD_2.95V

DD_-7.5V

51

53

DD_4.7V

DD_3.3V

54

54

DD_3.3V

DD_4.7V

53

55

DD_4.2V

DD_3.3V

56

56

DD_3.3V

DD_4.2V

55

57

DD_4.2V

DD_3.3V

58

58

DD_3.3V

DD_4.2V

57

59

DD_4.2V

DD_3.3V

60

60

DD_3.3V

DD_4.2V

59

XSTRB

D_2.95V

1

KEY_AD1

GUI_DOWN

2

VSS

VGL

C2

C1

VSS

VDC (15V)

VGH (15V)

VDD (3V)

GRES

GPCK

GSRT

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

ND901 BACKLIGHT

6 TO SY-096 BOARD (1/2)

(PAGE 4-6)

M 16

4-7

GUI_UP

VDD (3V)

13

LCD901 2.5INCH LCD UNIT

BATT_GND

L

3

VSH (5V)

12

9

7

12

VR

LANC_SO

VB

REG_GND

11

10

VG

10

9

REG_GND

24P

10

LANC_SO

HCNT

9

MCLK

LANC_SIG

8

LANC_DC

REG_GND

OE

REG_GND

8

7

6

8

6

6

REG_GND

SRT

REG_GND

LANC_SIG

STBYB

5

LANC_DC

7

5

3

5

VBC

1

XLANC_IC_ON

4

XLANC_PWR_ON

REG_GND

VCOM

B TO B

REG_GND

4

3

60P

2

2

CN002 60P B TO B

1

CN001 60P B TO B

N.C.

4

9


CN001

1 BL_THH(_2.95V)

2

REG_GND

2

REG_GND

XLANC_IC_ON

BL_H BL_REG

CN751

XLANC_PWR_ON

3

BL_THL

B TO B

1

HARNESS


BL_L IN2-

BL_THH(_2.95V)

N.C.

60P

CN003 10P

CN004 6P

12

CN002 3P

REG_GND

51P

REG_GND

HARNESS

REG_GND

GND

LANC_SI

(PAGE 4-2)

12 11

XCD1

CN451

51P

REG_GND

D14

D06

XCD1

REG_GND

XCE1

D15

10

6

XWE

33

13

SY-096 BOARD(2/2)

11

3

KEY_AD0_L5

VBC

BL_L IN2-

1

28

DC_300V

2

VCOM

3

5

2

VCC

1

1

1

4

6

3

N.C.

4

VL_3V

5

REG_GND

REG_GND

6 REG_GND

XRST_SW

2P

VCC

27

31

B TO B

50P

2

REG_GND

DD-204 BOARD CN601

CN602 6P

26

19

FLEXIBLE

I

21

CN002 KEY_AD0_L5

VCC

XIOWR

LR-018

H

K

A06

A08

CN101

J

24

32

G

TO ST-088 BOARD CN502

XCSEL

20

D14

CN401

23

25

FP-756

VCC VCC

XCE1

1

27

B TO B

VBC

A05

A08

F

S001

22

50P

VCOM

3

11

XWE

RESET

30

CN703 1

1

37

XSTRB

XREG

A01

2

A00

14

D_2.95V

13

38

E


10

39

4

XSPKR

A00 XREG

3

12

4

40

KEY_AD1

D00

XSPKR

GUI_DOWN

XSTSCHG

11

REG_GND

10

41

DIAL_A

42

D00

5

D01

XSTSCHG

5

9

GUI_UP

43

DIAL_B

D08

D01

6

D02

8

7

7

44

6

45

D08

7

D09

D02

DIAL_A

XIOIS16

6

REG_GND

D10

5

46

XCF_COVER_OPEN

4

47

REG_GND

48

D09

8

D10 XIOIS16

A05

CN103 50P COMPACT FLASH MICRO DRIVE

CN001 10P

8

XCD2

9

GND

3

10

2

49

DIAL_B

50

REG_GND

GND XCD2

XCF_COVER_OPEN

GND

3

D

1

4

C

51

FLEXIBLE

B

GND

4-8

DSC-F828

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS Link DD-204 BOARD (DC/DC CONVERTER)

LB-091 BOARD (EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT)

LR-018 BOARD (BATTERY, RESET SW)

CF-097 BOARD (CF CARD CONNECTOR)

ST-088 BOARD (FLASH CONTROL)

FP-756 FLEXIBLE BOARD

LS-067 BOARD (AF LASER)

SW-410 BOARD (FUNCTION KEY)

MT-067 BOARD (FLASH MOTOR)

AJ-007 BOARD (JACK)

SI-037 BOARD (FLASH, IR LED)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)

AS-050 FLEXIBLE BOARD

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID)

UA-003 BOARD (AV, USB JACK)


COMMON NOTE FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS


THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS (In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block) (For schematic diagrams) • All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µ Link µF. 50 V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums. • Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted. kΩ=1000 Ω, MΩ=1000 kΩ. • Caution when replacing chip parts. New parts must be attached after removal of chip. Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat. • Some chip part will be indicated as follows. Example C541 L452 22U 10UH TA A 2520

1. Connection Pattern box

About 20cm

Kinds of capacitor

Front of the lens

Temperature characteristics External dimensions (mm) • Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate that they are not used. In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated. • Parts with * differ according to the model/destination. Refer to the mount table for each function. • All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, unless otherwise noted. • Signal name XEDIT → EDIT PB/XREC → PB/REC • 2: non flammable resistor • 5: fusible resistor • C: designation • A: B+ Line • B: B– Line • J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE. • C: adjustment for repair. • A: VIDEO SIGNAL (ANALOG) • A: AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG) • A: VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG) • A: VIDEO/AUDIO/SERVO SIGNAL (ANALOG) • A: SERVO SIGNAL • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. (Measuring conditions voltage and waveform) • Voltages and waveforms are measured between the measurement points and ground when camera shoots color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values and reference waveforms. (VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used) • Voltage values change depending upon input impedance of VOM used.)

A B

Red Blue

White Magenta

H Cyan Green

Yellow

2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig. a and the Fig. b can be obtain.

A=B

B A

Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)

Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV)

When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name. Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

4-9



2

3

DD-204 BOARD

4

6

7

ACV_UNREG

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

ACV_GND

2

BATT/XEXT

3

B

17

18

19

20

21

D003 MA8120-TX

LND001

8.1

R006 XX

1

R014 470k

STATIC_GND

R019 10 R022 1k

8.3

R-0.4 P-0.1 Q003 2SB1122-ST-TD-E

1.4A/32V

F002

1.4A/32V

F003

1.4A/32V

F004

1.4A/32V

F006

1.4A/32V

R403 15k 1/16W

R023 6800 8.3

C067 22u 16V TA B

0

D004 1SS357-TPH3

Q004 DTC144EMT2L

1

BATT_SIG

2

BATT_GND

3

S

STRB_CHG

C070 22u 16V TA B

R6.6 P6.9 3

7.9 R016

0

1M

Q001 SSM3K03FE(TPL3) SWITCH

R401 10k

Q407 H3205-SONY-TL-E SWITCH 0

Q007 H5802-TL-E SWITCHING

6

1

5

3

4

8.3

0

C402 0.1u 10V

R402 47k

C038 10u B

2

8.3

0

L002 22uH

8.3 C030 1u

470k

R005

Q401 2SK3018-T106 SWITCHING

1.9

4 5

CN002 3P BATT_UNREG

C069 22u 16V TA B

1.4A/32V

F005 HARNESS

C068 22u 16V TA B

C404 0.022u 25V

R404 120

C401 22u 16V

2 7.9

C005 0.022u

D002 MAZT082H08S0

Q003,004 CHARGE ON SWITCH

R405 4700

XSTRB_FULL

2.9

0 4

5

D

1 L010 1uH

2 1

5.3 3


C039 10u B

8.3 C031 1u

3

0

0

Q402 XP1211-TXE SWITCH

L003 0uH

4 5

8.2

C405 250u 315V (FLASH)

D403 RB160L-40TE25

D401 MA111-(K8).SO


2

C406 1u 10V

C065 33u 10V

E

3

4

2 1 4 5

C019 0.0068u

5

3

2

1

LANC_SIG

RT

DATA_IN

CS

WAKE_UP

4 5

R4.6/P4.4

C042 10u B

CN601

C066 47uF 6.3V

8.2

R4.6 P4.4

R6.6/P6.9

2

REG_GND

4

5

LANC_DC

REG_GND

7

LANC_SIG

REG_GND

8

9

LANC_SO

REG_GND

10

11

LANC_SI

REG_GND

12

6

1

5.6

5.6

5.6

XSTRB_FULL

REG_GND

14

15

STRB_CHG

REG_GND

16

17

DDCON_SCK

REG_GND

18

19

DDCON_SO

REG_GND

20

21

XCS_DDCON

REG_GND

22

23

SYS_DD_ON

REG_GND

24

25

BATT_SIG

REG_GND

26

27

BATT/XEXT

REG_GND

28

29

FAST_CHARGE

REG_GND

30

31

INIT_CHARGE

REG_GND

32

33

XRST_SW

REG_GND

34

35

VL_3V

DD_P_5V

36

37

RST_VIN

DD_P_5V

38

39

EVER_3.0V

DD_P_5V

40

41

BL_UNREG

DD_P_5V

42

43

ACV_UNREG

DD_P_5V

44

45

BATT_UNREG

DD_2.95V

46

47

DD_15.5V

DD_2.95V

48

DD_1.8V

DD_2.95V

50

DD_-7.5V

DD_2.95V

52

53

DD_4.7V

MD_3.3V

54

55

DD_4.2V

MD_3.3V

56

57

DD_4.2V

MD_3.3V

58

59

DD_4.2V

MD_3.3V

60

13 STRB_CHG

C043 10u B

8.3 C035 1u

3

R039 2.2

XSTRB_FULL


4 5

7.6

LANC_SI

L007 22uH

3

8.3

DDCON_SCK DDCON_SO XCS_DDCON

8.3 SYS_DD_ON 2

6.9 C027 10u

2.2 0.2

6.9 Q006 MCH3310-TL-E SWITCH

LANC_DC

2 1

LANC_SI

LANC_SIG

D006 1SS357-TPH3 XLANC_PWR_ON

C028 10u

BATT_SIG BATT/XEXT C045 2.2u L001 47uH C029 2.2u B

FAST_CHARGE

Q015 LS5U17LP-TL SWITCHING 4.7

3

4

2

5

2

3

1

4

INIT_CHARGE

D010 1SS383(T5RSONY1)

RST_VIN

8.0 4.7 C053 1u

IC004

D011 1SS383(T5RSONY1)

-7.5V REG

C058 1u

VSS

IC004

-VIN

2

C046 4.7u B

R050 XX

49

-VOUT

1

C044 4.7u B

3

XLANC_IC_ON

XX

XX

XX C010

C017

C015

SYS_DD_ON

0.1u

0.1u C011

C013

0.047u

0.022u C008

C009

REG_GND

XLANC_IC_ON

LANC_SO 4.1

5.4

R-7.4 P-7.5

RST_VIN

XLANC_PWR_ON

3 LANC_SIG

3.8

LANC_SO

R036 100k

1 XLANC_IC_ON LANC_DC

3.5

K

60P

XLANC_PWR_ON

6.7

1

0.2

0

7.6

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

L006 10uH Q011 H5802-TL-E SWITCHING

8.3 C034 1u

3.5

R040 470

DATA_OUT

XCTL2

RESET

OUTC3

CS

VIN

SEL

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

RST

VCONT

2.4

R009 4700

SENSE

REG_3V

XX R047

R045 XX

R046

J

XX

C004 0.1u

CLK

VOUT

0

DIN

LANC_DC

VRO

0.7

VCC1

3.3

33k

VCC0

LD

3.0

R012

C003 0.1u

IC001 MB44A120APFV-G-BND-ERE1

IN6

3.4

3.0

OUT2 OUT1

IN5

CTL1

3.0

DDCON_SCK

IN4

VREF

0

DDCON_SO

OUT3

DC/DC CONVERTER

VBAT

3.0

XCS_DDCON

IN3

3.0

4.1

OUT4

IC001

IN2

CDET

3.3

IN1

OUT5

GND

4.7

OUT6

2.5

3.0

3.3 R8.3 P6.7 3

-INS8

2.9

5.3

C041 10u B


2 1

6

L005 22uH

3

2 1

7

C040 10u B


2 1

R031 22k

R028 68k

C014 2200p

R020 68k

C012 4700p

C016 100p

8

out7

CS

1.5 R044 100k

Q014 HN1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) SWITCHING

I

9

GND0

VR

1.5

3

8.3 C033 1u

0.6 FB1 1.2 -INE1

1.2

C006 0.047u 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

0

XX

XX

XX

0

R013 4700

R011

1

R010

3 R042 47k ± 0.5%

R004

2.1

R007

2

R002

XX

6

R001

4 5

(PAGE 4-14)

4.7

R0.8/P0.4 FB2 1.2 -INE2 1.2 +INE2 1.2 -INE3 0.7 FB3 0.9 FB4 1.2 -INE4 1.1 +INE5 1.1 -INE5 R0.4/P0.6 FB5 1.3 +INE6 1.3 -INE6 0.8 FB6 0.8 FB7 1.2 -INE7 2.5 DTC6

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 R043 10k

1.5

TO ST-088 BOARD CN502

8.3 C032 1u

R032 12k ± 0.5%

3.8 C007 0.001u

G

H

REG_GND

L004 22uH

R033 68k

R018 62k ± 0.5% R024 22k R025 22k

R017 10k ± 0.5%

5.4

R034 R035 120k 18k ± 0.5% ± 0.5%

R048 10k ± 0.5% R049 10k ± 0.5%

C018 0.0033u

F

3.0

DC_300V

2 3.0

R029 15k ± 0.5%

R030 1200 ± 0.5%

4 5

D001 MA132WK-(K8).SO

2.1

2P

1

2

1

CN401

R041 10k ± 0.5%

22

D402 HAU160C030TP

L401 2.2uH

8.3 8.3 6 5 7 8 0

3

T401 INVERTER TRASFORMER F001

Q002 HAT1054R-EL SWITCH 7.9 4

3

R008 22k

R003 XX

J901

1

C002 2 0.1 4

1

INIT_CHARGE

LF001

3P

FB001 0uH

C

8

2 1

HARNESS

FAST_CHARGE

C001 0.1

CN001

BATT/XEXT

BATT_SIG

XX MARK:NO MOUNT

DC IN

5

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE R :REC MODE P :PB MODE

DC/DC CONVERTER

A

LR-018 BOARD

For Schematic Diagram • Refer to page 4-49 for printed wiring board.

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 1

DD-204 BOARD

51

XC62KS0PXXMR

R-7.4 P-7.6

C062 4.7u 10V

TO SY-096 BOARD(10/10) CN751 THROUGH THE ( FP-748 BOARD )

L

(PAGE 4-43 of LEVEL3)

LR-018 BOARD BATTERY, RESET SW

6P

S001

RESET


M 16

CN602

6P

6

REG_GND

REG_GND

6

5

XRST_SW

XRST_SW

5

4

REG_GND

REG_GND

4

3

VL_3V

2

REG_GND

1

N.C.

VL_3V

3

REG_GND

2

N.C.

1

D007 MA8082-(K8).S0


4-11

4-12


DD-204/LR-018


ST-088 BOARD LS-067 BOARD MT-067 BOARD SI-037 BOARD

For Schematic Diagram • Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board of ST-088 and MT-067. • Refer to page 4-52 for printed wiring board of LS-067. • Refer to page 4-53 for printed wiring board of SI-037.

2

1

A

3

5

4

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

LS-067 BOARD AF LASER S001 (FLASH OPEN DETECT)

ST-088 BOARD

D003 MA8082-(K8).S0 D002 MA8082-(K8).S0 D001 AF LASER UNIT Note

B

FLASH CONTROL 6P

2 3 1

D004 SML-310LTT86 (Self-timer)

CN504

6

XSTRB_POPUP

5

REG_GND

4

PD_OUT

3

LD_OUT

2

REG_GND

1

SELF_TIMER_LED

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

6P XSTRB_POPUP

6

REG_GND

5

PD_OUT

4

LD_OUT

3

REG_GND

2

SELF_TIMER_LED

1

MT-067 BOARD

AS-050 FLEXIBLE is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.

FLASH MOTOR LND001

C CN501

Note:Adustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.

D

CN503

22P

( E

)

STRB_POPUP+

STRB_POPUP+

1

STRB_POPUP+

21

2

STRB_POPUP+

STRB_POPUP+

2

STRB_POPUP-

20

3

STRB_POPUP-

STRB_POPUP-

3

STRB_POPUP-

19

4

STRB_POPUP-

STRB_POPUP-

4

SELF_TIMER_LED

18

5

LANC_SIG

LANC_SIG

5

10

LANC_SIG

LANC_SIG

10

XSTRB_POPUP

17

6

REG_GND

REG_GND

6

9

REG_GND

REG_GND

9

7

N.C.

N.C.

7

8

N.C.

N.C.

8

8

HOT

HOT

8

7

HOT

HOT

7

REG_GND

16

LANC_SIG

15

REG_GND

14

PD_OUT

13

FB501 0uH FB502 0uH D504 03P4J-T1 C501 0.01u

FB503 0uH

R503 1k

FB504 0uH

LND002

FLEXIBLE

9

HOT

HOT

9

6

HOT

HOT

6

10

N.C.

N.C.

10

5

N.C.

N.C.

5

12

11

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

11

4

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

4

11

12

XASHOE_JACK_IN

XASHOE_JACK_IN

12

3

XASHOE_JACK_IN

XASHOE_JACK_IN

3

XASHOE_JACK_IN

10

13

SHOE_GND

SHOE_GND

13

2

SHOE_GND

SHOE_GND

2

9

14

SHOE_GND

SHOE_GND

14

1

SHOE_GND

SHOE_GND

1

8

15

REG_GND

REG_GND

15

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

7

16

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS

16

CAM_P_5V

6

STRB_ON

D_2.95V

5

HOT_STRB_ON

4

REG_GND

3

REG_GND

2

REG_GND

1

FB505 0uH

D502 MAZT082H08S0

CN502

STATIC_GND

REG_GND

2

DC_300V

CN505

Q502-504 LIGHT LEVEL CONTROL

5.0

C505 10u 10V

Q502 UN9111J-(K8).SO

R507 1M

5.0

0

D505 XX

IC502 IGPT

C506 0.047u 16V

R514 10k

C502 0.1

IC502 CY25AAJ-8-T13

R513 150

0

R505 47

1

8

2

7

0 3 4

6

C503 0.047u 250V R280 P272

5

Q504 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO

0.7 R509 56 1/4W Q501 2SC5658T2LQ/R IR LED DRIVE

I

6 0 4.3

3

2

5

0 R506 1M

0 1 R508 470

C504 0.01u 250V

D507 RR255L-400TE25

4 Q503 RN1902FE(TPLR3)

D506 02DZ10-TPH3

R511 100k

2P

1

R512 0

R510 56 1/4W

TO DD-204 BOARD CN401

4-13

6,7 4 3 1

FLASH, IR LED LND005

LND004

(PAGE 4-12)

STATIC_GND

STATIC_GND

26P

26P

1

IR_LED_A

IR_LED_A

1

2

IR_LED_K

IR_LED_K

2

3

N.C.

N.C.

3

4

N.C.

N.C.

4

5

N.C.

N.C.

5

6

XE_H

XE_H

6

7

XE_H

XE_H

7

8

XE_H

XE_H

8

LND001

9

XE_H

XE_H

9

XE_H

10

N.C.

N.C.

10

11

N.C.

N.C.

11

12

N.C.

N.C.

12

13

TRIGGER

TRIGGER

13

14

TRIGGER

TRIGGER

14

15

N.C.

N.C.

15

16

N.C.

N.C.

16

LND002

17

N.C.

N.C.

17

XE_L

18

REG_GND

REG_GND

18

19

REG_GND

REG_GND

19

20

N.C.

N.C.

20

21

N.C.

N.C.

21

22

N.C.

N.C.

22

23

XE_L

XE_L

23

24

XE_L

XE_L

24

25

XE_L

XE_L

25

26

XE_L

XE_L

26


ST-088/LS-067/MT-067/SI-037/AS-050

10 9

SI-037 BOARD

LND503

H

2

S001 (MOTOR POSITION DETECT)

D503 MA8082-(K8).S0

D501 XX

D508 1SS357-TPH3

16

10P

CN001 10P

LD_OUT

G

J

AS-050

-

STRB-

EXT_STRB_ON_CN

LENS UNIT is replaced as a block. So that these PRINTED WIRING BOARD and SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM are omitted.


M910 FLASH MOTOR

M

1

IR_LED_ON

F

+

16P

22

LENS UNIT THROUGH THE FP-750 FLEXIBLE

STRB+

16P

STRB_POPUP+

4-14

D001 CL-330IRS-X-TU (Infrared ray emitter)

LND003 TRIGGER L001

XENON TUBE

ACCESSORY SHOE


UA-003 BOARD

LB-091 BOARD


3

2

1

4

6

5

7

R002 0

UA-003 BOARD

A

R003

AV,USB JACK

FB001

1k

0uH

J001

R004 0

D004 MA111-(K8).S0

B

D003 MAZT082H08S0

D001 MAZT082H08S0

D002 MA8082-(K8).S0

A/V OUT(MONO)

12P V_OUT

1

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

2

AV_JACK_IN

3

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

4

R006 0

LND001

C

TO SY-096 BOARD(9/10) CN707


D005 XX

A_OUT

5

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

6

GND_GUARD(REG_GND)

7

USB_VBUS

8

USB_GND

9

USB_D-

10

R001

USB_D+

11

USB_GND

12

1

3

2

4

STATIC_GND

5P

0 1

VCC

2

D-

CN001

LF001

3

D+

4

ID

5

GND

(USB)

R005 0

D SIGNAL PATH VIDEO SIGNAL

16

CHROMA

Y

Y/CHROMA

AUDIO SIGNAL

REC PB

2

1

3

5

4

6

LB-091 BOARD A

EVF,EVF BACKLIGHT CN001

22P

B TO SY-096 BOARD(8/10) CN901


C

D

VDD

1

18

VDD

VSS

2

17

VSS

RCG

3

16

RCG

VST

4

15

VST

VCK

5

14

VCK

STB

6

13

STB

ENB

7

12

ENB

DWN

8

11

DWN

RGT

9

10

RGT

HST

10

9

HST

HCK2

11

8

HCK2

HCK1

12

7

HCK1

TEST

13

6

TEST

B

14

5

B

R

15

4

R

G

16

3

G

COM

17

2

N.C.

N.C.

18

1

COM

EVF_LED_A

19

N.C.

20

EVF_LED_K

21

N.C.

22

D001 NSCW455T-TC9 (BACKLIGHT)

18P

LCD902 COLOR EVF UNIT

SIGNAL PATH VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA

Y

Y/CHROMA

REC

16

4-15

4-16

UA-003/LB-091


CF-097 PRINTED WIRING BOARD


3

2

A

4

6

5

FP-756

8

GND

1

51

GND

GND

51

GND

2

50

GND

GND

50

XCD2

3

49

XCD2

XCD2

49

D10

4

48

D10

D10

48

XIOIS16

5

47

XIOIS16

XIOIS16

47

R102 47

D09

6

46

D09

D09

46

D02

7

45

D02

D02

45

D08

8

44

D08

D08

44

XSTSCHG

9

43

D01

10

42

XSTSCHG

D00

11

41

D00

XSPKR

12

40

XSPKR

A00

13

39

A00

D01

43

XSTSCHG

42

R103 47 R105 47

CF_D10

14

38

XREG

A01

15

37

A01

XINPACK

16

36

XINPACK

A02

17

35

A02

XWAIT

18

34

XWAIT

A03

19

33

A03

CF_D2 CF_D8

CF_D8

CF_D1

CF_D1

CF_D0

RESET

A04

21

31


A05

22

30

D08

43

D01

42

XSTSCHG

41

D00

XSPKR

40

40

XSPKR

A00

39

39

A00

38

XREG

37

A01

36

XINPACK

35

A02

34

XWAIT

33

A03

32

RESET

31

A04

30

XVS2

29

A05

28

XCSEL

27

A06

26

VCC

25

VCC

24

IREQ

23

A07

22

XWE

21

A08

20

XIOWR

19

A09

18

XIORD

17

XOE

16

XVS1

15

A10

14

XCE2

13

XCE1

12

D15

11

D07

10

D14

9

D06

8

D13

7

D05

6

D12

5

D04

4

D11

3

D03

2

XCD1

CF_A0

XREG

38

A01

37

XINPACK

36

A02

35

XWAIT

34

A03

33

R110 47

R111 47

RESET

32

A04

A04

31

A05

A05

30

25.50

CF_A0 CF_XREG

CF_A1

CF_A1

CF_A2

CF_A2 CF_XWAIT CF_A3 R104 0

CF_RESET

C104 XX CL101

CF_A4

CF_A5 CF_A5 XCSEL

23

29

XCSEL

A06

24

28

VCC

25

VCC

26

XCSEL

29

A06

A06

28

27

VCC

VCC

27

26

VCC

VCC

26

CF_A6

VCC

27

25

VCC

VCC

25

VCC

28

24

VCC

VCC

24

FB101 0uH

CF_A6 C101 0.1u B C102 0.1u B

CF_IREQ IREQ

29

23

IREQ

IREQ

23

A07

30

22

A07

A07

22

R112 47

CF_IREQ CF_A7

E

CF_XWE XWE

31

21

XWE

XWE

A08

32

20

A08

XIOWR

33

19

XIOWR

A08

20

XIOWR

19

R113 47

CF_XIOWR CF_A9

A09

34

18

A09

XIORD

35

17

XIORD

XOE

36

16

XOE

CF_XWE CF_A8

21 CF_A8

A09

18

XIORD

17

XOE

16

R114 47

CF_XIORD

CF_XIOWR CF_A9 CF_XIORD CF_XOE CL102

CF_XOE CF_A10

F

A10

37

15

A10

XCE2

38

14

XCE1

39

13

A10

15

XCE2

XCE2

14

XCE1

XCE1

13

D15

40

12

D15

D15

12

D07

41

11

D07

D07

11

D14

42

10

D14

D14

10

D06

43

9

D06

D06

9

D13

44

8

D13

D13

R116 47 R117 47

CF_XCE1

R118 47

CF_D15

R119 47 R120 47 R121 47 R122 47

G

45

7

D05

D05

7

D12

46

6

D12

D12

6

D04

47

5

D04

D04

5

D11

48

4

D11

D11

D03

49

3

D03

XCD1

50

2

GND

51

1

CF_D7 CF_D14 CF_D6 CF_D13

4

D03

3

XCD1

XCD1

2

GND

GND

1

R124 47

CF_D5 CF_D12

R125 47

CF_D4

R126 47

CF_D11

R127 47

CF_D3 CF_XCD1

CN101

CF_A10 CF_XCE2 CF_XCE1 CF_D15 CF_D7

CF_D6 CF_D13 CF_D5 CF_D12 CF_D4 CF_D11 CF_D3 CF_XCD1 C103 47u 6.3V TA B

51P

H

R101 0

FP-756 FLEXIBLE is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.

STATIC GND

VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA

I

D101 MA111-(K8).S0

LND101

SIGNAL PATH Y

Y/CHROMA

AUDIO SIGNAL

REC PB 16

4-17

1.26

CF_D14

8 R123 47

D05

CF_XCE2

COMPACT FLASH MICRO DRIVE

CF_A7

4-18

1

GND CN103

1


CF-097/FP-756

D02

44

41

CF_A4

D

D09

45

D00

CF_A3 32

XIOIS16

46

CF_D0

CF_RESET 20

D10

47 CF_D2

CF_XWAIT

RESET

XCD2

48 CF_D9

CF_XREG XREG

GND

49 CF_XIOIS16

CF_D9

R107 47

R108 47

50 CF_D10

R106 47

R109 47

C

12

CF_XCD2

CF_XIOIS16

D01

11

CF CARD CONNECTER

51P

CF_XCD2

B

10

9

CF-097 BOARD

FLEXIBLE

51P

7

GND

2

1

GND

50P


SW-410 BOARD

AJ-007 BOARD

For Schematic Diagram • Refer to page 4-57 for printed wiring board of SW-410. • Refer to page 4-56 for printed wiring board of AJ-007.

2

1

4

3

6

S001

SW-410 BOARD

OPEN(FLASH)

FUNCTION KEY

A

XX MARK:NO MOUNT CN001

(

THROUGH THE FP-751 FLEXIBLE

S005

S002 6P

LENS UNIT

B

5

)

N.C.

1

KEY_AD3

2

KEY_AD4

3

N.C.

4

REG_GND

5

N.C.

6

(Metering mode)

(FLASH) R004 1500

R001 1200

S003


S006 /BRK(Burst/Bracket)

(MACRO)

D001 XX

R005 6800

R002 3300 LND001

S004

STATIC GND

C

D002 XX

FOCUS (AUTO/MANUAL)

R006 XX

R003 22k S007 NIGHTSHOT/ NIGHTFRAMING

D 16

2

1

3

4

5

6

AJ-007 BOARD JACK

A

XX MARK:NO MOUNT CN201

LENS UNIT

( B

THROUGH THE AJ-006 FLEXIBLE

)

6P

LANC_GND

1

LANC_SIG

2

LANC_GND

3

LANC_DC

4

XLANC_JACK_IN

5

ACC_STRB_ON

6

FB204

0uH

FB205

0uH

J201 FB203

0uH

FB202

0uH

ACC(Accessory)

C201 0.001u


D202 MAZT082H08S0

C204 0.001u D203 MAZT082H08S0

FB201 0uH

D201 0 Note

Resistor is mounted to the location where D201 is printed.

C

LND201 STATIC GND

16

4-19

4-20

SW-410/AJ-007


1

2

3

4

5

6


7

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK A

2

1

3

5

4

6

7 D001 SML-310LTT86

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

(TOP)

A

D001 TLGU1002(TPX1,SONY)

XX MARK:NO MOUNT

(Flash)

(MID) XX MARK:NO MOUNT

(POWER)

8

S006

S002 POWER

(Multi-Selector)

12P EVER_3.0V

1

XPWR_LED_ON

2

XPWR_ON

3

GND

4

XAE_LOCK_ON

5

XSHTR_ON

6

SCN

(PAGE 4-41 of LEVEL 3)

C

GND

7

MODE_DIAL1

8

MODE_DIAL0

9

KEY_AD0_L2

10

GND

11

XMINILCD_BL_ON

12

1 3

(1st) 2 (2nd) 4

SETUP

(MOVIE)

R004 6800 8

B

R005 1.2k

(AUTO)

A

4

R002 6.8k

R008 1200

R007 1.5k

R010 3.3k

S

R007 1200

S002

2

1 P

D005 XX

D006 SML311EBT (MINI LCD BACK LIGHT)

R013 XX

S010

MENU

C

S007

S003

(CENTER) (Multi-selector)

(Multi-selector)

R002

3300

R003

6800

D003 MA8082-(K8).S0

(Multi-selector)

S004

S014

S005

D WB (White balance)

+

Command dial

LND002 STATIC_GND D002 MAZT082H08S0

(Exposure)

(Display window backlight)

STATIC_GND

(Delete)

S008

D007 XX

LND001

S012 AE LOCK

R009 1500

S003

16

3300 R010 3300

7

(PB)

R012 22

D

(MANUAL) R006 1500

3

R011 XX

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(TOP) is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.

M 6 R005 5

9

D002 MAZT082H08S0


S001 (SHATTER)

D003 MA8082-(K8).S0

B

D004 MAZT082H08S0

LND001 STATIC_GND

D005 MA8082-(K8).S0

E

CN001

10P XSTRB_LED

TO CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER) CN003

(PAGE 4-24)

F

2

GUI_DOWN

3

KEY_AD1

4

GUI_UP

5

REG_GND

6

DIAL_A

7

DIAL_B

8

XCF_COVER_OPEN

16

1

D_2.95V

REG_GND

S015

9

OPEN(CF)

10

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(MID) is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)/(MID)

4-21

4-22


2

1

3

4


5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK A

(UNDER)

S006

XX MARK:NO MOUNT

CF("Memory Stick"/CF card)


(PAGE 4-41 of LEVEL3) CN002

B CN001

C LCD901 2.5INCH LCD UNIT

D

E

24P

50P

B TO B

1

VCOM

KEY_AD0_L5

2

3

VBC

REG_GND

4

5

STBYB

REG_GND

6

7

SRT

REG_GND

8

9

OE

KEY_AD2

10


11

REG_GND

REG_GND

12

VCOM

1

13

MCLK

REG_GND

14

VBC

2

15

REG_GND

REG_GND

16

STBYB

3

17

HCNT

XACCESS_LED

18

SRT

4

19

REG_GND

GSRT

20

OE

5

21

VG

GPCK

22

MCLK

6

23

REG_GND

GRES

24

6

BL_L IN2-

HCNT

7

25

VB

VG

8

27

REG_GND

VB

9

29

VR


6P

CN004

26

5

N.C.

BL_L IN2-

28

4

BL_H BL_REG

BL_H BL_REG

30

3

BL_THL

BL_THL

32

2

N.C.

BL_THH(_2.95V)

34

1

BL_THH(_2.95V)

XCF_COVER_OPEN

36

XPROGRAM_DIAL_B

38

ND901 BACKLIGHT

VR

10

31

REG_GND

VSH (5V)

11

33

VSH(5V)

VDD (3V)

12

35

VDD(3V)

VSS

13

37

VSS

VGL

14

39

VGL

XPROGRAM_DIAL_A

40

C2

15

41

C2

GUI_UP

42

C1

16

43

VSS

KEY_AD1

44

VSS

17

45

VDC(15V)

GUI_DOWN

46

VDC (15V)

18

47

VGH(15V)

D_2.95V

48

VGH (15V)

19

49

VDD(3V)


50

VDD (3V)

20

9

XCF_COVER_OPEN

21

8

DIAL_B

GRES

22

7

DIAL_A

GPCK

23

6

REG_GND

GSRT

24

5

GUI_UP

TO CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID) CN001

4

KEY_AD1

(PAGE 4-22)

3

GUI_DOWN

2

D_2.95V

1

XSTRB

R001 22k

R002 6.8k

R003 3.3k

R005 1.2k

R004 1.5k

10P

CN003 10

D001 SML-310LTT86

REG_GND

ACCESS

SIGNAL PATH

F

S002

S003

S004

S005

VIDEO SIGNAL

S001 FINDER/LCD

(Screen status) (Self Timer/Index)

(Digital zoom Playback zoom)

CHROMA

(Quick Review)

Y

Y/CHROMA

REC

16

PB

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(UNDER) is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.

4-23

4-24


Schematic diagrams of the SY-096 board are not shown. Pages from 4-25 to 4-44 are not shown.

DSC-F828

4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS Link DD-204 BOARD

LB-091 BOARD

LR-018 BOARD

UA-003 BOARD

ST-088 BOARD

CF-097 BOARD

MT-067 BOARD

AJ-007 BOARD

LS-067 BOARD

SW-410 BOARD

SI-037 BOARD

FP-748 BOARD

COMMON NOTE FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

Board Name

Function

DD-204

DC/DC CONVERTER

LR-018

BATTERY, RESET SW

ST-088

FLASH CONTROL

MT-067

FLASH MOTOR

LS-067

AF LASER

SI-037

FLASH, IR LED

LB-091

EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT

UA-003

AV, USB JACK

CF-097

CF CARD CONNECTOR

AJ-007

JACK

SW-410

FUNCTION KEY

FP-748

CONNECTOR

MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION CIRCUIT BOARDS AND FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION

DSC-F828 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS (In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block) (For printed wiring boards) • : Uses unleaded solder. • : Pattern from the side which enables seeing. (The other layers’ patterns are not indicated) • Through hole is omitted. • Circled numbers refer to waveforms. • There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram isn’t mounted in this model. • C: designation

• Chip parts. Transistor

B

Diode

6 5 4 4 5 6 5

C

E

4 4

parts location

pattern

4-63

6

LR-018

–

ST-088

4-63

MT-067 LS-067 SI-037

1 23

2

1 2

1 2

1

2 3

4

4

3

3

4

1 1

2

2

1

2 2

1 3

4

5 4 3 3 4 5 2

1

CSP IC 2 to 5

–

1

–

–

6

2 to 5

–

–

1

–

–

–

1

–

–

–

1

–

–

LB-091

–

1

–

–

UA-003

4-63

1

–

–

CF-097

4-63

2

–

–

AJ-007

4-63

2

–

–

SW-410

4-63

2

–

–

FP-748

–

1

–

–

SY-096

4-65

8

2 to 7

IC301, 302, 401, 452, 501, 601

4-47

3

1

(shown on page) number of layers layers not shown DD-204

3

1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1

BOARD INFORMATION board name

3

5

4

3 2

5

4

1

3

1 6 54

DSC-F828 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

•

• Refer to page 4-47 for common note for printed wiring board.

: Uses unleaded solder.

DD-204 BOARD(SIDE A) C403

Q401

2

C404

5 Q402 1

L401 T401

Q407

D403

4

A

3

2

D401

R402 C402

3

1

A

R403

R401

R406

2

C405

R404

DD-204 BOARD(SIDE B)

1

CN401

R405

C406

R050

D402 1

B

+

2

4

6

C046

C058

5

C401 LND001

MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION


C066

1

IC004

C012

R013

Q015 C039

C031

C L010

C067 +

Q003

C028

D G S Q006

Q004

R019

R039

C001

D001

C002

1

C044

B + C033

3 CN001

3

R001 C006

2

D

C027

D007

LR-018 BOARD 1

6

CN602

R018 R017

C007

11

BT001 (LITHIUM BATTERY) (SECONDARY)

E

C018

R032 R031

C014

R020

1

R007 R004

C068

R022

D004 Q001

R024

R002

16

C005 R016

10

R014

5 R025

R028

C019

R033

Q002

R010 R011

17

C016

R035 R048 R030

1

F005

5

1

C065 B

+

R023

8

4

1

1-860-719-

1

3

D010

5

F002 F003

2

20

64

R029 R034

3

4

R005

60

C069

LF001

1

C003 1 3 R009 R044 R047 R046 R045

25

IC001

3

F006

300D

55

4

CN002

32

6

R042 R041

Q014

33

B

+

4

4

Q008

5

B

1

B

F004

F001

C009 R043

C004

R036

40

D006

R049

C032

FB001

C013

C015

C017

C010

20 10

45

R012

2

48

3

5

C011 C008

30

CN601 15 1 5

49 R040

E

3

5

3 2

Q010 C040

L004

L005

R003

35

40

L003

45

R008

C070

C034

1

2

1

2

1 3

C045

1

1

5

C041

50

D002

C035

C029

2

Q011

5

C043

C038

L002

C053

L007

3

Q009

D

16

3

Q012 5

C030

25

C

C042

1

2

Q007 3

60

55 59

1

2 L006

B

L001

2

+

3 4 D011

P

C062

+

B

2

3

4

4

3

2

1

– +

11

1-860-71916

1-860-529-


4-49

4-50

1

11

S001 RESET

6

DD-204/LR-018



•




ST-088 BOARD(SIDE B)

ST-088 BOARD(SIDE A) CN503

CN501 R512

2

10

B

R508

D506

C501

K

26

A

B

R511

CN504

5

LS-067 BOARD

Q502

IC502

S001

R513

4 1

C

C505

6 1 R509

D508

11

1-860-720-

1

OPEN ( FLASH DETECT )

R510

C

3 1Q503

5

R506 R505

8

C502 R514

R507

1

C506 Q504

CN502

C504

2

D507

6

6 4

2 C503

1

16

1

FB503

A

25 20

D504

15

5

R503

K

CN505

5

10

Q501

15 FB504

D503 D501

D505

1

22

FB505

LND503

1

FB501

5 FB502

10

D502

16

A

1-860-720-

2

2

1

11

A D002 K K A D003

16

MT-067 BOARD 1

1-860-546- 11 16

3 1

(


)

1 5 10 CN001

D001 (LASER UNIT)

4-51

D004

A

K

1-860-53311

ST-088/MT-067/LS-067

2

Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.

4-52



•



: Uses unleaded solder. 22

26

1

1

LB-091 BOARD D002

1 5 10 15 18 CN001

1-860-528-

11

SI-037 BOARD

L001

1-860-532-

11

D001

UA-003 BOARD CN001 (USB)

J001 A/V OUT (MONO)

1

D005

12

R006 2

16

4-53

1

D003

R003 R002

B

3

5

R001

LF001

D004

1

3 4 1 2

D002

D001

FB001

R004

4 R005

A

1-860-530-

2

3

4 4-54

5

11

6 SI-037/LB-091/UA-003



•


CF-097 BOARD

4 3

1

R108 R107 R104 R105 C104

CN

1

C103

+

1-860-545-

12

B R116 R119 R118 R123 R120 R127

16

1

2

3

R122

1-860-534-

R124 R126 16

CF-097/AJ-007

1

2

4-55

FB204

6

20

FB101

C

FB201

5

B

R126

1

FB205 FB202

1

R124

5

2

C202

D201

25 35 CN101

2

R127

LND201

D202

1 5 10 15

R117 R121 R125

R120

R122

10

45 51

50 30 20

40

R111 R110 C102 R109 C101

15 R113 R112

CL102

D203

FB203

45 R114

20

25

CN103

30

35

40

CL103 CL104 CL105CL101

R116 R119 R118 R123

J201 ACC(Accessory)

A

R102 R103 R106

C201 C204 C203

50

A

R101

D101

AJ-007 BOARD LND101

B



11

3

4-56

4



•




SW-410 BOARD(SIDE A)

SW-410 BOARD(SIDE B)

S001

OPEN(FLASH)

A

S002

S005

(FLASH)

(METERING MODE)

A

R001 R004

S003 S006

B

CN001

6

B

(MACRO)

/BRK

R006

1

(BURST/BRACKET)

R002

R005 R003

C

D002

S007

D001

C

NIGHT SHOT/ NIGHT FRAMING

S004

D 1-860-72116

1-860-721-

FOCUS (AUTO-MANUAL)

1

2

3

4

12

D

12

4

3

2

1

16

FP-748 BOARD CN002

CN001 1

1

5

5 10

10 15

15

20

20 25

25

30

30 35

35

40

40 45

45

50

50 55 60

1-860-537-

55 60

Printed wiring board of the SY-096 board is not shown. Pages from 4-59 to 4-62 are not shown.

11

4-57

4-58

SW-410/FP-748

DSC-F828 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS 4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ST-088 BOARD

DD-204 BOARD * C001 * C002 C003 C004 * C005 C006 C007 C008 C009 C010 C011 C012 C013 C014 C015 C016 C017 C018 C019 * C027 * C028 * C029 * C030 * C031 * C032 * C033 * C034 * C035 * C038 * C039 * C040 * C041 * C042 * C043 * C044 * C045 C046 C053 C058 C062 * C065 C066 * C067 * C068 * C069 * C070 C401 * C402 C403 C404 C405 * C406

D-3 D-3 D-3 D-3 E-3 E-3 E-2 C-3 C-3 C-2 C-3 E-2 C-3 E-2 C-2 E-2 C-2 E-2 E-1 D-1 D-1 B-2 B-4 C-2 C-3 C-2 B-3 B-3 B-4 C-1 C-3 C-2 B-2 B-3 B-2 B-1 B-2 B-1 B-1 B-1 C-1 B-2 C-2 D-2 C-3 B-2 B-4 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-2 A-3

* CN001 CN002 * CN401 CN601 * CN602

C-4 D-4 A-3 C-1 E-2

D001 D002 D003 D004 D006 * D007 * D010 D011 D401 * D402 D403

D-2 C-4 D-3 D-3 D-1 D-2 B-1 B-1 A-2 B-3 A-2

F001 F002 F003 F004 F005 * F006

C-3 D-2 D-2 C-3 D-4 C-2

* FB001

C-4

IC001 * IC004

D-2 B-1

* * * *

* * * *

L001 L002 L003 L004 L005 L006 L007 * L010 L401

B-2 B-4 C-2 C-3 C-2 B-2 B-3 C-1 A-4

* LF001

D-3

Q001 Q002 Q003 Q004 Q006 Q007 Q008 Q009 Q010 Q011 Q012 Q014 * Q015 Q401 * Q402 Q407

E-3 D-3 D-2 D-2 D-1 B-4 C-2 C-3 C-3 B-2 B-3 D-3 B-1 A-3 A-3 A-3

R001 R002 R003 R004 R005 R007 R008 R009 R010 R011 R012 R013 R014 R016 R017 R018 R019 R020 R022 R023 R024 R025 R028 R029 R030 R031 R032 R033 R034 R035 R036 R039 R040 R041 R042 R043 R044 R045 R046 R047 R048 R049 R050 R401 R402 R403 R404 R405 R406

E-3 E-3 C-4 E-3 E-3 E-3 C-4 D-3 E-3 E-3 D-3 E-3 E-3 E-3 E-1 E-1 D-3 E-2 D-2 D-2 E-2 E-2 E-2 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-1 E-1 D-1 D-2 D-1 C-3 C-3 D-3 D-3 D-3 D-3 D-3 E-1 E-1 B-1 A-3 A-3 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-2

T401

A-3

* * * * * * * * * * *

* * *

* * * * * * *

*

* * *

*

* C501 C502 C503 * C504 C505 C506

B-1 C-2 B-2 B-2 C-2 C-2

* CN501 CN502 CN503 CN504 CN505

A-1 C-1 A-2 B-2 B-2

D501 * D502 D503 * D504 D505 * D506 * D507 D508

A-2 A-2 A-2 B-2 A-1 B-1 B-1 C-2

* FB501 FB502 * FB503 * FB504 * FB505

A-2 A-2 B-1 A-1 A-1

IC502

C-2

* Q501 Q502 Q503 Q504

A-1 C-2 C-2 C-2

* R503 R505 R506 R507 * R508 * R509 * R510 * R511 R512 R513 R514

B-1 C-2 C-2 C-2 A-1 C-1 C-1 B-2 A-2 C-2 C-2

CF-097 BOARD C101 C102 C103 C104

B-3 B-3 C-3 A-3

CN101 B-3 CN103 B-2

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

D101

A-3

FB101

B-3

R101 R102 R103 R104 R105 R106 R107 R108 R109 R110 R111 R112 R113 R114 R116 R117 R118 R119 R120 R121 R122 R123 R124 R125 R126 R127

A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3

AJ-007 BOARD C201 C202 C203 C204

no mark : side A * mark : side B SW-410 BOARD

B-1 B-1 B-1 B-1

CN001 B-4

CN201 B-1 D201 D202 D203

B-1 B-1 B-1

FB201 FB202 FB203 FB204 FB205

B-4 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-3

J201

A-4

* * * * * *

D001 D002

C-3 C-3

R001 R002 R003 R004 R005 R006

A-4 C-2 C-2 A-4 C-2 C-3

S001 S002 S003 S004 S005 S006 S007

A-2 A-3 B-3 D-3 A-2 B-2 C-2

UA-003 BOARD CN001 A-2 D001 D002 D003 D004 D005

B-2 B-2 B-2 A-2 A-2

FB001

B-2

J001

A-1

LF001

A-3

R001 R002 R003 R004 R005 R006

B-3 B-1 B-2 A-2 A-3 A-2

DD-204/ST-088/UA-003/CF-097/AJ-007/SW-410

Mounted parts location of the SY-096 board are not shown. Pages from 4-65 to 4-66 are not shown.

4-63

4-64E

DSC-F828

NOTE

5. REPAIR PARTS LIST NOTE: Characters A to Z of the electrical parts list indicate location of exploded views in which the desired part is shown.

EXPLODED VIEWS

Link

A

OVERALL SECTION

B

C

STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY

CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1

CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY

EVF ASSEMBLY

CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2

D

BTH BLOCK ASSEMBLY

Link

ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

ACCESSORIES

AJ-007 BOARD

C

LR-018 BOARD

SW-410 BOARD

A

CF-097 BOARD

D

LS-067 BOARD

SY-096 BOARD

D

DD-204 BOARD

D

MT-067 BOARD

UA-003 BOARD

FP-748 BOARD

SI-037 BOARD

LB-091 BOARD

ST-088 BOARD

B

DSC-F828 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

NOTE: • -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some differences from the original one. • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. • The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not supplied. • Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set. • CAPACITORS: uF: µF • COILS uH: µH • RESISTORS All resistors are in ohms. METAL: metal-film resistor METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor F: nonflammable • SEMICONDUCTORS In each case, u: µ, for example: uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... , uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... , uPD..., µPD... • Abbreviation CND : Canadian model AUS : Australian model HK : Hong Kong model KR : Korea model JE : Tourist model J : Japanese model

5-1

When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name. The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

DSC-F828 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS 5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ns : not supplied

BTH block assembly (See page 5-7)

1 1

Cabinet (rear) block assembly (See page 5-8)

6

1

1 1 1 Cabinet (front) block assembly-1 (See page 5-5)

1

7 8

1

1

9

4 Stroboscope block assembly (See page 5-4)

1 3

ns

2 1

Ref. No. 1 2 3 4

Part No.

Description

3-080-203-31 3-051-124-01 A-7078-878-A 1-860-540-11

SREW(M2),LOCK ACE,P2 FOOT, RUBBER SW-410 BOARD, COMPLETE FP-751 FLEXIBLE BOARD

Ref. No. 6 7 8 9

5-3

Part No.

Description

3-086-480-01 3-089-846-01 X-3953-809-1 (Note)

WINDOW, LCD RADIATION SHEET (LL) CABINET (LR) ASSY TAPE (A)

Note : For the part of 9: TAPE (A) (3-941-343-01) cut WOVEN (T0.25), FABRIC NON (3-076-631-01) into the desired length and use it.

DSC-F828 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST 5-1-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ns : not supplied

76

60 57

54

61

54 62 54

B

58 59

D001 (Note1)

56

C

M910

D

77 B

ns

D

55 I

ns

54

64

A

I

54

C

69

66

64 A

54 68

74

53

65

52

54

75

F G E

(See page 5-5)

54

CD-469 board (Note2)

73 51

Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

51 52 53 54 55

A-7112-735-A A-7078-884-A 3-989-735-51 3-080-222-11 3-086-499-01

REPAIR (EB08A) (LENS BLOCK ASSY) ST-088 BOARD, COMPLETE SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 SCREW (M1.7), TAPPING,P2 HOLDER, ST LASER

56 57 58 59 60

X-3953-801-1 1-818-099-11 A-7078-891-A X-3953-800-2 3-086-493-01

CABINET ASSY, ST CONNECTOR, SHOE LS-067 BOARD, COMPLETE ST ASSY COVER, ST

61 0 62

3-086-494-01 HOLDER, ST UNIT A-7078-889-A SI-037 BOARD, COMPLETE

Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

64 65 66 68 69

3-084-817-01 A-7078-890-A 3-086-498-01 3-086-495-01 3-086-496-01

GRIP MT-067 BOARD, COMPLETE GUIDE, STFPC COVER, STFPC COVER, ST BLIND

73 74 75 0 76 77

3-086-497-01 1-860-539-11 1-962-610-11 1-478-445-11 3-080-203-31

GUIDE, HARNESS FP-750 FLEXIBLE BOARD HARNESS (PT-132) FLASH UNIT SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2

0 D001 M910

1-805-470-51 LASER UNIT (Note1) 1-787-055-11 MOTOR, STROBOSCOPE (FLASH/MOTOR)

Note1 : Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced. Note2 : CD-469 board is included in the REPAIR (EB08A) (LENS BLOCK ASSY). CD-469 board is not supplied as a single board since removing it as a single board requires adjustment.

5-4

Note3 : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Note3 : Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

DSC-F828 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST 5-1-3. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 ns : not supplied

125 123 124 Cabinet (front) block assembly-2 (See page 5-6)

A

125

110

114

111 105 ns

112

105 102

ns

113

102

102 104

109 122 A

115 103

102

101

108 105

105

106

117 118

127 120

126

119

107 E

110

F

(See page 5-4)

Ref. No.

Ref. No.

G

Part No.

Description

Part No.

Description

101 102 103 104 105

X-3953-808-1 3-080-203-31 3-051-124-01 3-087-127-01 3-989-735-51

CABINET (LL) ASSY SREW(M2),LOCK ACE,P2 FOOT, RUBBER SCREW SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2

114 115 117 118 119

3-086-485-01 3-087-125-01 1-860-541-11 1-860-535-11 1-860-536-11

GUIDE (L), FLEXIBLE GUIDE (R), FLEXIBLE FP-754 FLEXIBLE BOARD FP-746 FLEXIBLE BOARD FP-747 FLEXIBLE BOARD

106 107 108 109 110

A-7078-885-A 1-860-531-11 X-3953-799-1 3-086-490-01 3-080-222-11

AJ-007 BOARD, COMPLETE AJ-006 FLEXIBLE BOARD HINGE ASSY COVER, ST (ST UNDER COVER) SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2

120 122 123 124 125

3-090-857-01 3-089-843-01 1-400-689-11 3-088-689-01 (Note)

SHEET (ACC) RADIATION SHEET (LR) FERRITE CORE SHEET (F2) ADHESIVE TAPE (A)

111 112 113

A-7078-888-A UA-003 BOARD, COMPLETE 1-794-045-61 CONNECTOR, DC-IN X-3953-879-2 HOLDER ASSY, JACK

126 127

1-400-687-11 FERRITE CORE 3-088-442-01 SHEET (F1) ADHESIVE

5-5


DSC-F828 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST 5-1-4. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2 ns : not supplied

153

156

154 153 153

157

ns MIC901

152

159

SP901

ns

158

ns

153

155 160

155

ns

151

Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

151 152 153 154 155

X-3953-802-1 3-087-116-01 3-989-735-51 3-086-484-01 3-080-222-11

CABINET (FRONT) ASSY BRACKET (FRONT), STRAP SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 HOLDER, MICROPHONE SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2

156

X-3953-804-2 UPPER ASSY, CABINET

Ref. No.

5-6

Part No.

Description

157 158 159 160 MIC901

3-087-108-01 1-478-227-11 1-805-389-11 (Note) 1-542-446-61

CUSHION, MD SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (TOP) DISPLAY , LIQUID CRYSTAL TAPE (A) MICROPHONE

SP901

1-825-663-11 SPEAKER (1.6CM)


DSC-F828 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST 5-1-5. BTH BLOCK ASSEMBLY

224

ns : not supplied

210

BT901

221

209

209 C B

209

212

213

220

ns

C

209 214

211

201

SY -0

96

223 222

208

204

215 ns

216 217

BT001

202

ns

203

209

207

206 ns

B

C405 A

04 -2 D D

219

218

205

A

201 Ref. No.

: BT001 (Lithium battery) LR-018 board on the mount position. (See page 4-50) Part No.

Description

Part No.

Description

201 202 203 204 205

3-080-222-11 A-7078-880-A 3-086-491-01 3-969-380-01 3-375-114-71

SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2 LR-018 BOARD, COMPLETE SHEET, CF RADIATION SPRING, BATTERY SCREW

216 217 218 219 220

3-087-188-01 A-7078-881-A A-7078-883-A 3-086-487-02 3-090-807-01

SHEET (B), CF RADIATION FP-748 BOARD, COMPLETE DD-204 BOARD, COMPLETE LABEL,FUSE REPLACEMENT CAUTION SHEET (MS)

206 207 208 209 210

3-050-594-01 3-073-601-21 X-3953-805-2 3-989-735-51 1-860-538-11

SPRING, COMPRESSION FOOT, RUBBER HOLDER ASSY, BT SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 FP-749 FLEXIBLE BOARD

221 222 223 224 BT901

1-500-227-21 1-818-138-11 3-090-809-01 (Note1) 1-694-796-41

BEAD, FERRITE CONNECTOR, CARD(COMPACT FLASH) CUSHION (SY) TAPE (A) TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY

211 212 213 214 215

1-815-853-13 A-7078-879-A 3-087-187-01 A-7079-008-A 1-860-717-11

CONNECTOR, MEMORY STICK CF-097 BOARD, COMPLETE RETAINER, SY SY-096 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) FP-756 FLEXIBLE BOARD

Note1 : For the part of 224: TAPE (A) (3-941-343-01) cut WOVEN (T0.25), FABRIC NON (3-076-631-01) into the desired length and use it.

Ref. No.

0 C405

1-100-734-11 CAP, ELECT (FLASH) 250MF 315V


5-7



DSC-F828 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST 5-1-6. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY ns : not supplied

EVF assembly (See page 5-9)

257 258

A

263

255

259

251

ns

251 A

260

264

LCD901

256

261

ND901

253 252 262 ns

251

ns

251

Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

251 252 253 255 256

3-989-735-51 1-478-229-11 3-090-369-01 1-478-228-11 3-086-488-01

SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (UNDER) TAPE (F3) SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL(MID) CUSHION, LCD

257 258 259

3-080-222-11 SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2 X-3953-806-2 CABINET (REAR) ASSY 3-087-155-03 SHEET, ADHESIVE, LCD WINDOW

Note1 : For the part of 264: TAPE (A) (3-941-343-01) cut WOVEN (T0.25), FABRIC NON (3-076-631-01) into the desired length and use it.

Ref. No. 260 261 262 263 264

Part No.

Description

3-087-153-01 3-087-157-01 3-051-124-01 X-3953-944-1 (Note1)

COVER, JACK BRACKET, STRAP FOOT, RUBBER LID, CF ASSY (SERVICE) TAPE (A)

LCD901 1-805-380-21 INDICATOR MODULE LIQUID CRYST 0 ND901 1-478-145-11 BLOCK LIGHT GUIDE PLATE

5-8



DSC-F828 5. REPAIR PARTS LIST 5-1-7. EVF ASSEMBLY ns : not supplied

306

ns

305 LCD902

307

304 303

ns

302

301

Ref. No. 301 302 303 304

Part No.

Description

A-7078-887-A 3-072-214-01 3-072-211-01 3-072-210-01

LB-091 BOARD, COMPLETE GUIDE (20), LAMP ILLUMINATOR SHEET, PRISM

Ref. No. 305 306 307 LCD902

5-9

Part No.

Description

3-059-734-01 X-3953-807-1 3-950-044-01 8-753-039-35

CUSHION (1), LCD EVF ASSY RING, O LCX044AK-1

DSC-F828 AJ-007

CF-097

DD-204

5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Ref. No.

A-7078-885-A AJ-007 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** < CAPACITOR > C201 C204

1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP

0.001uF 0.001uF

10.00% 50V 10.00% 50V

< CONNECTOR > CN201

1-817-548-11 CONNECTOR, FPC 6P < DIODE >

D201 D202 D203

1-216-295-11 METAL CHIP 0 (Note) 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0 < FERRITE BEAD >

FB201 FB202 FB203 FB204 FB205

1-469-179-21 1-469-179-21 1-469-179-21 1-469-179-21 1-469-179-21

FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE

Part No.

Description

R111 R112 R113 R114 R116

1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11

RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP

47 47 47 47 47

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R117 R118 R119 R120 R121

1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11


47 47 47 47 47

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R122 R123 R124 R125 R126

1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11


47 47 47 47 47

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R127 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W ************************************************************

0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH

A-7078-883-A DD-204 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** (C405 is not included in this completed board) < CAPACITOR >

< JACK > J201 1-793-995-21 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE (ACC (ry)) ************************************************************ A-7078-879-A CF-097 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** < CAPACITOR > C101 C102 C103

1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-100-662-11 TANTAL. CHIP

0.1uF 0.1uF 47uF

10.00% 16V 10.00% 16V 20% 6.3V

< CONNECTOR > CN101 CN103

1-794-505-21 CONNECTOR, FPC (ZIF) 51P 1-818-139-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (CF CARD) 50P < DIODE >

D101

8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0 < FERRITE BEAD >

FB101

1-469-775-21 FERRITE

0uH

< RESISTOR > R101 R102 R103 R104 R105

1-216-864-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-937-11

METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP SHORT CHIP RES-CHIP

0 47 47 0 47

5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

5%

1/16W

R106 R107 R108 R109 R110

1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-937-11


47 47 47 47 47

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

Note : Resistor is mounted to the location where D201 is printed.

5-10

C001 C002 C003 C004 C005

1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-125-777-11 1-125-777-11 1-107-819-11

CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.022uF

10.00% 10.00% 10.00% 10.00% 10.00%

16V 16V 10V 10V 16V

C006 C007 C008 C009 C011

1-165-176-11 1-162-964-91 1-107-819-11 1-119-923-11 1-125-777-11


0.047uF 0.001PF 0.022uF 0.047uF 0.1uF

10.00% 10% 10.00% 10.00% 10.00%

16V 50V 16V 10V 10V

C012 C013 C014 C016 C018

1-162-968-11 1-125-777-11 1-162-966-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-967-91


0.0047uF 0.1uF 0.0022uF 0.001uF 0.0033uF

10% 10.00% 10% 10% 10%

50V 10V 50V 50V 50V

C019 C027 C028 C029 C030

1-162-969-91 1-165-875-11 1-165-875-11 1-125-889-91 1-165-908-11


0.0068uF 10uF 10uF 2.2uF 1uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

50V 10V 10V 10V 10V

C031 C032 C033 C034 C035

1-165-908-11 1-165-908-11 1-165-908-11 1-165-908-11 1-165-908-11


1uF 1uF 1uF 1uF 1uF

10% 10% 10% 10% 10%

10V 10V 10V 10V 10V

C038 C039 C040 C041 C042

1-137-710-11 1-137-710-11 1-137-710-11 1-137-710-11 1-137-710-11


10uF 10uF 10uF 10uF 10uF

20% 20% 20% 20% 20%

6.3V 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V 6.3V

C043 C044 C045 C046 C053

1-137-710-11 1-115-566-11 1-127-861-11 1-115-566-11 1-165-908-11


10uF 4.7uF 2.2uF 4.7uF 1uF

20% 10.00% 10% 10.00% 10%

6.3V 10V 16V 10V 10V

DSC-F828 DD-204 Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

C058 C062 C065 C066 C067

1-165-908-11 1-131-860-91 1-135-993-11 1-100-662-11 1-119-751-11

CERAMIC CHIP TANTAL. CHIP TANTAL. CHIP TANTAL. CHIP TANTAL. CHIP

1uF 4.7uF 33uF 47uF 22uF

10% 20% 20% 20% 20.00%

10V 10V 10V 6.3V 16V

Ref. No.

C068 C069 C070 C401 C402

1-119-751-11 1-119-751-11 1-119-751-11 1-100-055-11 1-125-777-11

TANTAL. CHIP TANTAL. CHIP TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP

22uF 22uF 22uF 22uF 0.1uF

20.00% 20.00% 20.00% 20% 10.00%

16V 16V 16V 16V 10V

L006 L007 L010 L401

Part No.

Description

1-456-136-21 1-456-137-11 1-414-392-41 1-412-027-11

INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR

10uH 22uH 1uH 2.2uH

< LINE FILTER >

C404 0 C405 C406

1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 1-100-734-11 CAP, ELECT (FLASH) 250MF

25V 315V

1-165-908-11 CERAMIC CHIP

10V

1uF

10%

LF001

< TRANSISTOR >

< CONNECTOR > CN001 CN002 CN401 CN601 CN602

1-691-550-11 1-691-550-51 1-815-494-11 1-778-598-21 1-766-336-21

PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5MM)(SMD) 3P PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5MM)(SMD) 3P PIN, CONNECTOR 2P CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P < DIODE >

D001 D002 D003 D004 D006

8-719-421-67 8-719-075-15 8-719-158-49 8-719-027-76 8-719-027-76

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

MA132WK-(K8).SO MAZT082H08S0 MA8120-TX 1SS357-TPH3 1SS357-TPH3

D007 D010 D011 D401 0 D402

8-719-073-03 8-719-081-19 8-719-081-19 8-719-073-01 6-500-237-01

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

MA8082-(K8).S0 1SS383(T5RSONY1) 1SS383(T5RSONY1) MA111-(K8).S0 HAU160C030TP

D403

< FUSE > 1-576-406-21 1-576-406-21 1-576-406-21 1-576-406-21 1-576-406-21

0 F006

1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V

FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE

1.4A/32V 1.4A/32V 1.4A/32V 1.4A/32V 1.4A/32V

< FERRITE BEAD > FB001

1-414-228-11 FERRITE

0uH

< IC > IC001 IC004

6-703-429-01 IC MB44A120APFV-G-BND-ERE1 6-704-874-01 IC XC62KS0PXXMR < COIL >

L001 L002 L003 L004 L005

1-419-881-11 1-456-137-11 1-424-846-11 1-456-137-11 1-456-137-11

INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR

Q001 Q002 Q003 Q004 Q006

8-729-047-68 8-729-051-49 8-729-804-41 6-550-119-01 8-729-056-00

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

SSM3K03FE(TPL3) HAT1054R-EL 2SB1122-ST-TD-E DTC144EMT2L MCH3310-TL-E

Q007 Q008 Q009 Q010 Q011

8-729-053-76 8-729-053-76 8-729-053-76 8-729-053-76 8-729-053-76


H5802-TL-E H5802-TL-E H5802-TL-E H5802-TL-E H5802-TL-E

Q012 Q014 Q015 Q401 Q402

8-729-053-76 8-729-054-48 6-550-560-01 8-729-048-50 8-729-426-31


H5802-TL-E N1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) LS5U17LPTL 2SK3018-T106 XP1214-TXE

Q407

6-550-308-01 TRANSISTOR

H3205-SONY-TL-E

< RESISTOR >

8-719-048-98 DIODE RB160L-40TE25

0 F001 0 F002 0 F003 0 F004 0 F005

1-411-957-11 FILTER, COMMON MODE

47uH 22uH 0uH 22uH 22uH

5-11

R002 R005 R008 R009 R011

1-218-990-11 1-218-985-11 1-218-969-11 1-218-961-11 1-218-990-11

SHORT CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP SHORT CHIP

0 470K 22K 4.7K 0

5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R012 R013 R014 R016 R017

1-218-971-11 1-218-961-11 1-218-985-11 1-218-989-11 1-208-707-11

RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP

33K 4.7K 470K 1M 10K

5% 5% 5% 5% 0.5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R018 R019 R020 R022 R023

1-208-930-11 1-216-150-91 1-218-975-11 1-218-953-11 1-218-963-11

METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP

62K 10 68K 1K 6.8K

0.5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/8W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R024 R025 R028 R029 R030

1-218-969-11 1-218-969-81 1-218-975-11 1-208-711-11 1-218-849-11

RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

22K 22K 68K 15K 1.2K

5% 5% 5% 0.5% 0.5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R031 R032 R033 R034 R035

1-218-969-11 1-208-709-11 1-218-975-11 1-218-978-11 1-208-713-11

RES-CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

22K 12K 68K 120K 18K

5% 0.5% 5% 0.5% 0.5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R036 R039 R040 R041 R042

1-218-977-11 1-216-789-11 1-218-949-11 1-208-707-11 1-208-927-11

RES-CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

100K 2.2 470 10K 47K

5% 5% 5% 0.5% 0.5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W



DSC-F828 DD-204 Ref. No.

FP-748

LB-091

LR-018

Part No.

Description

R043 R044 R048 R049 R401

1-218-965-11 1-218-977-11 1-208-707-11 1-208-707-11 1-218-965-11

RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP

10K 100K 10K 10K 10K

5% 5% 0.5% 0.5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

R402 R403 R404 R405

1-218-973-11 1-218-967-11 1-218-942-11 1-218-973-11

RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP

47K 15K 120 47K

5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

LS-067 Ref. No.

MT-067

Part No.

ST-088

Description < SWITCH >

S001

1-786-179-31 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (MOTOR POSITION DETECT) ************************************************************ 0

A-7078-889-A SI-037 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************* < DIODE >

< TRANSFORMER >

D001

6-500-512-01 DIODE CL-330IRS-X-TU (Infrared ray emitter)

0 T401 1-443-157-21 TRANSFORMER, D.C.-D.C. CONVERT ************************************************************

< COIL > L001 1-456-193-11 COIL, TRIGGER ************************************************************

A-7078-881-A FP-748 BOARD, COMPLETE **********************

A-7078-884-A ST-088 BOARD, COMPLETE **********************

< CONNECTOR > CN001 1-778-598-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60P CN002 1-778-593-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60P ************************************************************ A-7078-887-A LB-091 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** CN001

SI-037

< CAPACITOR > C501 C502 C503 C504 C505

1-164-943-11 1-125-777-11 1-137-723-21 1-100-761-21 1-165-875-11


0.01uF 0.1uF 0.047uF 0.01uF 10uF

C506

1-164-949-11 CERAMIC CHIP

0.047uF

10.00% 10.00% 10% 10% 10%

16V 10V 250V 250V 10V

1-817-550-11 CONNECTOR, FPC 18P 16V

< DIODE > < CONNECTOR > D001 6-500-375-01 DIODE NSCW455T-TC9 (BACKLIGHT) ************************************************************ A-7078-880-A LR-018 BOARD, COMPLETE **********************

CN501 CN502 CN503 CN504 CN505

1-766-352-21 1-815-494-11 1-778-164-21 1-779-327-11 1-779-337-11

CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 22P PIN, CONNECTOR 2P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 16P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 26P

< BATTERY > < DIODE > 0 BT001

1-756-191-31 BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY) < SWITCH >

S001 1-692-088-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (RESET) ************************************************************ A-7078-891-A LS-067 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** (D001 is not included in this completed board) < DIODE > 0 D001 D002 D003 D004

1-805-470-51 8-719-073-03 8-719-073-03 8-719-064-07

D502 D503 D504 D506 D507

8-719-075-15 8-719-073-03 8-719-123-76 8-749-017-19 6-500-811-01

D508

8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3 < FERRITE BEAD >

FB501 FB502 FB503 FB504 FB505

LASER UNIT (Note1) DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0 DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0 DIODE SML-310LTT86 (Self-timer)

DIODE MAZT082H08S0 DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0 THYRISTOR 03P4J-T1 DIODE 02DZ10-TPH3 DIODE RR255L-400TE25

1-469-179-21 1-469-179-21 1-469-179-21 1-469-179-21 1-469-179-21

FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE

0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH

< IC > < SWITCH > IC502

8-729-053-74 TRANSISTOR CY25AAJ-8-T13

S001 1-786-180-31 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (FLASH OPEN DETECT) ************************************************************ A-7078-890-A MT-067 BOARD, COMPLETE ***********************


< CONNECTOR > CN001

1-794-767-31 CONNECTOR, FPC 10P

Note1 : Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.

5-12



DSC-F828 ST-088 Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Ref. No.

< TRANSISTOR > Q501 Q502 Q503 Q504

6-550-237-01 8-729-042-58 8-729-053-57 8-729-037-52

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

2SC5658T2LQ/R UN9111J-(K8).SO RN1902FE(TPLR3) 2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO

R503 R505 R506 R507 R508

1-218-953-11 1-218-937-11 1-218-989-11 1-216-121-11 1-218-949-11


1K 47 1M 1M 470

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/10W 1/16W

R509 R510 R511 R512 R513

1-220-254-11 1-220-254-11 1-216-097-11 1-216-864-11 1-218-943-11

RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP

56 56 100K 0 150

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/4W 1/4W 1/10W 1/16W 1/16W

A-7078-878-A SW-410 BOARD, COMPLETE *********************** < CONNECTOR > 1-817-548-11 CONNECTOR, FPC 6P < RESISTOR > 1-216-822-11 1-216-827-11 1-216-837-11 1-216-823-11 1-218-867-11

METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP

1.2K 3.3K 22K 1.5K 6.8K

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/10W

< SWITCH > S001 S002 S003 S004 S005

Description

Electrical parts list of the SY-096 board is not shown. Pages from 5-14 to 5-18 are not shown.

R514 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W ************************************************************

R001 R002 R003 R004 R005

SY-096

SY-096 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) *******************************

< RESISTOR >

CN001

Part No.

SW-410

1-786-179-11 1-771-138-82 1-771-138-82 1-786-179-11

SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (OPEN(FLASH)) SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FLASH) SWITCH, KEY BOARD (MACRO) SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (FOCUS (AUTO/MANUAL)) 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (METERING MODE)

S006 S007

1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (BURST/BRACKET) 1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (NIGHT SHOT/NIGHT FRAMING) ************************************************************

5-13

DSC-F828 UA-003 Ref. No.

Part No.

Description

Ref. No.

A-7078-888-A UA-003 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** < CONNECTOR > CN001

1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE(USB 5P) < DIODE >

D001 D002 D003 D004

8-719-075-15 8-719-073-03 8-719-075-15 8-719-073-01

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

MAZT082H08S0 MA8082-(K8).S0 MAZT082H08S0 MA111-(K8).S0

< FERRITE BEAD > FB001

1-500-444-11 FERRITE

0uH

< JACK > J001

1-569-950-31 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (AUDIO/VIDEO) < LINE FILTER >

LF001

1-456-583-11 INDUCTOR

0uH

< RESISTOR > R001 R002 R003 R004 R005

1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-821-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91

SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP

0 0 1K 0 0

5%

1/16W

R006 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W ************************************************************

5-19

Part No.

Description

DSC-F828

Checking supplied accessories. Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your digital still camera.

Power cord (Main lead) (1) (AEP, E model) 0 1-769-608-11 Power cord (Main lead) (1) (AUS model) 0 1-696-819-11 Power cord (Main lead) (1) (UK, HK model) 0 1-783-374-11 Power cord (Main lead) (1) (US, CND model) 0 1-790-107-22 Power cord (Main lead) (1) (JE, J model) 0 1-790-732-12 Power cord (Main lead) (1) (KR model) 0 1-776-985-11 Power cord (Main lead) (1) (CH model) 0 1-782-476-13

CD-ROM (SPVD-013 (I) USB Driver) (1) (US, CND, J model) 3-087-331-01 CD-ROM (SPVD-013 USB Driver) (1) (AEP, UK, E, HK, JE, KR, AUS, CH model) 3-087-330-01

AC adaptor (1) (AC-L15A) 0 1-477-533-51

A/V connecting cable (1) 1-824-111-11

NP-FM50 battery pack (1) (not supplied) USB cable (1) 1-827-038-11 Lens cap (1) X-3952-016-1

String assy cap X-3953-980-1

Lens hood (1) 3-086-481-01

2-pin conversion adaptor (1) (JE model) 1-569-007-12

2-pin conversion adaptor (1) (E model) 1-569-008-12

S-houlder strap (1) 3-071-638-11 Clamp filter (Ferrite core) (for AC-L15A) 1-543-798-21

CD-ROM (Image Data Converter) (1) 3-087-661-01

Other accessories 3-084-996-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE)(J) 3-084-996-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION(ENGLISH) (US,CND,AEP,UK,E,AUS,CH,JE,HK) 3-084-996-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH/GERMAN)(CND,AEP) 3-084-996-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (AEP,E,JE) 3-084-996-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/DUTCH)(AEP)

• Abbreviation CND : Canadian model AUS : Australian model CH : Chinese model HK : Hong Kong model KR : Korea model JE : Tourist model J : Japanese model

3-084-996-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONALCHINESE) (E,CH,JE,HK) 3-084-996-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (RUSSIAN/SWEDISH)(AEP) 3-084-996-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)(E) 3-084-996-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)(JE,KR) 3-084-997-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE)(J) 3-087-904-01 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW (JAPANESE)(J) 3-087-904-11 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW (ENGLISH/FRENCH/GERMAN/SPANISH/ITALIAN/DUTCH/ PORTUGUESE/TRADITIONAL CHINESE/ SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)(EXCEPT J)

5-20E



DSC-F828

9-876-279-31

Sony EMCS Co.

— 100 —

2004D1600-1 ©2004.4 Published by DI Technical Section

DSC-F828 ADJ

SECTION 6 ADJUSTMENTS

Ver 1.1 2004. 04 Revision History How to use Acrobat Reader

Link SERVICE MODE

Before starting adjustment Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards

APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS) SERVICE MODE

CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT INITIALIZATION OF DATA VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEW FINDER ADJUSTMENT LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT

Note: Be sure to carry out “Data Save”.

Contents of LEVEL 2 and LEVEL 3 Service Manual CONTENTS 1. SERVICE NOTE 2. DISASSEMBLY 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

9-876-279-52

LEVEL 2 a a OVERALL POWER DD-204, LR-018, ST-088, LS-067, MT-067, SI-037, UA-003, LB-091, CF-097, SW-410, AJ-007 BOARD CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)/(MID)/(UNDER) EXPLODED VIEWS ELECTRICAL PARTS

Sony EMCS Co.

LEVEL 3 ✕ ✕ ✕ SY-096 BOARD

✕ a (SY-096 BOARD)

2004D1600-1 ©2004.4 Published by DI CS Strategy Div.

DSC-F828 TABLE OF CONTENTS 6.

ADJUSTMENT

1. Before starting adjustment ··············································· 6-1 1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards ···· 6-2 6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT ··························· 6-3 1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT ················· 6-3 1-1-1. List of Service Tools ························································ 6-3 1-1-2. Preparations ····································································· 6-4 1-1-3. Discharging of the flashlight power supply ····················· 6-4 1-1-4. Precaution ········································································ 6-6 1. Setting the Switch ···························································· 6-6 2. Order of Adjustments ······················································ 6-6 3. Subjects ··········································································· 6-6 4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box ······························· 6-7 1-2. INITIALIZATION OF DATA ········································· 6-8 1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF DATA ········································· 6-8 1. Initializing All Pages Data ··············································· 6-8 2. Initializing Single Page Data ··········································· 6-8 3. 2F Page Adjustment Address ··········································· 6-8 4. 4F Page Adjustment Address ··········································· 6-8 5. 6E Page Adjustment Address ·········································· 6-9 6. 6F Page Adjustment Address ········································· 6-10 7. 8E Page Adjustment Address ········································ 6-11 8. 8F Page Adjustment Address ········································· 6-11 1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 6-12 1. Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·········· 6-12 1-4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ························ 6-13 Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments ········ 6-13 IRIS Reset Sensor Adjustment ······································ 6-13 Flange Back Adjustment ··············································· 6-14 Flange Back Check ························································ 6-14 Picture Frame Setting (PTB-450) ·································· 6-15 Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450) ································ 6-16 Color Shade Check ························································ 6-17 F No. Compensation ······················································ 6-18 Mechanical Shutter Adjustment ···································· 6-18 Light Value Adjustment ················································· 6-19 Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment ····························· 6-20 Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Normal mode) ········· 6-22 Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Real mode) ·············· 6-23 CCD Linearity Check ···················································· 6-24 CCD White Defect Compensation Check ····················· 6-26 CCD Black Defect Compensation Check ····················· 6-27 Strobe Adjustment ························································· 6-28 AF Laser Output Adjustment ········································ 6-29 AF Laser Axis Check ···················································· 6-30

1-6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··································· 6-35 Data Setting during LCD System Adjustments ············· 6-35 LCD Initial Data Input ·················································· 6-35 VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board) ································· 6-36 Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board) ···························· 6-36 V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board) ····························· 6-37 White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·················· 6-37

6-2. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 6-38 2-1. APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS) ············ 6-38 2-1-1. Using Method of SEUS ················································· 6-38 1. Connection ····································································· 6-38 2. Operation ······································································· 6-38 2-1-2. Precaution on Use of SEUS ··········································· 6-38 2-2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

SERVICE MODE ·························································· 6-39 Setting the Test Mode ···················································· 6-39 Bit value discrimination ················································ 6-39 Switch check (1) ···························································· 6-40 Switch check (2) ···························································· 6-40 Switch check (3) ···························································· 6-40 Switch check (4) ···························································· 6-41 Switch check (5) ···························································· 6-41 Switch check (6) ···························································· 6-41 LED, Segment LCD check ············································ 6-41 Record of Use check ······················································ 6-42 Self Diagnostics Log check ··········································· 6-42

* Color reproduction frame is shown on page 6-43. * AF illumination frame is shown on page 6-44.

1-5. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER ADJUSTMENT ····························································· 6-31 1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments ············· 6-31 2. EVF Initial Data Input ··················································· 6-31 3. VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board) ································· 6-32 4. Bright Adjustment (SY-096 board) ································ 6-32 5. Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board) ···························· 6-33 6. V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board) ····························· 6-33 7. White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·················· 6-34

—2—

DSC-F828 SECTION 6 ADJUSTMENTS 1.

Before starting adjustment EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct. Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.

Procedure 1 Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. the saved data after a board is replaced. (Machine before starting repair)

PC

PC

(Machine after a board is replaced)

the saved data to a machine.

Save the EVR data to a personal computer.

Procedure 2 Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROM to the replaced board. Remove the EEPROM and install it.

(Former board)

(New board)

Procedure 3 When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or installed, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and it. (Machine to be repaired)

PC

(Machine to be repaired)

the data.

Save the data.

(The same model of the same destination)

After the EVR data is saved and ed, check the respective items of the EVR data. (Refer to page 6-3 for the items to be checked.)

6-1

DSC-F828

1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards When replacing main parts and boards, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.

Adjustment

Initialization of data Initialization of data Video Video output level adj. Iris reset sensor adj. Flange back adj. Color shade check F No. compensation Mechanical shutter adj. Light value adj. Camera Linear matrix and AWB adj. Color reproduction check CCD linearity check CCD white defect compensation check CCD black defect compensation check Strobe adj. AF laser output adj. EVF initial data input VCO adj. Bright adj. EVF Contrast adj. V COM adj. White balance adj. LCD initial data input VCO adj. LCD Contrast adj. V COM adj. White balance adj.

z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z

z z z z z z

z z

z

z z z z

Table. 6-1-1.

6-2

z z z z

z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z

SY-096 board IC501 (Camera DSP) (With built-in flash memory)

Adjustment Section

Lens device Xenon tube EVF block LCD unit (LCD902) LCD block LCD unit (LCD901) LCD block Back light unit LB-091 board D001 (EVF back light) LS-067 board D001 (Laser unit) SY-096 board IC301 (Camera DSP) SY-096 board IC303 (Video amp.) SY-096 board IC801 (LCD DRIVER) SY-096 board IC902 (EVF DRIVER) LB-091 board (COMPLETE) LS-067 board (COMPLETE) SY-096 board (COMPLETE)

Replaced parts Board EEPROM Block replacement Mounted Parts replacement replacement replacement

z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z

DSC-F828

6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT 1-1.

PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT

1-1-1. List of Service Tools • Oscilloscope • Color monitor • Calculator which can hexadecimal calculation J-1

• Vectorscope

J-2

J-3 Clear chart for pattern box

Pattern box PTB-1450 J-6082-557-A or Pattern box PTB-450 J-6082-200-A

J-4

Color chart for pattern box

• AC power adapter

9 colors chart for pattern box

For PTB-1450: J-6020-560-A For PTB-450: J-6080-621-A

J-5

For PTB-1450: J-6020-562-A

J-6

For PTB-1450: J-6020-559-A

Mini pattern box J-6082-353-B

Siemens star chart J-6080-875-A

For PTB-450: J-6020-250-A J-7

J-8

J-9 Personal computer with Widows98/ 98SE/ME/2000/ XP installed and with two USB ports

Camera table J-6082-384-A

J-11

J-10

USB cable 1-823-932-11

J-12

Application for adjustment (SEUS) and HASP key (Note)

F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment (Note)

Note: our service headquarter of each area how to get the application for adjustment (SEUS), HASP key and F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment.

Fig. 6-1-1.

6-3

Background paper J-2501-130-A

DSC-F828

1-1-2. 1) 2) 3)

Preparations

Pattern box

Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 6-1-4. Set the MS/CF switch to MS (Memory stick). Start up the application for adjustment (SEUS). About 6cm (PTB-1450) About 20cm (PTB-450)

Note1: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced STILL Mode)” 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 2F, address: 23, and write data: 11. 3) Save the data. 4) Wait for 2 sec. The above procedure will enable the power (STILL mode) to be turned on with POWER switch (Control switch block (TOP)) disconnected. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power ON Mode”.

Front of the lens

Note2: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced PLAY Mode)” 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 2F, address: 23, and write data: 12. 3) Save the data. 4) Wait for 2 sec. The above procedure will enable the power (PALY mode) to be turned on with POWER switch (Control switch block (TOP)) disconnected. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced Power ON Mode”.

Fig. 6-1-2.

Note3: Exiting the “Forced Power ON Mode” 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 2F, address: 23, and write data: 80. 3) Save the data. 4) Wait for 2 sec. 5) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00.

1-1-3. Discharging of the flashlight power supply The capacitor which is used as power supply of flashlight is charged with 200V to 300V voltage. When disassembling the unit, discharge this voltage in order to protect service engineers from electric shock. Discharge procedure 1. Remove the power supply (AC power adaptor or battery). 2. Fabricate the discharging jig as shown in Fig. 6-1-3. locally by yourself. Connect the discharging jig to the positive (+) and negative (–) terminal of the flash voltage charge capacitor. Allow ten seconds to discharge the voltage.

Short jig (1kΩ /1W)

04

-2

DD

DD-204 board

Fig. 6-1-3.

6-4

DSC-F828

[CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT]

Personal computer (with two USB ports)

HASP key

USB2 USB1

USB DC IN

AC IN

AC power adaptor Memory stick

Fig. 6-1-4.

6-5

DSC-F828

1-1-4. Precaution 1. Setting the Switch Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform adjustments. Switch settings 1. Mode dial ............................................. STILL (P AUTO) (P) 2. ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end 3. MS/CF ..................................................... MS (Memory stick) 4. MACRO ( ) .................................................................. ON 5. WHITE BALANCE ..................................................... AUTO

6. 7. 8. 9.

EV .................................................................................... 0EV FOCUS ......................................................................... AUTO USB CONNECT (SET UP setting) ....................... NORMAL VIDEO OUT (SET UP setting) .................................... NTSC

2. Order of Adjustments Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.

Color bar chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-450)

C=D

C

D

Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red Blue

Blue

Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red

H

Picture frame

V A

B B A= 2 Fig. a Video terminal output waveform

A

Fig. b LCD screen or under scan monitor TV picture

Enlargement

Difference in level

Adjust the camera position and direction to obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. a and the LCD screen or the monitor TV display shown in Fig. b.

A

9 colors chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-1450) A

A

B

A=B

C Green

Yellow

W14

Cyan

White

Red

C14

Blue

Magenta

C=

B 3

C14 : Filter for AWB 5800K adjustment

B

C

Effective picture frame

A 2

Transparent window

Adjust the camera position and direction to obtain the LCD screen or the monitor TV display shown in Fig. c.

Fig. c LCD screen or under scan monitor TV picture

Fig.6-1-5. 3. Subjects 1) Color bar chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-450) When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust the picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-5. (Standard picture frame) 2) 9 colors chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-1450) When performing adjustments using the 9 colors chart, adjust the picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-5. (Standard picture frame)

3)

6-6

Clear chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-450/PTB-1450) Remove the color bar chart (PTB-450) or 9 colors chart (PTB1450) from the pattern box and insert a clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations during this time.)

DSC-F828

4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box A dark room is required to provide an accurate strobe adjustment. If it is not available, prepare the flash adjustment box as given below; 1) Provide woody board A, B and C of 15 mm thickness.

woody board A (2 sheets) 400 mm

woody board B (2 sheets) 370 mm

513 mm

730 mm

woody board C (1 sheet) 700 mm

513 mm

700 mm

700 mm

Fig. 6-1-6.

2) Apply black mat paint to one side of woody board A and B. 3) Attach background paper (J-2501-130-A) to woody board C. 4) Assemble so that the black sides and the background paper side of woody board A, B and C are internal. (Fig. 6-1-7.) woody board A

woody board B

woody board A

woody board B woody board C

Fig. 6-1-7.

6-7

DSC-F828

1-2. 1-2-1.

2. Initializing Single Page Data By performing the following procedure, data of the page that you want to initialize will be initialized.

INITIALIZATION OF DATA INITIALIZATION OF DATA

Initializing Method: 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Click [Sector Write] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS SECTOR WRITE screen. 3) Check that the SET ID is “03”. 4) Click [All] of the option buttons of the target page. (Fig. 6-1-8. B) 5) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the EEPROM of the camera. 6) Wait for 2 sec. 7) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen.

1. Initializing All Pages Data By performing the following procedure, data of all the pages will be initialized. Initializing Method: 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Click [Sector Write] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS SECTOR WRITE screen. 3) Check that the SET ID is “03”. 4) Click [All] of the ALL SELECT buttons to select all pages. (Fig. 6-1-8. A) 5) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the EEPROM of the camera. 6) Wait for 2 sec. 7) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen.

Note: When 4F page or 8E page is initialized, perform “Modification of 4F, 8E Page Data”. (Refer to “1. Initializing All Pages Data”.)

Processing after Completing Initializing of data Order Page Address Data Procedure

Modification of 4F, 8E Page Data If all page data have been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual input. 1) 2) 3) 4)

1 2

00 01

3

Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. Click [Page] on the SEUS screen, and input “4F” or “8E”. Click [Address], and input the “Fixed data-2” address. Click [Set], and input the new data.

29 29

Set the data. Set the data. Check “Receive Paket Error” is displayed on the SEUS screen. Turn on the power of the camera.

4 5

Note: New data for changing are not shown in the table because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model. If copy the data built in the different model, the camera may not operate.

5)

20 20

Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen. B

Repeat steps 2 to 4 until all data of the “Fixed data-2” addresses are changed. Click [Save] to write the changed data to the EEPROM of the camera. Wait for 2 sec.

6) 7)

Processing after Completing Initializing of data Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 20 00 29 Set the data. 2 3 4 5

20

01

29

Set the data. Check “Receive Paket Error” is displayed on the SEUS screen. Turn on the power of the camera. Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen.

A

Fig. 6-1-8.

3. 2F Page Adjustment Address Address 23

Remark Initial value 80 Test mode

Table. 6-1-2. 4. 4F Page Adjustment Address Address 46 47 88 94 95 96 97 A1

Initial value

00 00 00 00

Remark Fixed data-2 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-2 Recording counter (Refer to “Record of Use check” of “SERVICE MODE”(Page 6-42).) Fixed data-2

Table. 6-1-3.

6-8

DSC-F828

5. 6E Page Adjustment Address Address Address 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B

Remark

Initial value 1D AWB 3200K/5800K standard data 00 input 07 00 1B 00 08 00 1D 00 07 00 1B 00 08 00 1C 00 07 00 1B 00 08 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0E 00 0E 00 0D 00 0F 00 0E 00 0E 00 0D 00 0F 00 0E 00 0E 00 0D 00 0F 00

3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 72 73 74 75 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F

Initial value 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0C 00 10 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00

Remark AWB 3200K/5800K standard data input

Strobe adj.

Linear matrix adj.

Table. 6-1-4.

6-9

DSC-F828

6. 6F Page Adjustment Address Address Address 06 07 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 40 41 42 43 44 45

Initial value 40 00 40 FF FF FF 00 3A FF 00 00 00 00 17 80 00 00 19 00 00 00 26 26 82 08 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF 40 41 42 43 44 45

Remark

46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 6B 6C 6D B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF D0 D1 D2

Color shade check AF laser output adj.

Flange back adj.

Flange back adj.

6-10

Initial value 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 00 00 00 E0 80 00 00 00 00 00 30 FE 6D FF 00 00 09 AC 09 B4 09 BD 09 A2 09 C3 00 00 00 00 00 37 2E 21 15 15 80 88 98 90 88 00 00

Remark Flange back adj.

Auto focus illumination adj IRIS reset sensor adj. F No. compensation

Light value adj.

F No. compensation/ Mechanical shutter adj. Mechanical shutter adj.

DSC-F828 6F page Address D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF

Remark Initial value 00 Mechanical shutter adj. 00 00 00 14 FF Strobe adj. FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Table. 6-1-5. 7. 8E Page Adjustment Address Address

Initial value

C8

Remark Fixed data-2

Table. 6-1-6. 8. 8F Page Adjustment Address Address 23 24 28 2A 2C 73 74 75 78 7A 7C D0

Initial value 80 76 90 80 72 80 A4 8D 90 80 38 80

Remark VCO adj. (LCD) V COM adj. (LCD) White balance adj. (LCD) Contrast adj. (LCD) VCO adj. (EVF) V COM adj. (EVF) Bright adj. (EVF) White balance adj. (EVF) Contrast adj. (EVF) Video output level adj.

Table. 6-1-7.

6-11

DSC-F828

1-3.

VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

1. Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-096 board) Adjust the sync level of the composite video signal output. Mode PLAY ( ) Signal Measurement Point

No signal Video terminal of AV OUT jack (75Ω terminated)

Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page

Oscilloscope 8F

Adjustment Address Specified Value

D0 Sync level: A=286 ± 5mV (NTSC mode) A=300 ± 5mV (PAL mode) Burst level: B=286 ± 30mV (NTSC mode) B=300 ± 30mV (PAL mode)

Switch setting: VIDEO OUT (SETUP 2) ......................................... (NTSC mode) ............................................ (PAL mode) Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 00 01 01 Set the data. 2 3

60 80

C1 70

4

8F

D0

Read the data, and check it is “01”. Set the data.

01

Change the data and set the sync level (A) to the specified value.

5 6

80

70

Check that the burst level (B) satisfies the specified value. Write the data.

00

7 8 9

Save the data. Wait for 2 sec. 00

01

00

Set the data.

B

A

H

Fig. 6-1-9.

6-12

DSC-F828

1-4.

2. IRIS Reset Sensor Adjustment Measuring the iris reset sensor output voltage, and compensate the dispersion of the reset position detecting voltage. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P)

CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” are satisfied. 1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments Perform the following data setting before the camera system adjustments. Note1: When the power is turned off, some data settings will be released. So perform this data setting again when the power is turned off.

Order Page Address Data

Procedure

1 2

00 4F

01 B7

01 01

Set the data. Set the data.

3 4

2F 60

23 C1

11

Set the data. Read the data, and check it is “02”.

5 6

80 60

70 6C

01 01


7 8

60 4F

2C B9

01

Set the data. Set Bit 0 of the data to “1”. (Note2)

9 10

7F 7F

0E 6A

20 20

11 12

01 B7

3

4F

B9

4

2F

23

7

01

5E, 5F 00

Specified Value2

80 to FF

1

Save the data. Wait for 2 sec.

3 4

60

01

5

60

02

6 7

6F

6B

8

6F

5E

80

Set Bit 0 of the data to “0”. (Note2) Set the data.

Procedure Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. Check the ZOOM is WIDE end.

2


00

Adjustment Address Specified Value1

Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data

6F

Set the data. Wait for 5 sec. Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2) Wait for 2 sec. Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 1. Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 2.

Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, address: 5E, 5F.

Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure


6F


01 00

5 6


Switch setting: ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end

After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. Order Page Address Data Procedure 00 4F

Clear chart Data of page 6F, address: 5E, 6B

Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Note2: For the bit values, refer to “6-2. SERVICE MODE”, “2-2-2. Bit value discrimination”.

1 2

Subject Measurement Point

1 2

Set the data.

3 4

6-13

60

01

00

Set the data. Turn off the power and back on. Perform “Flange Back Adjustment”. If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)

DSC-F828

3. Flange Back Adjustment To adjust the flange back, compensate the dispersion of the zoom position A/D value at WIDE end and TELE end. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) Subject Measurement Point

4. Flange Back Check

6F

Adjustment Address Specified value1

18 to 3E, 40 to 53 00

Specified value2

0A to 40

Subject

Measurement Point

Siemens star (1.0m from the front of the lens) (Luminance : 200 to 400 lux) Check operation on TV monitor

Measuring Instrument Specified Value1

The lens is focused.

Specified Value2

Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1

2

60

00

37

3 4

60

01

37

5 6

60

02

7 8

60 60

00 01

Switch setting: FOCUS ......................................................................... AUTO

Procedure

Checking method: Order Page Address Data

Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. Set the data.

1

Set the data. Wait for 4 sec.

2

Read the data, and check it is “01”. Wait for 2 sec.

3 4

00 00


5

Set the ZOOM to the WIDE end. Set the data. Wait for 1 sec.

6

60

01

13

12 13

60

01

B1

14

60

02

16 17

60

01

18 19

60

01

20

60

02

21

60

01

22 23

6F

3E

24

6F

24

25

6F

25

15 13 B3

00

Below 8% of diagonal length of the TV monitor (Note)

Note: Below 40mm when a 21 inches TV monitor is used.


8 9

Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2) Set the ZOOM to the TELE end.

10


11


60 60

2C 8C

00 30

Set the data. Set the data. Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end (200). Check that center of the Siemens star is located in the center of the TV monitor screen. Check that the lens is focused.

60

2C

01

Set the data. For each of the zoom positions 135, 100, 70, 50 and 35, check that the lens is focused. Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end (28). Check that the lens is focused.

12

Check that distance between the center of the Siemens star and the center of the TV monitor screen satisfies the specified value2.

Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2) Set the data. Wait for 2 sec. Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 1.

Procedure Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. Place the siemens star 1.0m from the front of the lens.

7


Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 2

Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 2. Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 2.

Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, address: 18 to 3E, 40 to 53


STILL (P AUTO) (P)

Arbitrary Data of page: 6F, address: 24, 25, 3E


9 10 11

Mode

Perform “Flange Back Check”. If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)

6-14

60

8C

00

Set the data. If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)

DSC-F828

Check on an oscilloscope

5. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-450) Mode

STILL (P AUTO) (P)

Subject

Measurement Point

Color bar chart and clear chart (Standard picture frame) About 20cm from the front of the lens Video terminal of A/V OUT jack

Measuring Instrument Specified Value

Oscilloscope and TV monitor A=C=B/2, E=F

1. Horizontal period A=C= A

B 2

C

B

Switch setting: ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end Setting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 2

Shoot the color bar chart with the zoom WIDE end. Adjust the direction and distance between the pattern box and camera, and set the picture frame to the specified position.

3

4 5

Adjust the focus. Remove the color bar chart and set the clear chart.

6

Check that the whole of the screen is white. If not, adjust the direction and distance slightly.

7 8

10 10

44

Fig. 6-1-10. 2. Vertical period

Read the data, and this data named YH. Read the data, and this data named YL.

45

9

Fig. 6-1-11. Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode) A

How to reset the focus when it deviated: If the focus deviated due to some reason reset it in the following method. Order Page Address Data Procedure

2

60

90

00


3 4

60 60

91 92

00 YL

Set the data. Set the data. (Note)

5 6

60 60

93 01

YH 79

Set the data. (Note) Set the data.

7 8

60

07

9

60

01

B

Color bar chart picture frame

Fig. 6-1-12.

Wait until the movement of the lens stops. Read the data, and check it is “01”. 00

F

V

Perform the following adjustments.

1

E=F

E

Set the data.

Note: YH and YL are the data read in the “Setting method”.

6-15

C


DSC-F828

Check on an oscilloscope

6. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450) Mode

STILL (P AUTO) (P)

Subject

Measurement Point

9 colors chart and clear chart (Standard picture frame) (Note1) About 6cm from the front of the lens Video terminal of A/V OUT jack

Measuring Instrument Specified Value

Oscilloscope and TV monitor A=B, C=B/3

1. Horizontal period A=B A

B

A

Note1: Check that the transparent window is in the lower right.

Switch setting: ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end Setting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 2

Shoot the 9 colors chart with the zoom WIDE end. Adjust the direction and distance between the pattern box and camera, and set the picture frame to the specified position.

3

4 5

8

2. Vertical period

10 10

44

C=

9

C

B 3 V

Fig. 6-1-14.

Read the data, and this data named YH. Read the data, and this data named YL.

45

B

C

Adjust the focus. Remove the 9 colors chart and set the clear chart. Check that the whole of the screen is white. If not, adjust the direction and distance slightly.

6

7

Fig. 6-1-13.

Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode) on the LCD screen A=B

Perform the following adjustments.

C=

B 3

C14 : Filter for AWB 5800K adjustment

How to reset the focus when it deviated: If the focus deviated due to some reason reset it in the following method. Order Page Address Data Procedure 1

2

60

90

00


3 4

60 60

91 92

00 YL

Set the data. Set the data. (Note2)

5 6

60 60

93 01

YH 79

Set the data. (Note2) Set the data.

7 8

60

07

9

60

01

A

C

Wait until the movement of the lens stops. Read the data, and check it is “01”. 00

A

B

Green

Yellow

W14

Cyan

White

Red

C14

Blue

Magenta

B

C


Set the data.

Transparent window

Note2: YH and YL are the data read in the “Setting method”.

Fig. 6-1-15.

6-16

A 2

DSC-F828

7. Color Shade Check

7-2. Color Shade Check Compensate the color shade. Mode STILL (P AUTO) ( P )

7-1. Installing the “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ” Install the adjustment software “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ” in the PC. System requirements of the PC: OS : Windows98/98SE/Me/2000/XP RAM : Recommend 256MB or higher USB : USB2.0 or USB1.1 (USB2.0 is recommended. Two USB connectors are required.)

Subject

Adjustment Page

Clear chart (PTB-1450) (Standard picture frame) About 6cm from the front of the lens 6F

Adjustment Address

06, 07

Note1: Check that there are no reflections on the clear chart.

Installing the “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ”: 1) Extract “828matrix.zip” file and obtain “Setup.exe” file. 2) Start up the “Setup.exe” and install the “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ”.

Switch setting: ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end Adjusting method: 1) Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 2) Start the F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ on the PC. 3) Click [Connect] on the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment screen. If the connection is normal, the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment screen will be as shown in bellow, indicating the “connected” state 4) Check that the picture frame is the standard picture frame. 5) Click [Color Shading Adjustment] on the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment screen.

Note1: our service headquarter of each area how to get the “828matrix.zip” file. Note2: For “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ” adjustment software’s operating, the following two conditions need to be satisfied. • The application for adjustment (SEUS) is already installed in the PC. • The PC is equipped with the HASP key.

Fig. 6-1-16. 6)

Color shading adjustment is performed automatically.

Fig. 6-1-17. 7)

When the “Completion of adjustment” message is displayed. Click the [OK] button.

Fig. 6-1-18. 8)

6-17

If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)

DSC-F828

8. F No. Compensation Adjusted the dispersion of the iris to every to every F number, and compensate the exposure. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) Subject

9. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment Adjust the dispersion of the opening/closing time and the closing loss rate of the mechanical shutter. and compensate the exposure. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P)

Measurement Point

Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450) (Standard picture frame) Data of page: 6F, address: 6B

Subject


6F


6F

Adjustment Address Specified value

60 to 64, 6B to 6D 00

Adjustment Address Specified value

6B to 6D, B8 to D7 00

Measurement Point

Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450) (Standard picture frame) Data of page: 6F, address: 6B





Adjusting method:

Adjusting method:

Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 2

3

60

01

4 5

60

02

6

6F

6B

BB

Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed.

Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. or 6. Picture Frame Setting”. Set the data.

2

Wait for 15 sec. Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2) Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value.

4

3

Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, address: 60 to 64, 6B to 6D.

60

01

5

60

02

6

6F

6B

AD

Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. or 6. Picture Frame Setting”. Set the data. Wait until the movement of the shutter stops. Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2) Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value.

Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, address: 6B to 6D, B8 to D7.

Processing after Completing Adjustments: Processing after Completing Adjustments:

Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 60 01 00 Set the data. 2

Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 60 01 00 Set the data.


2

6-18


DSC-F828

10. Light Value Adjustment Adjust the standard LV value. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) Subject Measurement Point

Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450) (Standard picture frame) Data of page: 10, address: 0C, 0D


Data of page: 6F, address: 65 6F

Adjustment Address Specified value1

65 to 67 0FE0 to 1020

Specified value2

40 to 60


Switch setting: ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1

Procedure Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. or 6. Picture Frame Setting”.

2

3 4

60

01

0D

5

60

02

Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2)

6

10

0C

7

10

0D

Read the data, and this data is named D0C. Read the data, and this data is named D0D.

8

Calculate DLV using the following equation (Hexadecimal calculation) DLV = D0C × 100 + D0D Check that DLV satisfies the specified value1.

10 11


6F

65

Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value2.

Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, address: 65 to 67.


60

01

00


6-19

DSC-F828

11. Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment

9)

11-1. Preparation (Get Reference Data) In this work, acquire a reference data for the liner matrix adjustment using a DSC-F828 camera that operates normally. And saves the data in the inside of the PC. Therefore, if the same pattern box and the same 9 colors chart are used, it is not necessary to perform “Get Reference Data” again. The reference data (GodRawData.CSV) is saved in the ProgramFiles\Sony\ F828C1MATRIX holder of the C drive. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) Subject

Acquisition of the reference data is performed automatically.

Note3: When the “Framing check” message is displayed, correct the picture frame, and repeat from step 8).

9 colors chart (PTB-1450) (Standard picture frame) About 6cm from the front of the lens

Note1: When the reference data is acquired using a non-adjusted camera. The linear matrix adjustment cannot be performed correctly.

Fig. 6-1-20. 10) When the “Completion of get reference data” message is displayed. Click the [OK] button.

Switch setting: ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end MACRO ............................................................................ ON FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL Adjusting method: 1) Prepare a DSC-F828 camera that operates normally, and this camera is named a reference camera. 2) Remove the camera under adjustment and installed the reference camera instead. 3) Set up the switches of the reference camera as above-mentioned. 4) Shoot the 9 colors chart with the standard picture frame. (Refer to “6. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450)”. 5) Adjust the focus.. 6) Start the F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ on the PC. 7) Click [Connect] on the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment screen. 8) Click [Get Reference Data] of the file menu of the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment screen.

Fig. 6-1-21. 11) Remove the reference camera and installed the camera under adjustment instead.

Note2: When the “File over write” message is displayed, a reference data file (GodRawData.CSV) exists already in the Program Files\Sony\ F828C1MATRIX holder of the C drive. If you want to save this file, rename it or move it to other holder.

Fig. 6-1-19.

6-20

DSC-F828

11-2. Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment This adjustment does the following adjustment items automatically. Linear matrix adjustment Compensate the dispersion of the linear matrix vale of the CCD imager. AWB 3200K/5800K (Mon) standard data input Acquire the white balance standard data at 3200K and 5800K in monitoring mode. AWB 3200K/5800K (Cap) standard data input Acquire the white balance standard data at 3200K and 5800K in capture mode. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) Subject

Adjustment Page Adjustment Address

9)

The following adjustments are performed automatically. Linear matrix adjustment AWB 3200K/5800K (Mon) standard data input AWB 3200K/5800K (Cap) standard data input

Note: When the “Framing check” message is displayed, correct the picture frame, and repeat from step 7).

When the “File C:\ProgramFiles\Sony\F828C1MATRIX\ GodRawData.CSV can not be open” message is displayed, the reference data file (GodRawData.CSV) for the liner matrix adjustment is not in the inside of the PC. Therefore, perform “11-1. Preparation (Get Reference Data)”.

9 colors chart (PTB-1450) (Standard picture frame) About 6cm from the front of the lens 6E 80 to 9F (Linear matrix adjustment) 04 to 21, 24 to 49 (AWB 3200K/ 5800K standard data input)

Switch setting: ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end Adjusting method: 1) Install the camera for adjustment. 2) Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 3) Set up the switches of the reference camera as above-mentioned. 4) Shoot the 9 colors chart with the standard picture frame. (Refer to “6. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450)”. 5) Adjust the focus.. 6) Start the F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ on the PC. 7) Click [Connect] on the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment screen. 8) Click [Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment] on the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment screen.

Fig. 6-1-23.

Fig. 6-1-24. 10) When the “Completion of adjustment” message is displayed. Click the [OK] button.

Fig. 6-1-22.

Fig. 6-1-25. 11) If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)

6-21

DSC-F828

12. Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Normal mode) Adjust the color reproduction of yellow, red, blue and cyan so that proper color reproduction is produced. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) Subject

Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Specified Value

For CAP-Normal mode

9 colors chart (PTB-1450) Color bar chart (PTB-450) (Standard picture frame) Video terminal of A/V OUT jack NTSC vectorscope Each center of six color luminance points should settle within each color reproduction frame.

Note: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Switch setting: ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end VIDEO OUT (SET UP setting) .................................... NTSC Burst position

Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 2

3

7A

18

4 5 6

7A 60 60

18 37 01

Fig. 6-1-26.

Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. or 6. Picture Frame Setting”. Read the data, and memorize it. 00 39 AB

Set the data. Set the data. Set the data.

7 8

Wait for 1 sec. Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of the vectorscope so that the burst luminance point is set at the specified position.

9

Check that each center of six color luminance points is set in each color reproduction frame.

Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 2 3 4 5

60 7A

60

01 18

37

00

Set the data. Set the data memorized at “Adjusting method”. Wait for 1 sec. Read the data, and check it is “00”. Perform “Color Reproduction Check”. If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)

6-22

DSC-F828

13. Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Real mode) Adjust the color reproduction of yellow, red, blue and cyan so that proper color reproduction is produced. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) Subject

Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Specified Value

For CAP-Real mode

9 colors chart (PTB-1450) Color bar chart (PTB-450) (Standard picture frame) Video terminal of A/V OUT jack NTSC vectorscope Each center of six color luminance points should settle within each color reproduction frame.

Note: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Switch setting: ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end VIDEO OUT (SET UP setting) .................................... NTSC

Burst position

Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 2

3

60

57

01

Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. or 6. Picture Frame Setting”. Set the data.

4 5 6

7A 7A 60

24 24 37

00 39

Read the data, and memorize it. Set the data. Set the data.

7 8

60

01

AB

9

Fig. 6-1-27.

Set the data. Wait for 1 sec. Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of the vectorscope so that the burst luminance point is set at the specified position. Check that each center of six color luminance points is set in each color reproduction frame.

10

Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 60 01 00 Set the data. 2

7A

24

3

60

57

4 5 6

60

37

00

Set the data memorized at “Adjusting method”. Set the data. Wait for 1 sec. Read the data, and check it is “00”. Perform the next adjustment. If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)

6-23

DSC-F828

14. CCD Linearity Check Data picking is done to keep output linearity of the CCD imager, even if the input level of CCD imager changes. Mode STILL(P AUTO) (P) Subject Measurement Point

Checking method: Order Page Address Data 1

Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450) (Standard picture frame) Data of page: 10, address: 80, 81, 82, 83

2

60

01

3 4

60

E1

5

10

80

10

81

Measuring Instrument Specified value1

97 to 103 (Note1)

Specified value2 Specified value3

94 to 106 (Note1) 92 to 108 (Note1)

6

Specified value4 Specified value5

97 to 104 (Note1) 94 to 109 (Note1)

7

Specified value6

92 to 112 (Note1)

F9

Wait for 2 sec. Read the data, and check it is “08”. Read the data, and this data is named D80. Read the data, and this data is named D81. Calculate DRG0 using the following equation (Hexadecimal calculation) DRG0 = D80 × 100 + D81 Read the data, and this data is named D82.

10

82

9

10

83

11 12

60 60

01 E1

00 00


13 14

77

72

48


15 16 17

60

01

F9

60

E1

Set the data. Wait for 2 sec. Read the data, and check it is “08”.

18

10

80

Read the data, and memorize it. Set the data.

19

10

81

20

Read the data, and this data is named D83. Calculate DBG0 using the following equation (Hexadecimal calculation) DBG0 = D82 × 100 + D83

10 Switch setting: ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end

1 2

Procedure Install the clear chart. Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. Check the picture frame. If deviated, perform “5. or 6. Picture Frame Setting”.

3

4 5

75 75

09 09

6 7

77 77

F6 F6

Read the data, and memorize it. Set Bit2 of the data to “0”. (Note3)

8 9

77 77

F7 F7


10 11

77 77

F2 F2


12 13

77 77

F2 72

Set Bit0 of the data to “0”. (Note3) Read the data, and memorize it.

14 15

60 60

14 12

16 17

75 75

18 19

04

90 9F


17 17

AA


75 75

18 18

00


20 21

75 75

19 19

E8


22 23

75 75

1A 1A

54


24 25

75 75

1B 1B

74


26

Perform “Preparation” before this adjustment. Set the data.

8

Note1: Decimal number. Note2: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and set data: 00. Note3: For the bit values, refer to “6-2. SERVICE MODE”, “2-2. 2. Bit value discrimination”.

Preparation: Order Page Address Data

Procedure

Read the data, and this data is named D80. Read the data, and this data is named D81. Calculate DRG1 using the following equation (Hexadecimal calculation) DRG1 = D80 × 100 + D81 Read the data, and this data is named D82.

21

10

82

22

10

83

24 25

60 60

01 E1

00 00


26 27

77

72

0C


28 29

60

01

F9


30 31

60 10

E1 80

Read the data, and check it is “08”. Read the data, and this data is named D80.

32

10

81

Read the data, and this data is named D81.


23

Wait for 2 sec.

6-24

DSC-F828

Order Page Address Data 33

34

10

82

35

10

83

Procedure

37 38

60 60

01 E1

00 00


39 40

60 77

12 72

A2 06


41 42

60

01

F9

Wait for 2 sec. Set the data.

60

E1

45

10

80

46

10

81

47

10

82

49

10

83

50

51

52

53

54

56

Check that B/G ratio (2) satisfies the specified value 5. (Decimal number) Linearity check of very low luminance

57

Check that R/G ratio (3) satisfies the specified value 3. (Decimal number) Check that B/G ratio (3) satisfies the specified value 6. (Decimal number)

58

Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 60 01 00 Set the data.

Wait for 2 sec. Read the data, and check it is “08”. Read the data, and this data is named D80. Read the data, and this data is named D81. Calculate DRG3 using the following equation (Hexadecimal calculation) DRG3 = D80 × 100 + D81

48

Linearity check of low luminance Check that R/G ratio (2) satisfies the specified value 2. (Decimal number)

55


36

43 44

Order Page Address Data Procedure

Calculate DRG2 using the following equation (Hexadecimal calculation) DRG2 = D80 × 100 + D81 Read the data, and this data is named D82.

Read the data, and this data is named D82. Read the data, and this data is named D83. Calculate DBG3 using the following equation (Hexadecimal calculation) DBG3 = D82 × 100 + D83 Convert DRG0, DBG0, DRG1, DBG1, DRG2, DBG2, DRG3 and DBG3 to decimal number, and obtain DRG0’, DBG0’, DRG1’, DBG1’, DRG2’, DBG2’, DRG3’ and DBG3’. Calculate R/G ratio (1), B/G ratio (1), R/G ratio (2), B/G ratio (2), R/G ratio (3) and B/G ratio (3), using the following equations (Decimal calculation) R/G ratio (1) = (DRG1’/DRG0’) × 100 B/G ratio (1) = (DBG1’/DBG0’) × 100 R/G ratio (2) = (DRG2’/DRG0’) × 100 B/G ratio (2) = (DBG2’/DBG0’) × 100 R/G ratio (3) = (DRG3’/DRG0’) × 100 B/G ratio (3) = (DBG3’/DBG0’) × 100 Linearity check of high luminance Check that R/G ratio (1) satisfies the specified value 1. (Decimal number) Check that B/G ratio (1) satisfies the specified value 4. (Decimal number)

6-25

2 3

60 60

E1 12

00 00


4 5

60 75

14 09

00

Set the data. Set the data memorized at “Preparation”.

6

77

F6

7

77

F7

8

77

F2

9

77

72

10

75

17

11

75

18

12

75

19

13

75

1A

14

75

1B

Set the data memorized at “Preparation”. Set the data memorized at “Preparation”. Set the data memorized at “Preparation”. Set the data memorized at “Preparation”. Set the data memorized at “Preparation”. Set the data memorized at “Preparation”. Set the data memorized at “Preparation”. Set the data memorized at “Preparation”. Set the data memorized at “Preparation”.

15 16


17

Perform next adjustments. If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)

DSC-F828

15. CCD White Defect Compensation Check The positions of the white defective pixel are detected, and check that the pixels can be corrected. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) Subject Measurement Point


Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450) (Standard picture frame) Data of page: 60, address: 55

Measuring Instrument Specified value 1

00 to 40

Specified value 2

00

Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and set data: 00. Note2: The white defective pixels are influenced by temperature. Therefore, perform adjustment after the power is turned on, and sufficient time es, and the camera gets warm.

Switch setting: ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1


2

3

7D

64

4 5

7D 7D

64 69

1E

Read the data, and memorize the data. Set the data. Read the data, and memorize the data.

6 7

7D 60

69 01

28 8B


8 9

60

02

10

60

55

11

60

01

Wait for about 20 sec. Read the data, and check it is “01”.

00

Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 1. Set the data.

64

0F

Wait for 1 sec. Set the data.

69 01

C0 87


12 13

7D

14 15

7D 60

16 17

60

02

18

60

55

Wait for about 20 sec. Read the data, and check it is “01”. Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 2.

6-26

1 2

60

01

3

7D

64

4

7D

69

00

Set the data. Wait for 1 sec. Set the data memorized at “Adjusting method”. Set the data memorized at “Adjusting method”.

5 6


7


DSC-F828

16. CCD Black Defect Compensation Check The positions of the black defective pixel are detected, and check that the pixels can be corrected. And confirms that there is no trash in the surface of the CCD imager, the optical filter and the inside of the lens. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) Subject Measurement Point


Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450) (Standard picture frame) Data of page: 60, address: 55

Measuring Instrument Specified value 1

00 to 30

Specified value 2

00

Note1: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and no reflection on the clear chart. Note2: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and Set data: 00.

Switch setting: ZOOM ....................................................................... 70 (mm) Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1

2

3 4 5


7D 7D 60

65 65 2C

0A 01

Read the data, and memorize it. Set the data. Set the data.

6 7

60

92

00

Rotate ZOOM ring and set the ZOOM to “70” position. Set the data.

8 9

60 60

93 01

00 79


10 11

60

30

08


12 13

60

07

14 15

60

01

16

60

02

17

60

55

18 19

60

01

00


20 21

7D 60

65 01

0E 89


22 23

60

02

24

60

55

Read the data, and check it is “01”. Check that the whole of the screen is white. 8D

Set the data. Wait for about 35 sec. Read the data, and check it is “01”. Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 1. If the data is “00”, proceed to “Processing after Completing Adjustments”

Wait for about 35 sec. Read the data, and check it is “01”. Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 2.

6-27

1 2

60

01

00


3 4

60 60

2C 30

00 00


5

7D

65

6

Set the data memorized at “Adjusting method”. Save the data.

7 8

Wait for 2sec. Set the ZOOM to WIDE end.

9


DSC-F828

17. Strobe Adjustment Adjust the light level and white balance when the strobe light flashes. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) Subject Measurement Point

Background paper (J-2501-130-A) (50cm from the front of the lens) Data of page 6F, address: DC


Data of page 6E, address: 4F 6F 6E

Adjustment Address Specified Value1

D8 to EF 03 to 09

Specified Value2

00


72 to 75

Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room or use the flash adjustment box. Note2: Any light other than the strobe light should not light up the plate. Note3: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only once. Note4: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Switch setting: ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end FLASH ......................................................................... OPEN Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1

Procedure

2 3

60 60

2C 92

01 FF

Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. Set the data. Set the data.

4 5

60 60

93 6C

FF 01


6 7

60

01

79


8 9

60 6E

07 4F

FF

10 11

60

01

B9

12

60

02

13

6F

D8

14 15

60

01

16 17

60

ED

18 19

60

01

20 21

60 6F

02 D8

Read the data, and check it is “01”. Read the data, and check it is “00”.

22

6F

DC

23

6E

4F

Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 1. Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 2.

Read the data, and check it is “01”. Set the data. Set the data. Check the flashing. Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note5) Read the data, and check it is “00”.

00

Set the data. Wait for 5 sec. Read the data, and check it is “02”. Wait for 1 sec.

E7

Set the data. Check the flashing.

Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, address: D8 to EF, and to page: 6E, address: 72 to 75.

6-28

1 2

60 60

01 2C

00 00


3 4

60 60

6C 92

00 00


5 6

60

93

00


DSC-F828

18. AF Laser Output Adjustment Adjust the AF laser output power. Mode STILL (P AUTO) (P) Subject Measurement Point

Background paper (J-2501-130-A). (50cm from the front of the lens) Data of page 6F, address: 13


6F


10 to 16 00

Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room or use the flash adjustment box. Note2: Any light other than the strobe light should not light up the plate.

Switch setting: ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 2 3

6F 6F

10 15

20 48


4 5

60

01

AF

Write the data. Check that the AF laser is lit.

6 7

60

02

8

6F

13

Wait for 8 sec. Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note3) Read the data, and check it satisfies the specified value 1.

Note3: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F, address: 10 to 16.

Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 60 01 00 Write the data. 2


6-29

DSC-F828

19. AF Laser Axis Check Check the AF laser optical axis. Mode STILL(P AUTO) (P) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Specified Value

Background paper (J-2501-130-A) (1m from the front of the lens) Monitor TV (under scan) All hologram patterns are within the inspection frame.

Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room.

Preparations: 1) Take a copy of the AF Laser axis frame with a clear sheet. (Reduce or enlarge the frame in same size as the effective picture frame of the monitor TV.)

Fig. 6-1-28.

Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments” is performed. 2 3

60 60

30 2C

06 01


4 5

60

92

05

Set the ZOOM to WIDE end. Set the data.

6 7

60 60

93 01

70 79

Set the data. Write the data.

8 9 10

60 60

07 01

00

Wait for 3 sec. Read the data, and check it is “01”. Write the data.

11 12

60 60

22 23

05 0A


13

15 16

60 60

92 93

05 70


17 18

60

01

79

Write the data. Wait for 3 sec.

19 20

60 60

07 58

01

Read the data, and check it is “01”. Set the data.

21 22

60 60

14 01

8A 00

Set the data. Write the data.

1 2

60 60

14 22

00 00


3 4

60 60

23 2C

00 00


5 6

60 60

30 58

00 00


7 8

60 60

92 93

00 00


9

Check that all hologram patterns are within the inspection frame. (Fig. 6-1-15.) Set the ZOOM to TELE end.

14

23


Check that all hologram patterns are not unfocused.

6-30


DSC-F828

1-5.

2. EVF Initial Data Input Mode PLAY (

COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER ADJUSTMENT

Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages caused by static electricity. Note2: If you perform the adjustments with FINDER/LCD switch (Control switch block (UNDER)) removed, set the following data. 1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: 1A. 2) Select page: 80, address: 11, and set data: 01. Reset the data after completing adjustment. 1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: FF. 2) Select page: 80, address: 11, and set data: 00.

Note: When the power is turned off, some data settings will be released. So perform this data setting again when the power is turned off.

00 80

01 70

01 01

Procedure Set the data. Set the data.

After completing the EVF system adjustments, release the data setting. Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 80 70 00 Set the data. 2 3 4

00

01

00

Arbitrary 8F

Adjustment Address

70, 71, 73 to 78, 7A, 7C

Address 70 71 73 74 75 76 77 78 7A 7C

1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments Perform the following data setting before the EVF system adjustments.

1 2

Signal Adjustment Page

Adjusting method: 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 8F, and set the data in the following table. 3) Save the data. 4) Wait for 2sec. 5) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Switch setting: FINDER/LCD .......................................................... FINDER


)

Save the data. Wait for 2 sec. Set the data.

6-31

Data 53 96 80 A4 8D 40 00 90 80 38

Remark Fixed data Fixed data VCO adj. V COM adj. Bright adj. Fixed data Fixed data White balance adj. White balance adj. Contrast adj.

DSC-F828

3. VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board) Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will be blurred. Mode PLAY ( ) Subject Measurement Point

Arbitrary Data of page: 80, address: 02


8F


73 01

4. Bright Adjustment (SY-096 board) Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode PLAY ( ) Subject Measurement Point



8F


75 01

Note1: A memory stick must be inserted. Note1: A memory stick must be inserted.

Adjusting method: Adjusting method:

Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments” is performed. 2 3

8F 80

84 00

2F 00


4 5

80 80

02 01

00 80


6 7

80

00

01


8

80

9 10

02

Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments” is performed.

Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2) Wait for 1 sec.

8F 80

88 00

9F 00


4 5

80 80

02 01

00 80


6 7

80

00

03


8

80

02

9 10

If finish the EVF system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments”.)

Note2: If the data is other than “01”, adjustment has errors. See the following table.

Data of page: 80, address: 02 01 10 20 30 40 50

2 3

Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2) Wait for 1 sec. If finish the EVF system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments”.)


Contents of adjustment error


Normally finished Reached an upper limit Reached a lower limit Time out Out of adjustment range Adjustment is impossible

6-32

Contents of adjustment error Normally finished Reached an upper limit Reached a lower limit Time out Out of adjustment range Adjustment is impossible

DSC-F828

5. Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board) Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode PLAY ( ) Subject Measurement Point



8F


7C 01

6. V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board) Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and conspicuous vertical lines. Mode PLAY ( ) Subject Measurement Point



8F


74 01



Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments” is performed. 2 3

8F 80

89 00

44 00


4 5

80 80

02 01

00 80


6 7

80

00

05


8

80

9 10

02

Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments” is performed.


8F 80

8C 00

03 00


4 5

80 80

02 01

00 80


6 7

80

00

07


8

80

02

9 10



2 3






6-33


DSC-F828

7. White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board) Correct the white balance. If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced. Mode PLAY ( ) Subject Measurement Point

Arbitrary Check on LCD display


8F


78, 7A The EVF screen should not be colored.

Note1: Use the AC power adaptor during this adjustment. Note2: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts. If necessary, adjust them. 1. LCD 2. Light induction plate 3. IC902

Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments” is performed. 2 3

80 80

71 89

52 02


4 5

8F 8F

78 7A

90 80


6

8F

78

Check that the LCD screen is not colored. If not colored, proceed to step 10.

7

8F

78

8

8F

7A

Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored. Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored.

9

8F

7A

10

80

71

FF

If the LCD screen is colored, repeat steps 7 to 9. Set the data.

11 12


13

If finish the EVF system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments”.)

6-34

DSC-F828

1-6.

2. LCD Initial Data Input

LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT

Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages caused by static electricity. Note2: If you perform the adjustments with FINDER/LCD switch (Control switch block (UNDER)) removed, set the following data. 1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: 1A. 2) Select page: 80, address: 11, and set data: 00. Reset the data after completing adjustment. 1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: FF. 2) Select page: 80, address: 11, and set data: 00.

1. Data Setting during LCD System Adjustments Perform the following data setting before the LCD system adjustments.

00 80

01 70

01 01

Procedure Set the data. Set the data.

After completing the LCD system adjustments, release the data setting. Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 80 70 00 Set the data. 2 3 4


01

00

Signal Adjustment Page

Arbitrary 8F

Adjustment Address

20, 21, 23 to 28, 2A, 2C

Address 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 2A 2C

Note1: When the power is turned off, some data settings will be released. So perform this data setting again when the power is turned off.

1 2

PLAY (

)

Adjusting method: 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 8F, and write the data in the following table. 3) Save the data. 4) Wait for 2sec. 5) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Switch setting: FINDER/LCD ................................................................. LCD


Mode

Set the data.

6-35

Data A5 19 80 76 84 00 63 90 80 72

Remark Fixed data Fixed data VCO adj. VCOM adj. Fixed data Fixed data Fixed data White balance adj. White balance adj. Contrast adj.

DSC-F828

3. VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board) Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will be blurred. Mode PLAY ( ) Subject Measurement Point



8F


23 01

4. Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board) Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode PLAY ( ) Subject Measurement Point



8F


2C 01



Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during LCD System Adjustments” is performed. 2 3

8F 80

34 00

1D 00


4 5

80 80

02 01

00 00


6 7

80

00

01


8

80

9 10

02

Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during LCD System Adjustments” is performed.

Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2) Wait for 1 sec.

8F 80

39 00

80 00


4 5

80 80

02 01

00 01


6 7

80

00

05


8

80

02

9 10

If finish the LCD system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during LCD System Adjustments”.)



2 3

Read the data, and check it is “01”. (Note2) Wait for 1 sec. If finish the LCD system adjustments, release the data setting. (See “1. Data Setting during LCD System Adjustments”.)





6-36


DSC-F828

5. V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board) Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and conspicuous vertical lines. Mode

PLAY (



Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value

6. White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board) Correct the white balance. If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced.

)

8F 24 The brightness difference between the section A and section B is minimum.

Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during LCD System Adjustments” is performed. 80 8F

71 41

4

8F

24

76 23

Set the data. Set the data. Change the data so that the brightness of the section A and that of the section B is equal. Set the data.

5

80

71

FF

6 7 8

8F

41

21

9

A

B

B

A

A

B

)


8F


28, 2A The LCD screen should not be colored.

Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 Check that “1. Data Setting during LCD System Adjustments” is performed.


A


Adjusting method:

Set the data. Save the data. Wait for 2 sec.

B

PLAY (


Note1: Use the AC power adaptor during this adjustment. Note2: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts. If necessary, adjust them. 1. LCD 2. Light induction plate 3. IC801

Note: A memory stick must be inserted.

2 3

Mode

Fig. 6-1-16.

6-37

2 3

80 80

71 84

52 02


4 5

8F 8F

28 2A

90 80


6

8F

28

Check that the LCD screen is not colored. If not colored, proceed to step 10.

7

8F

28

8

8F

2A

Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored. Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored.

9

8F

2A

10

80

71

FF

If the LCD screen is colored, repeat steps 7 to 9. Set the data.

11 12


13


DSC-F828

6-2. SERVICE MODE

2. Operation

2-1.

•

Page change To change the page, click [Page] on the SEUS screen and enter the page to be changed. The page is displayed in hexadecimal notation.

•

Address change To change the address, click [Address] on the SEUS screen and enter the address to be changed. Or click [B] to increase the address, click [b] to decrease the address. The address is displayed in hexadecimal notation.

•

Data change To change the data, click [Set] on the SEUS screen and enter the data. Or click [v] to increase the data, click [V] to decrease the data. The data is displayed in hexadecimal notation. This operation does not write the data to the nonvolatile memory. If you want to write the changed data, click [Save] to write it.

•

Data saving To write the all changed data to the nonvolatile memory, click [Save] on the SEUS screen. and wait for 2 sec.

APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS)

The application for adjustment (SEUS) is used for changing the calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The SEUS performs bi-directional communication between the personal computer (PC) and the unit using the USB signal. The resultant data of this bi-directional communication is written in the nonvolatile memory. 2-1-1. Using Method of SEUS Switch setting: MS/CF ..................................................... MS (Memory stick) 1. Connection 1) Connect the HASP key to the USB port of the PC. 2) Connect the camera to another USB port of the PC. 3) Insert a memory stick to the camera. 4) Confirm that the camera starts in the USB mode. 5) Start the SEUS on the PC. 6) Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen. If the connection is normal, the SEUS screen will be as shown in Fig. 6-2-1, indicating the “connected” state. Note: The SEUS will go in “disconnect” state, if the camera is turned off (for instance, by resetting the unit). In such a case, click [Connect] on the SEUS screen to restore the “connected” state.

Note: Even if [Write] or [Store] on the SEUS screen is clicked, the data can not be write to the nonvolatile memory.

•

Data reading The data displayed on the SEUS screen are the data values at the time when the pages and addresses were set, and they are not updated automatically. To check the data change, click [Read] on the SEUS screen and update the displayed data.

2-1-2. Precaution on Use of SEUS Mishandling of the SEUS may erase the correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended that all adjustment data be saved before beginning adjustments. 1) 2) 3) 4)

Fig. 6-2-1.

6-38

Click [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen. Click [Page], and enter the page number to be saved. Click [Read] to read the data to be saved from the camera. Click [File] and save the data to the PC.

DSC-F828

2-2.

2. Bit value discrimination Bit values must be discriminated using the hexadecimal data for following items. Use the table below to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0”.

SERVICE MODE

1. Setting the Test Mode Page 2F Address 23

• •

•

Data 80

Function Normal

11 12

Forced STILL mode power ON Forced PLAY mode power ON

04

Forced MOVIE mode power ON

Hexadecimal data

Before setting the data, select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. For page 2F, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory by saving data. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be exited even when the main power is turned off. After completing adjustments/repairs, release the data setting . 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 2F, address: 23, and set data: 80. 3) Save the data. 4) Wait for 2 sec. 5) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00.

bit3 to bit0 discrimination bit7 to bit4 discrimination

Display on the adjustment remote commander 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A 8 9 A (A) B (b) C (c) D (d) E (E) B F (F )

bit3 or bit7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Bit values bit2 bit1 or or bit6 bit5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1

bit0 or bit4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Examples: If the hexadecimal data is “8E”, the bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the A column, and the bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown in the B column.

6-39

DSC-F828

3. Switch check (1) Page 20 Bit 0

Address 80

Function POWER switch (XPWER ON) (Control switch block (TOP))

When bit value=1 When bit value=0 OFF ON

Using method: 1) Select page: 20, address: 80. 2) Read the data. By discriminating the bit value of the data, the state of the switch can be discriminated. 4. Switch check (2) Page 20

Address 90 to 96

Using method: 1) Select page: 20, address: 90 to 96. 2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the pressed key can be discriminated. Address 90 (KEY AD0) (IC401 J6 )

91 (KEY AD1) (IC401 H6 ) 92 (KEY AD2) (IC401 G6 ) 93 (KEY AD3 ) (IC401 J7 ) 94 (KEY AD4) (IC401 H7 ) 95 (MODE DIAL 0) (IC401 J8 ) 96 (MODE DIAL 1) (IC401 J9 )

00 to 0B Control button DOWN (Control switch block (MID)) S008 Control button RIGHT (Control switch block (MID)) S003 QUICK REVIEW (Control switch block (UNDER)) S005 OPEN (FLASH) (SW-410 board) (S001) NIGHT SHOT/ NIGHT FRAMING (SW-410 board) (S007) Mode dial STILL (AE-S) (Control switch block (TOP)) Mode dial STILL (AUTO) (Control switch block (TOP))

5. Switch check (3) Page 60

0C to 26 Control button UP (Control switch block (MID)) S006 Control button LEFT (Control switch block (MID)) S010 DIGITAL ZOOM (Control switch block (UNDER)) S004 FLASH (SW-410 board) (S002)

27 to 47 DISPLAY WINDOW BACKLIGHT (Control switch block (TOP)) S003 Control button CENTER (Control switch block (MID)) S007 SELF TIMER (Control switch block (UNDER)) S003 METERING MODE (SW-410 board) (S005)

Data 48 to 72 73 to A4 A5 to DC DD to FF WHITE COMPACT MEMORY EXPOSURE BALANCE FLASH STICK (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch block (TOP)) block (UNDER)) block (UNDER)) block (TOP)) S005 S004 S006 S006 AE LOCK MENU (Control switch (Control switch block (MID)) block (MID)) S012 S002 SCREEN STATUS FINDER (Control switch (Control switch block (UNDER)) block (UNDER)) S002 S001 MACRO BURST/BRACKET FOCUS AUTO (SW-410 board) (SW-410 board) (SW-410 board) (S006) (S003) (S004)

No key input

LCD (Control switch block (UNDER)) S001 FOCUS MANUAL (SW-410 board) (S004)

No key input Mode dial Mode dial STILL (AE-A) STILL (MANUAL) (Control switch (Control switch block (TOP)) block (TOP)) Mode dial Mode dial STILL (P AUTO) PB (Control switch (Control switch block (TOP)) block (TOP))

Mode dial Mode dial STILL (SCN) MOVIE (Control switch (Control switch block (TOP)) block (TOP)) Mode dial SET UP (Control switch block (TOP))

Address B9

Function FLASH OPEN DETECT switch (LS-067 board S001)

When data = 11 When data = 01 Close Open

Using method: 1) Select page: 60, address: B9. 2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.

6-40

No key input

No key input

DSC-F828


Address 13

Function When data = 00 When data = 01 When data = 02 Shutter button (XAE LOCK SW) (Control switch block (TOP)) OFF ON ON Shutter button (XSHTR ON SW) (Control switch block (TOP)) OFF OFF ON Using method: 1) Select page: 80, address: 13. 2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the state of the switches can be discriminated.


Address 14

Function CF COVER switch (Control switch block (CENTER))

When data = 00 When data = 01 Open Close

Using method: 1) Select page: 80, address: 14. 2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the state of the switch can be discriminated. 8. Switch check (6) Page 80

Address 15

Using method: 1) Select page: 80, address: 15. 2) By discriminating the data, the rotation of the control dial can be discriminated. Control dial (Control switch block (CENTER)) When rotated in the left direction. When rotated in the right direction.

Data 01 02

9. LED, Segment LCD check Page 20 Address 04 Page 80 Page 8E

Address 12 Address FE

Using method: 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, set data: 01. 2) Select page: 20, address: 04, set data: 02. 3) Select page: 8E, address: FE, set data: 20. 4) Select page: 80, address: 12, set data: 01. 6) Check that all LED (Power, Charge, Tally, Access, Segment LCD back light) are lit. 7) Select page: 20, address: 04, set data: 08. 8) Check that all segment of the segment LCD are lit. 9) Select page: 20, address: 04, set data: 00. 10) Select page: 80, address: 12, set data: 00. 11) Select page: 8E, address: FE, set data: 00. 12) Select page: 00, address: 01, set data: 00.

6-41

DSC-F828

10. Record of Use check Page 4F Address 94 to 97 Address Function 94 Recording counter 95 (Hexadecimal) 96 97

Remarks 1000000-digit and 1000000-digit 1000000-digit and 10000-digit 1000-digit and 100-digit 10-digit and 1-digit

Using method: 1) The recording counter data is displayed at page: 4F, addresses: 94 to 97. These data are named D94, D95, D96 and D97 respectively. 2) Calculate the recording counter (N) using following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation) N = D97 + D96 × 100 + D95 × 10000 + D94 × 1000000 11. Self Diagnostics Log check Page 20 Address B0 to B8 Address Initial value B0 00 B1 00 B2 00 B3 00 B4 00 B5 00 B6 00 B7 00 B8 00

Function “Repaired by” code (Occurred 1st time) *1 “Block function” code (Occurred 1st time) “Detailed” code (Occurred 1st time) “Repaired by” code (Occurred 2nd time) *1 “Block function” code (Occurred 2nd time) “Detailed” code (Occurred 2nd time) “Repaired by” code (Occurred 3rd time) *1 “Block function” code (Occurred 3rd time) “Detailed” code (Occurred 3rd time)

*1: “C” t “01”, “E” t “03” Using method: 1) The self diagnostics log is displayed at page: 20, addresses: B0 to B5. Note: These data will be erased when the lithium battery (LR-018 board) is removed.

6-42

DSC-F828 ⟨FOR

CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT⟩

For CAP-Normal mode

Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION FRAME with a clear sheet for use.

✂

✂

For CAP-Real mode

— 43 —

DSC-F828

ILLUMINATION FRAME⟩

Take a copy of AF ILLUMINATION FRAME with a clear sheet for use.

— 44E —

✂

⟨AF

Sony Dsc-f828 Service Manual 4q6c1j

Overview 26281t

More details 6y5l6z

Related Documents 3h463d

Sony Bravia Service Manual 3t3k10

Sony+hvr-hd1000 Service Manual 2u33t

Sony Ericsson W395 Service Manual 4j153m

Sony Cdx-gt300mp Service Manual 3j1j3n

Sony Mz-r900 Service Manual 166h2t

Sony Dsc-f828 Service Manual 4q6c1j